The Olivia - Project Manual - Vol 2
HONORS COLLEGE AND RESIDENCES 08/18/14 – GMP PRICING DOCUMENTS PACKAGE Page - 1
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 VOLUME NO. 2
DECEMBER 22, 2014
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
LUXURY RESIDENCE AND SHOPPES
CARMEL, INDIANA
CSO PROJECT # 12043
ARCHITECT:
CSO Architects, Inc.
8831 Keystone Crossing, Indianapolis, IN 46240
T (317) 848.7800 F (317) 574.0957
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER:
Lynch Harrison & Brumleve, Inc.
550 Virginia Avenue, Indianapolis, IN 46203
T (317) 423.1550 F (317) 423.1551
LANDSCAPE DESIGN:
Context, LLC
12 South Main Street, Suite 200, Fortville, IN 46040
T (317) 485.6900
CIVIL ENGINEER:
American Structurepoint, Inc.
7260 Shadeland Station, Indianapolis, IN 46256
T (317) 547.5580 F (317) 543.0270
MEP ENGINEERS:
Circle Design Group, Inc.
5510 South East Street, Suite F, Indianapolis, IN 46227
T (317) 781.6200 F (317) 781.6201
12043 00 01 10 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTE: SPECIFICATION ITALICS/BOLD WERE PREVIOUSLY ISSUED AS PART OF BID PACKAGE
NO. 1
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
VOLUME NUMBER 1
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
00 00 00 COVER
00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 19 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 54 13 GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY
04 72 00 CAST STONE MASONRY
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
05 31 00 STEEL DECKING
05 40 00 METAL STUD FRAMING
05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS
05 51 00 METAL STAIRS
05 52 13 RAILINGS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 16 00 SHEATHING
06 17 53 SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
06 20 13 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 43 00 WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS
06 46 00 WOOD TRIM
06 48 00 WOOD FRAMES
12043 00 01 10 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTE: SPECIFICATION ITALICS/BOLD WERE PREVIOUSLY ISSUED AS PART OF BID PACKAGE
NO. 1
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION
07 24 00 EXTERIOR FINISH AND INSULATION SYSTEM (EFIS)
07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS
07 46 00 SIDING AND SYNTHETIC WOOD TRIM
07 54 23 EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING (ADHERED)
07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 71 00 ROOF SPECIALTIES
07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES
07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
07 84 46 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08 36 13 SECTIONAL DOORS
08 41 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08 53 13 VINYL WINDOWS AND DOORS
08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
08 80 00 GLAZING
08 91 19 FIXED LOUVERS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 21 16 GYPSUM SHAFT ASSEMBLIES
09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD
09 30 00 TILING
09 65 16 RESLIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
09 68 13 CARPETING
9 91 00 PAINTING
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12 35 30 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
12043 00 01 10 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTE: SPECIFICATION ITALICS/BOLD WERE PREVIOUSLY ISSUED AS PART OF BID PACKAGE
NO. 1
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
14 21 00 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
DIVISION 31– EARTHWORK
31 10 00 SITE CLEARING
31 20 00 EARTH MOVING
31 23 19 DEWATERING
31 31 16 TERMITE CONTROL
31 62 25 RAMMED AGGREGATE PIERS
DIVISION 32– SITE WORK
32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING
32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING
32 13 73 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 33– UTILITIES
33 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
33 11 00 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
33 31 00 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
33 41 00 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
33 46 00 SUBDRAINAGE
12043 00 01 10 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTE: SPECIFICATION ITALICS/BOLD WERE PREVIOUSLY ISSUED AS PART OF BID PACKAGE
NO. 1
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
VOLUME NUMBER 2
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 05 01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
21 05 02 ASSIGNMENTS OF MISCELLANEOUS WORK
21 05 03 COMPLETION AND STARTUP
21 05 19 METERS AND GAUGES
21 05 29 BASIC PIPING REQUIREMENTS
21 05 50 NOISE CONTROL
21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
21 05 64 PAINTING
21 11 19 PIPING SPECIALTIES
21 13 18 COMBINATION WET SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE SYSTEM
21 31 13 FIRE PUMP
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 05 01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
22 05 03 COMPLETION AND STARTUP
22 05 19 METERS AND GAUGES
22 05 29 BASIC PIPING REQUIREMENTS
22 05 41 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING (INTERIOR)
22 05 76 DRAINAGE PIPING CLEANOUTS
22 07 19 PIPE INSULATION
22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
22 11 19 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 11 22 DOMESTIC WATER BOOSTER PUMP
22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM
22 13 17 CONDENSATE PIPING SYSTEM
22 13 19 SANITARY DRAINS
22 14 13 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
22 14 26 STORM DRAINS
22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS/BASIN
22 34 00 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
22 42 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
DIVISION 23 – HVAC
23 05 01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
23 05 02 ASSIGNMENTS OF MISC. WORK
23 05 03 COMPLETION AND STARTUP
23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
23 05 29 BASIC PIPING REQUIREMENTS
23 05 30 PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS AND SUPPORTS
23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION
23 07 19 HVAC PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM
23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
23 31 16 NON-METAL DUCTS
23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
12043 00 01 10 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTE: SPECIFICATION ITALICS/BOLD WERE PREVIOUSLY ISSUED AS PART OF BID PACKAGE
NO. 1
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
23 33 13.16 FIRE DAMPERS
23 33 53 DUCT LINING
23 34 00 HVAC FANS
23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
23 37 23 HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS
23 40 00 HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES
23 81 00 PACKAGED HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
23 82 40 ELECTRIC TERMINAL HEATING UNITS
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 05 02 ASSIGNMENT OF MISC WORK
26 05 19 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING
26 24 16 PANELBOARDS
26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES
26 28 00 LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 82 40 ELECTRIC WALL HEATERS
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 31 00 ADDRESSABLE FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
33 71 73 COMMERCIAL MULTI-METERING
13027 21 05 01 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 21 05 01 – GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. The requirements of the General Conditions, General Requirements, Special Conditions, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Documents and other information
bound herewith form a part of and shall govern all work performed under these specifications.
B. The accompanying fire suppression drawings are issued as part of this
specification. Any requirements shown thereon are equally affective as if included in this specification. Any omissions in the specification or on the
drawings are not to be a basis for failure on the part of the Contractor, from installing fire suppression components required by the systems to operate in the
intended manner. Should any work be called for on the drawings, specifications or in the codes, in such a manner that the Contractor cannot, in his judgment,
comply with the requirements, then the Contractor shall bring the matter to the attention of the Engineer before proceeding with the work.
C. Work includes the installation of equipment, piping, and components necessary
for complete and operable systems.
D. This project includes the following systems:
1. Automatic sprinkler system 2. Standpipe system
1.02 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS USED IN THE DIVISION 21 SPECIFICATIONS AND FIRE
SUPPRESSION DRAWINGS
A. The word "Owner" shall mean the party mentioned in the prime contract agreement, or any representative of his party duly authorized to act in his behalf
in the execution of the work.
B. The word “Construction Manager” shall mean the person, firm or corporation entering into a contract with the Owner to manage construction operations.
C. The word "Contractor" shall mean the person, firm or corporation entering into a
contract to construct and complete the work as described herein.
D. The word "Engineer" shall mean Circle Design Group, Inc. and their representatives assigned to this project.
E. The word "Architect" shall mean CSO Architects and their representatives acting
as the Owner's appointed agent.
F. The words “Commissioning Agent or Engineer” shall mean the Owner’s Agent hired to commission or verify performance of all or portions of the work included
in the contract documents and their representatives.
G. The words "furnish" or “supply” shall mean to purchase and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar subsequent
requirements.
13027 21 05 01 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
H. The word "install" shall mean operations at the project site, including unloading, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing,
curing, protecting, cleaning and similar requirements.
I. The word "provide” shall mean to furnish and install complete and ready for intended use.
1.03 CODES, FEES AND MISCELLANEOUS COSTS
A. All materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable codes,
specifications, local ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations.
B. In cases of difference between building codes, specifications, state laws, local
ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations and the Contract documents, the most stringent shall govern. The Contractor shall promptly notify
the Engineer in writing of any such differences.
C. Non-Compliance: Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply with requirements of applicable building codes, states laws, local ordinances,
industry standards and utility company regulations, he shall bear all costs arising for correction of non-complying items.
D. Applicable Codes and Standards shall include all state laws, local ordinances,
utility company regulations and applicable requirements of the following nationally accepted laws, codes and standards. These requirements are to be
considered minimum and are to be exceeded when so indicated on the drawings or herein specified.
1. Governing Agencies
a. Fire Prevention and Building Safety Commission b. Indiana Department of Health
2. Applicable Codes
a. Indiana Building Code (IBC), 2014, consisting of: (1) International Building Code, 2012
(2) Indiana Amendments b. Indiana Electrical Code (IEC), 2009, consisting of:
(1) NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, 2008 (2) Indiana Amendments
c. Indiana Safety Code for Health Care Facilities, 1991, consisting of:
(1) NFPA 99 Standard for Health Care Facilities 1992 (2) Indiana Amendments
d. Indiana Energy Conservation Code (IECC) 2010, consisting of: (1) American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air
Conditioning Engineers, Inc. Standard 90.1, 2007 Edition (2) Indiana Amendments
e. Indiana Elevator Safety Code 2011 Edition 675 IAC21 (ANSI ASME A17.1, 2007 Edition)
f. Indiana Fire Code (IFC) 2014, consisting of: (1) International Fire Code, 2012
(2) Indiana Amendments 3. Standards
a. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials b. ANSI: American National Standards Institute
13027 21 05 01 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
c. ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers d. NEC: National Electric Code
e. NECA: National Electrical Contractors Association f. NEIS: National Electrical Installation Standards
g. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association h. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
i. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Act j UL: Underwriters Laboratories
k. ADAAG: Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines
l. FM Factory Mutual
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits, payment of all fees, necessary drawings and arranging and paying for all inspections, tests, etc.
which may be required by any governing authority or utility company in connection with the furnishing or installation of any of his work.
1.04 WORK AND WORKMANSHIP
A. All materials and equipment shall be of the highest quality in every respect. All
materials and equipment shall be new and of the latest design and free of defects.
B. Workmanship shall be by skilled workmen of highest standard in strict
accordance with all applicable manufacturers' printed specifications (which, by reference, are made completely a part of these specifications as though herein
repeated), performed under supervision of competent foremen at all times.
C. The Owner has full power to condemn or reject any work, materials or equipment not in accordance with these specifications and construction drawings or not in
conformance with the manufacturers' specifications or drawings which were approved by the Owner or Engineer.
D. Work or equipment that is rejected shall be removed and replaced to the
satisfaction of the Owner, at the Contractor's expense. Work or equipment that is rejected shall be so stated in writing by the Owner or Engineer.
E. Such decisions that the Owner or Engineer may make with respect to questions
concerning the quality, fitness of materials, equipment and workmanship shall be binding upon the parties thereto.
F. Special attention shall be given to accessibility of working parts and controlling
parts. Adjustable parts shall be within easy reach. Removable parts shall have space for removal.
1.05 DEVIATIONS FROM DRAWINGS
A. Fire suppression drawings show the intended arrangement and routing of all
piping, equipment and appurtenances. They shall be followed as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will permit.
B. The Contractor shall investigate structural and finish conditions affecting his work
and shall provide any fittings, offsets and accessories required to accommodate said conditions.
C. Adjustments as a result of coordination with other trades or for reasons to
improve performance, etc. may be made upon receiving the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall document that the adjustment has been
13027 21 05 01 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
coordinated with all parties concerned.
13027 21 05 01 – PAGE 5 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
1.06 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT
All work shall comply with the current requirements of the U.S. Department of Labor
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, entitled Occupational Safety and Health Standards; National Consensus Standards and Established Federal Standards.
1.07 COORDINATION BETWEEN CONTRACTORS
A. The Contractor shall study all drawings and specifications for this project so that
complete coordination between trades will be obtained. Special attention shall be given to points where piping crosses ductwork, cable tray, other piping, where
lights fit into ceilings and where pipe passes through walls and structural elements.
B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to leave necessary room for other trades.
No extra compensation will be allowed to cover the cost of relocating piping, conduit, ducts or equipment found encroaching on space required by the other
trades.
C. The Contractor shall review the electrical requirements of the final equipment selections to ensure such items receive proper electrical services or connections.
D. The Contractor shall provide complete information and cooperation to the other
Contractors and trades pertaining to his work to accomplish coordination for the complete project.
E. The Contractor shall coordinate necessary sleeved openings, excavations, etc.
Cutting and patching shall be held to a minimum.
F. The Contractor is required to attend the periodic progress meetings to accomplish coordination with the Owner, Architect and Engineer.
1.08 INSPECTION
At the appropriate intervals of the fire suppression installation, the Contractor shall inform
the local and state authorities to arrange inspections of his work. Provide Certificates of Inspection when completed.
1.09 REPORTS AND FINAL SUBMISSIONS
A. The Contractor shall submit, for attachment to the Substantial Completion
Certificate, a letter certifying that the fire suppression systems are in accordance with the Indiana Fire Code as amended by the State of Indiana.
B. Submit all other test reports, as hereinafter specified.
13027 21 05 01 – PAGE 6 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCT AND MATERIAL APPROVAL
A. When Manufacturer’s model numbers are listed they are for reference only and
are not to be considered a basis of design. The model numbers listed are the best information made available to the designer by the manufacturer and not
intended to supplant or be inclusive, the criteria defined in the specifications and drawings. The Contractor/Manufacturer shall review the complete construction
documents to assure the products proposed are appropriate and meet the system design criteria.
B. The performance requirements listed in the specifications or shown on the
drawings are the basis of design and will be the benchmark used for submittal review and approval as well as determining if work is accepted or rejected.
C. A specification followed by one or more manufacturers is limited to those
manufacturers. Names of other proposed manufacturers may be submitted for approval to the Engineer a minimum of ten (10) days prior to receiving bids.
Approval will be granted only if issued by Addendum (no exceptions).
D. A specification followed by one or more manufacturers and "or approved equal" is open to equal products or materials. However, the Contractor shall supply one
of the listed manufacturers at no additional cost if Engineer determines substituted product unsatisfactory.
E. Any substituted equipment offered for consideration shall be stated as a separate
item with the bid. State any additive or deductive cost.
F. If changes in piping, equipment, layout or electrical service are brought about by the use of equipment which is not compatible with the layout shown on the
drawings, the Contractor shall include the cost of the necessary changes in his bid.
2.02 SUBCONTRACTORS AND MATERIAL LIST
A. The Contractor shall submit, with his bid, a completed list of manufacturers and
suppliers of each item listed. No substitutions will be allowed, by the Contractor, after award of contract.
B. Failure to submit a fully completed list within the stated time may be cause to
reject the bid.
C. Remove or copy the following list and attach it to the bid form.
13027 21 05 01 – PAGE 7 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.03 LIST FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION CONTRACTOR:
________________________________ (The Contractor)
Material and Suppliers List
SECTION MATERIAL MANUFACTURER SUPPLIER
21 11 19 Double check detector backflow preventor _________________ _________________
21 11 19 Fire department Connection _________________ _________________
21 13 18 Sprinkler heads _________________ _________________ 21 13 18 Pipe and fittings _________________ _________________
21 13 18 Valves _________________ _________________
13027 21 05 01 – PAGE 8 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.04 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY SCHEDULE
A. Submit a schedule listing equipment and materials required for complete
installation, quantity ordered, date of placing order and the promised delivery dates.
B. Any and all probable delivery delays shall be identified at the pre-construction
meeting.
2.05 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings, fabrication drawings, and specific product literature for all products specified and shown on the drawings.
B. Approval of submittals does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for
ordering proper quantities and miscellaneous appurtenances required for operation and/or installation of the respective material or equipment.
C. The following general information is required with each submittal as applicable:
1. The full manufacturer's model number of each item 2. Identification of each item's performance, physical size and construction
data. 3. Identification of finishes.
4. Indicate any modifications made to manufacturers' standard design which are required by these specifications.
5. Location of connection points for external piping or electrical connections.
6. Rough-in, foundation and support point dimensions. 7. Complete wiring diagrams and connection identifications, specific to this
project. 8. Contractor's stamp, signature and date shall be affixed to the submittal
with indication of his review and approval.
D. In addition submit any detailed or specific information as stated in the respective specifications sections.
2.06 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall submit record drawings as stated in the General Conditions,
and as specified herein.
B. During construction, maintain a complete and legible set of drawings, at the job site showing changes and deviations between actual construction and Engineer's
drawings.
C. Submit to Engineer for review at the 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% completion of the work a complete, accurate and neat set of marked-up blueline drawings showing
the complete "as built" construction.
D. This marked-up set shall be returned to the Contractor as many times as necessary in order to obtain desired results.
13027 21 05 01 – PAGE 9 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.07 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Contractor shall submit at job completion, three (3) maintenance manuals and (1)
electronic one in pdf format to the Engineer for approval. The electronic one will be retained by the Engineer and three (3) will be forwarded to the Owner.
B. Maintenance manuals are to include all information relative to maintenance and
operating instructions for all new fire suppression equipment.
C. Maintenance manuals shall be assembled in the following sections:
1. Section 1 a. Title of project
b. Name and addresses of: (1) Owner
(2) Engineer (3) Contractor
2. Section 2: Index of complete contents 3. Section 3:
a. List of all equipment with model number and serial number b. Warranty of each piece of equipment with start and completion
dates. 4. Section 4: valve tag chart
5. Section 6: Products a. Incorporate data sheets, operating instructions, maintenance
instructions, parts list, installation instruction and performance characteristics on each piece of equipment or system in
individually tabbed subsections. b. Label and assemble tabbed sections in numerical order by
corresponding specification section number.
D. Each section shall be separated by a pasteboard tabbed divider. Each section tab shall identify equipment by same name as listed in the index. Tabs shall
extend outside of sheet size.
E. All information shall be arranged in as many three-ring (3" D configuration) vinyl coated notebooks as necessary. Do not overload capacity of binder.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Handle equipment and components carefully to prevent damaging, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged equipment or components; replace
with new.
B. Store equipment and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, theft, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage at all times.
END OF SECTION
13027 21 05 02 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 21 05 02 – ASSIGNMENTS OF MISCELLANEOUS WORK PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WALL OPENINGS
A. Wall openings for fire suppression work not noted on the Architectural or Structural drawings shall be arranged for and provided by the Fire Suppression Contractor.
B. Final sizes and locations of fire suppression penetrations in walls are the responsibility of the Fire Suppression Contractor.
C. Provide approved fire stops for fire rated wall openings.
D. Provide acoustical seals for sound proofing in wall openings.
1.02 ROOF AND FLOOR OPENINGS
A. Roof and floor openings for fire suppression work not noted on the architectural or structural drawings shall be arranged for and provided by Fire Suppression Contractor. Miscellaneous framing required and cutting of openings shall be
furnished and installed by the contractors constructing the roof or floor structure. Fire Suppression Contractor is responsible for notifying those Contractors of
exact locations and sizes prior to construction of the framing. Openings not coordinated and provided shall be arranged and paid for by the Fire Suppression
Contractor.
B. Final sizes and locations of fire suppression penetrations through the roof and floor structures are the responsibility of the Fire Suppression Contractor.
C. All post-tensioned slab penetrations shall be sleeved. Sleeves shall be provided
by the Fire Suppression Contractor and coordinated with the General Contractor.
D. Provide fire retardant plywood sheets on completed roof areas during all operations for walkways and work areas. The contractors working on the
completed new roof shall be responsible for roof protection and assuring the warranty on the roof system is maintained.
E. Counterflashing shall be provided by the Fire Suppression Contractor. Roof
flashing shall be provided by the roofing contractor.
F. All roofing work required on the existing building (openings, flashing, etc.) shall be performed by the Roofing Contractor maintaining the warranty.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
NOT USED PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PLATFORMS AND SUPPORT STANDS
A. Platforms and supporting stands for fire suppression equipment shall be provided by Fire Suppression Contractor.
13027 21 05 02 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
B. Each piece of equipment or apparatus suspended from ceiling or mounted above
floor level shall be provided with suitable structural support, platform or carrier constructed in accordance with best recognized practice in a neat and
workmanlike manner.
C. Contractors shall exercise extreme care that structural members of building are not overloaded by such equipment. In all cases, details of such hangers,
platforms and supports together with total weights of mounted equipment shall be approved by Structural Engineer.
3.02 ATTACHING TO BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
A. Equipment and piping supports shall be attached to structural members (beams, joists, etc) rather than to floor or roof slabs.
B. Where equipment is suspended from concrete or masonry construction, use expansion shields to attach supports to construction. Expansion shield bolt
diameter shall be the same size as support rod diameter, hereinafter specified.
C. Where supports are attached to structural members coated with fireproofing, the contractor shall clean the fireproofing, attach the support and patch the
fireproofing with like material.
3.03 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT A. In the event that equipment furnished requires a larger starter or disconnect than that which is indicated on the documents, the Contractor supplying the larger
equipment shall reimburse the Electrical Contractor supplying the larger starter or disconnect for the difference in labor and material cost.
B. Detailed diagrams and instructions shall be provided by the Contractor supplying
equipment. If connections are different from those shown on the drawings, the contractor shall notify the electrical contractor prior to start of his related work.
C. Review the electrical drawings and specifications. Relays, switches, contactors,
etc. which may be required in addition to those specified or indicated on the electrical drawings shall be furnished by the Contractor for installation by the
Electrical Contractor. These devices shall be mounted by the Electrical Contractor at the apparatus to be installed. The Contractor supplying these
additional devices shall reimburse the Electrical Contractor for his labor and material costs.
D. In the event that several pieces of fire suppression equipment from different
suppliers are combined into one system, Contractor shall furnish complete interface wiring and control diagram to enable the Electrical Contractor to make
proper connections. Diagrams shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to actual wiring.
E. Contractor shall furnish to Electrical Contractor written notice of approval and
acceptance of all control wiring which was installed by the Electrical Contractor for his system(s). Such approval shall be given within thirty (30) days of
completion of all such control wiring. The letter shall be copied to the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
13027 21 05 03 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 21 05 03 – COMPLETION AND STARTUP PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish material and labor required to perform startup of the fire suppression system and equipment installed in this project.
B. Furnish labor and material required to inspect the installed piping systems and
correct deficiencies as specified herein.
C. Furnish labor and equipment required to maintain clean work areas throughout the project and to perform final cleanup.
D. Provide operating and maintenance instructions to the Owner.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General Provisions: Section 21 05 01
B. Assignment of Miscellaneous Work: Section 21 05 02
PART 2: PRODUCTS NOT USED
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS
A. Adhere strictly to the following procedures in completing fire suppression systems.
1. Piping System a. Tighten unions, couplings and flanges in piping systems after
system has been placed in operation. Replace gaskets that show any signs of leakage after tightening.
b. Inspect screwed joints for leakage and remake each joint that appears to be faulty. Do not wait for rust to form. Clean threads
on both parts, apply compound and remake joint. c. Adjust pipe hangers and supports for correct pitch and
alignment. d. Inspect each pressure gauge for calibration and replace those
that are defaced, broken or read incorrectly. 2. General: Remove rust, scale and foreign materials from equipment and
renew any defaced surfaces. If equipment is badly marred, Engineer shall have authority to request that new materials be provided.
B. Complete all applicable startup procedures described in preceding paragraphs
and in the associated articles for particular systems prior to occupancy of spaces served.
C. Provide such continuing adjustment services as necessary to insure proper
functioning of all fire suppression systems after building occupancy and during warranty period.
13027 21 05 03 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
3.02 STARTUP
Perform a startup of each system component installed in this project in strict accordance
with manufacturer's printed procedure.
3.03 TOUCH-UP
A. All fire suppression equipment, cabinets, control panels and other enclosures shall be cleaned and paint touched up as necessary to duplicate factory finished
appearance. Touch-up paint shall exactly match color, composition and quality of factory applied finish.
B. Equipment furnished with factory applied finish shall be protected from injury by
the installing contractor. Any damaged surface shall be repaired by the installing contractor to match original finish or shall be replaced before final acceptance.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Maintain a clean project site throughout the construction period. Provide
personnel to regularly remove debris and unused materials. Coordinate this cleaning effort with other contractors.
B. Remove all debris and unused materials from job site created by fire suppression
work.
C. Clean all equipment to a "like new" condition prior to the system startup and in preparation of final inspection. Vacuum clean all internal components.
D. Clean all mechanical rooms housing fire suppression equipment of debris and
unused material. Vacuum clean mechanical room floors.
E. Clean the exterior surfaces of all exposed piping systems. Vacuum clean if appropriate. Damp/wet clean with soap (chemical if necessary) and water
where required or directed by Owner/Engineer.
END OF SECTION
13027 21 05 19 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 21 05 19 – METERS AND GAUGES PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Provide pressure gauges in the piping systems where shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 21 05 01 B. Basic Piping Requirements: Section 21 05 29
C. Combination Wet Sprinkler and Standpipe System: Section 21 13 18
1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit shop drawings on each gauge type to be used on this project in accordance with
Specifications Section 21 05 01, General Provisions.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 PRESSURE GAUGES - STANDARD
A. Dial size: 4"
B. Case: open front style, phenol or stainless steel C. Bourdon tube: bronze
D. Connection: lower or back as required
E. Accuracy: within 1% of scale range
F. Range: 0.200 psig
G. Manufacturers: Weksler, Ashcroft, Weiss Instruments, Inc., Marsh, or Viking 2.02 PUMP PRESSURE GAUGES - GLYCERINE FILLED A. Dial size: 4" B. Case: open front style, stainless steel C. Ring: stainless steel, bayonet type D. Mounting: stem E. Bourdon tube: stainless steel F. Connection: lower or back as required G. Window: glass H. Dial: acrylic coated, white aluminum
13027 21 05 19 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
I. Pointer: micrometer adjustable; black aluminum J. Movement: stainless steel K. "O" Ring: Buna-N Sealant: RTV L. Accuracy: +1% of scale range M. Range: 0.200 psig N. Manufacturers: Weksler, Ashcroft Type 1009, Weiss Instruments Inc.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PRESSURE GAUGES - INSTALLATION/APPLICATION
Connection in piping: provide a 1/4" ball valve ahead of each gauge. Mount gauges for maximum visibility.
3.02 LOCATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide glycerine filled pressure gauges at all pumps.
B. Provide standard pressure gauges at all locations shown on drawings.
C. Provide pressure gauge on wet fire riser(s).
END OF SECTION
13027 21 05 29 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 21 05 29 – BASIC PIPING REQUIREMENTS PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Pipe Hangers and Supports B. Sleeves and Plates
C. Installation of Piping Systems
D. Fire Stop Sealants
1.02 GENERAL PIPE SYSTEM INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Fabricate and install all pressure piping systems in accordance with the
procedures established in the ANSI B31 Code. Materials and fittings shall be as defined by the applicable standards of NFPA.
B. Provide fittings in accordance with the ANSI B16 Code for all changes in
direction, elevation or size. No mitered joints or pipe bends will be permitted. Reduction of pipe size shall be by reducing fittings or couplings. Bushings will
not be permitted. C. Each length of pipe, fitting and item shall be marked with the manufacturer's
name and material identification.
D. Install all piping to present a neat and orderly appearance. Run all lines parallel
with building walls and construction. Offset piping, in approved manner, where required to avoid interference with other work, to increase headroom under piping or to improve appearance of the work.
E. Provide protection for piping against freezing
F. Pipes passing through exposed construction shall be provided with escutcheons or other seals as described herein. Exposed escutcheons in finished areas shall have a chrome finish.
G. Penetrations of smoke rated walls, floors, roofs and ceilings are to be made with smoke stops equal/exceeding the fire rating of the building separation being
penetrated. See Division 07. 1.03 PIPING SYSTEMS WARRANTY
A. Maintain integrity of all piping systems through warranty period, repairing all leaks.
B. Warranty work shall include repair/replacement of building materials and finishes damaged by leak(s).
C. All damage resulting from leaking pipes shall be paid for by the installing contractor.
13027 21 05 29 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
1.04 CLEARANCE FROM ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Piping is prohibited in electric and telephone rooms and closets, elevator machine rooms, and for installations over or within 5ft. or transformers,
substations, switchboards, motor control centers, standby power plants, and motors.
B. Branch piping to equipment is acceptable when installed over or within 5ft. of
motors.
1.05 DRIP PANS
Provide drip pans under piping when installation over or within 5ft. of electrical apparatus is unavoidable or in rooms containing electrical equipment or under drainage piping at ceilings of food preparation areas. Pan shall be reinforced, properly supported and made watertight. Provide enclosed type for pressure piping. Extend 1-1/2 in. drain pipe from
pan to spill over nearest floor drain or as indicated.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING SYSTEM MATERIALS
All pipe hangers and supports shall conform to the latest requirements of NFPA.
2.02 PIPE HANGERS
A. Hangers: Steel pipe
1. All sizes: adjustable clevis, standard duty
a. Erico #401 b. Afcon #371 c. PHD Fig. 450
B. Riser clamps: steel pipe
1. Grinnell Fig. 261 2. Elcen Fig. 39 3. PHD Fig. 550
C. Floor supports: steel pipe
1. 2" and smaller: U-bolt on structural steel channel secured to floor with angle clips a. Grinnell Fig. 137
b. Elcen Fig. 68A
c. PHD Fig. 90 2. larger than 2": adjustable pipe saddle a. Grinnell Fig. 264
b. Elcen Fig. 50
D. Supports at walls or columns: steel brackets properly selected to support weight
suspended. 1. Grinnell Fig. 194, 195, 199, 202
2. Elcen Fig. 56, 57 or 58
13027 21 05 29 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
E. Rods: galvanized steel, all threaded hanger rods; threaded both ends
Pipe Size Rod Diameter
4" and smaller 3/8" 5", 6" and 8" 1/2" 10" and 12" 5/8"
F. Beam Clamps
1. To 400 pounds loading, hardened steel point set screw; 6" pipe malleable iron clamp a. Grinnell Fig. 86
b. PHD Fig. 270
2. To 1300 pounds loading, malleable iron jaw, steel tie rod, center load. a. Grinnell Fig. 218 (FM listed)
b. PHD Fig. 630 2.03 SLEEVES AND PLATES (ESCUTCHEONS)
A. Schedule of Sleeve Usage:
1. All sleeves through concrete walls shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. 2. All sleeves through wall board, drywall, plasterboard or wall panels shall be 20 gauge galvanized steel.
3. All sleeves through masonry walls, metal roof deck, concrete floors on grade and metal deck shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.
B. Special sleeves and sealing as shown on drawings.
C. Plates shall be chromium plated for finished areas and may be cast iron
elsewhere.
2.04 FIRE STOP SEALANTS A. Penetration Sealants
1. Dow Corning "Firestop Foam" and "Firestop Sealant" 2. Insta-Foam Products, Inc. "Insta-Foam Seal Silicone RTV Foam"
3. 3M Brand "Fire Barrier" Caulk 4. 3M Brand Moldable Putty "Pads" and Moldable Putty "Stix"
B. Intumescent sealants for use in openings and sleeves involving plastic pipe,
insulated pipe or flexible cable: 1. Dow Corning "Firestop Intumescent Wrap Strip"
2. Fox Coupling, Inc. "Cast-In-Place Firestop Coupling" 3. 3M Brand "Fire Barrier" Caulk with FS-195 wrap strip and CS-195
composite sheet.
13027 21 05 29 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General 1. Furnish and install supports, guides, anchors and swaybraces required
for proper installation and support of pipe lines.
2. Pipe suspensions shall prevent excessive stress and excessive variation in supporting force. Fabrication and installation of supports for pipe
lines shall not constrain piping to cause excessive transfer of load from supports to piping or from support to support when expansion or contraction occurs. Supports shall be capable of taking entire piping load imposed by expansion or contraction.
3. Piping system where flexibility is not desired shall be supported by rigid hangers.
B. Vibration and Noise Transfer Control: Where pipe vibration can transmit objectionable vibration to building structure or attached equipment, hangers shall be supplemented by spring cushions or an energy absorbing means in supports
themselves or through addition of flexible piping connectors or auxiliary equipment.
C. Securing Hangers and Supports at Building Construction
1. Provide, as required, steel or malleable iron inserts in poured concrete
construction. Maximum load which may be applied to any one foot length of continuous insert shall not exceed 1000 pounds.
2. Where piping is suspended from masonry construction, use expansion shields to attach pipe supports to construction. Expansion shield bolt diameter the same size as the support rod diameter specified. 3. Where piping is suspended from structural steel building framing or
supporting members, furnish and install beam clamps for attaching piping support device to building member beam clamps made of heavy
steel forged to fit structural member (I-beam, angle, channel) and securely fastened in place. No building member to be drilled, welded, cut or otherwise deformed in attaching pipe supports unless approved by the Engineer.
4. Where existing masonry is not suitable to receive and hold expansion shields or where other means of attachment is advantageous, the
Contractor shall submit alternate method for approval to Engineer. 5. Do not suspend hangers from deck. Suspend from structural framing members in an approved and workmanlike manner. 6. Provide additional bracing and supports wherever needed, in opinion of
the Engineer. Install structural steel members, attached to building framing, where required, to provide additional points of support. Drill building structural and miscellaneous steel only as directed by the
Engineer 7. Maximum distance between hangers for horizontal piping.
Material Pipe Size Spacing Steel Pipe 1" - 1-1/4" 12'-0"
Schedule 10 and 40 1-1/2" - 8" 15'-0" 8. Pipe hanger rods shall be sized per NFPA 13.
13027 21 05 29 – PAGE 5 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
D. Vertical Pipe Hangers
1. Support vertical runs under 15 feet long with hanger adjacent to elbows.
2. Support vertical runs over 15 feet long with riser clamps. Weld clamps to pipe and support on pipe sleeve or building structure. Space clamps at
every floor with maximum spacing of 28 feet. 3. Malleable iron risers shall be supported at every floor. 4. All other risers shall be supported at lowest floor through which they
pass. Pipe 2" and smaller in size shall be guided at every floor through
which it passes. Larger pipe shall be guided at every other floor. 5. Provide floor supports at the bottom of risers with structural steel
supports of a Structural Engineer approved design. Secure to floor with angle clips.
3.03 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Furnish, locate and set pipe sleeves where piping passes through floors, walls
and other concrete or masonry structural materials except where tunnels, chases or shafts are provided in the construction.
B. Wall Sleeves (Above Grade): Sleeves set in walls above grade shall be sized to
finish flush with face of walls and shall be constructed of material which is equal to or greater than the fire rating of the wall.
C. Floor Sleeves: Floor sleeves shall extend 1-1/2" above finished floor. Sleeve shall extend to 3" above finished floors in areas such as kitchens, food preparation, dishwashing and laboratory areas.
D. Sleeves shall be in accordance with the following schedule unless otherwise
specified. Sleeve Schedule
Pipe Size Sleeve Size
1" 2"
1-1/2" 3" 2" 3" 4" 6" 6" 8"
E. The void between the sleeve and wall, and the pipe shall be neatly filled with an approved fire stop material.
3.04 UNION AND FLANGES
Provide at intervals and locations where they will facilitate disconnection and removal of
piping at all valves, at connections to equipment and elsewhere as shown.
13027 21 05 29 – PAGE 6 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
3.05 APPLICATION OF FIRE STOP SEALANTS
A. Prepare and apply preparation sealing system in accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Employ installation techniques which will ensure that fire-stopping is deposited to fill and seal holes and openings.
1. Provide flame (F) rating minimum one-hour, but not less than fire
resistance rating of the assembly in which it is installed, per ASTM E-814.
2. Ensure effective smoke seal. C. Tool exposed surfaces of applied sealant smooth.
END OF SECTION
13027 21 05 50 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 21 05 50 – NOISE CONTROL PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Apply sound controls to modify the sound transmission paths to obtain the specified sound levels in the various spaces of the building.
B. Fire Protection related sound criteria for this project are established as follows:
Room Type Criterion
Offices NC35
Corridors and Lobbies NC40 All adjacencies to Mechanical Equipment Room NC40 (unless noted
otherwise above) C. The above NC levels shall serve as the gauge to determine the installation
quality and workmanship.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 21 05 01
B. Completion and Startup: Section 21 05 03
C. Basic Piping Requirements: Section 21 05 29
1.03 SUBMITTALS AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Submit data or shop drawings on all components specified in this section.
B. Product data shall clearly indicate where and how the product is used and quantities as applicable.
C. Test reports shall be certified from an accredited laboratory maintaining
membership in NVLAP (National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program).
1.04 STANDARDS
A. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, all work of this Section shall conform to the requirements of ASTM E1222-90 Test Method for
Laboratory Measurement of Insertion Loss of Pipe Lagging Systems.
B. Addresses
1. ANSI American National Standards Institute, New York, NE (Telephone: 212.354.3300).
2. ASTM American Society for Testing Materials, West Conshohocken, PA (Telephone: 610.832.9500).
13027 21 05 50 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 ACOUSTICAL FLOOR, CEILING AND WALL SEAL
A. Description: Where piping passes through equipment walls, floors or ceilings, provide a split seal consisting of two bolted pipe halves with 3/4" or thicker
neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it integral with the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe prior to the construction
of the building member. Seals shall project a minimum of 1" past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed 240EF, 10# density fiberglass may be
used in lieu of the sponge.
B. Manufacturers: Mason Industries Model No. SWS; or approved equal
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 SOUND CONTROL OF CONSTRUCTION FOR PIPE PENETRATION AND ISOLATION
A. Penetration Type A: Any pipe penetrating a wall, floor or ceiling in the locations
identified below shall be sleeved and packed with glass fiber, foam rod and permanently flexible acoustical sealant to form a resilient and airtight penetration:
1. Penetrations through walls or slabs when crossing acoustic isolation joints.
2. Penetrations through acoustically isolated construction floor, wall or ceiling components.
3. Penetrations through walls or slabs within 8 feet of crossing acoustic isolation joints and/or acoustically isolated construction.
4. Penetrations through walls, floors or ceilings of noise producing rooms. 5. All wall, floor or ceiling penetrations within 30 feet of a noise producing room.
Wall, floor or slab openings for Type A penetrations shall be oversized and sleeved to provide an inner diameter 1 to 2 inches greater than the outside
dimension of the pipe. The pipe shall be centered in the opening and shall not contact the wall, floor or ceiling, even after filling. The resulting gap shall be
packed with glass fiber packing material and foam rod. The gap shall be caulked to an airtight seal using permanently flexible acoustical sealant.
B. Penetration Type B: Where the use of firestop is required in the conditions
noted above, the packing materials and sealant indicated for Type A penetrations may be replaced with an approved permanently flexible Firestop sealant, creating
a resilient and airtight penetration that is also compliant with fire code.
C. Penetration Type B (multiple): In locations not common to acoustically
sensitive rooms requiring airtight and resilient penetrations of multiple pipes passing through a wall, floor or ceiling, it is acceptable to utilize the penetration Type B detail for multiple pipes, as shown on the Contract Drawings.
13027 21 05 50 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
D. Penetration Type C: Pipes serving acoustically sensitive rooms which do not
meet the conditions for Type A or B, resilient and airtight, penetrations shall be grouted and caulked into the structure as follows, forming an airtight penetration:
1. Before grout has set, rake a groove around the pipe on each side of the
wall or slab. 2. The groove shall be ½-inch wide and ½-inch deep (12mm x 12mm).
3. After grout has set, fill the groove full depth with permanently flexible acoustical sealant.
E. All pipes requiring support within 8 feet of an acoustic isolation joint or
acoustically isolated construction shall be supported or hung using Type G hangers or mounts.
END OF SECTION
13027 21 05 50 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE IS LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 21 05 53 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 21 05 53 – IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Label all fire suppression equipment furnished and/or installed in this project.
B. Label all electrical equipment furnished under this project.
C. Label all piping systems installed in this project.
D. Provide valve tags and chart.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General Provisions: Section 21 05 01
B. Basic Piping Requirements: Section 21 05 29
C. Painting: Section 21 05 64
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Specifications Section 21 05 01, General Provisions, submit manufacturer's data on labels. Include a listing of labels ordered with name of
equipment or control device.
B. Submit manufacturer's data on valve tags including a list of all valves to be tagged on the project. PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Labels shall be engraved, laminated plastic plates. Height of letters shall be as scheduled herein.
B. Letters shall be black; plates shall be white.
C. Manufacturers: Seton Nameplate Corporation, Brady or approved equal
2.02 CONTROL EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Labels shall be engraved, laminated plastic plates. Height of letters shall be as
scheduled herein.
B. Letters shall be black; plates shall be white
C. Manufacturer: Seton Nameplate Corporation, Brady, or approved equal.
13027 21 05 53 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.03 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve tags shall be consecutively numbered, brass tags (1-1/2" round).
B. Where valves are located above ceilings, provide a location marker on the ceiling grid, as specified under 2.05, of same general description as brass tags.
C. All main valves shall include text on the tag to read “Main Shutoff Valve”. Tag
size shall be increased to include text and valve number.
D. Use Seton Nameplate Corporation or Brady tags. System shall meet ANSI A13.1-1975 specification.
2.04 VALVE TAG CHART
A. Prepare a computer generated chart listing all valves tagged on this project. List
the valve number, service and normal position (closed or open). Submit file disk of chart to Owner at project completion.
B. Chart shall be mounted in a suitably sized frame with shatterproof glass front and
installed on the wall of the main mechanical room.
2.05 CONCEALED EQUIPMENT AND VALVE LOCATION MARKERS
A. Furnish white plastic marker with engraved black numbers and letters, 1/4" high to attach to ceiling grids. Confirm width of ceiling grids with ceiling contractor
and match the size. Numbers and letters shall match the equipment label wording as scheduled.
B. Markers shall be Seton Style No. M5300, Brady or approved equal.
2.06 PIPE LABELS
A. Furnish snap-around type markers through 5" pipe sizes. Furnish strap-around
type markers with nylon ties for 6" pipe sizes and larger.
B. Letter height shall vary with pipe size as follows: Thru 1-1/4" pipe: ½"
Thru 2" pipe: 3/4" Thru 6" pipe: 1-1/4"
8" and above: 2-1/2"
C. Use ANSI/OSHA designated colors.
D. Include directional flow arrows.
E. Manufacturer: "Setmark" system of pipe markers as manufactured by Seton Identification Products, Brady or equal. Equal brands must meet ANSI
specifications.
13027 21 05 53 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Schedule of Fire suppression Equipment Labels (List is not necessarily inclusive
of all equipment on this project to be labeled).
B. Labels shall be secured to the equipment in a readily apparent location with a minimum of four (4) screws for 1" size labels and two (2) screws for ½" and
smaller. (Glue shall not be used.) Drill holes for screw openings. Cracked labels shall be replaced.
C. Equipment which is not suitable to receive the above fastening method shall be
labeled on an adjacent wall, chain hung from the ceiling, or on a readily sighted disconnect switch, at the direction of the Designer.
3.02 ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. 1" and ½" letter size labels shall be secured to the devices with appropriately
sized screws or rivets. (Glue shall not be used.) Screw holes shall be drilled. Cracked labels shall be replaced.
B. 1/4" and 1/8" letter size labels shall be glued to the device.
3.03 VALVE TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on each operating valve installed in this project.
B. Use scheduled abbreviations for service indication.
C. Attach tags with nickel plated brass bead chain.
3.04 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe identification labels where required to provide easy identification of
the system and flow.
B. Minimum requirements include the following:
1. At both sides of all wall penetrations, concealed and exposed, throughout the building.
2. At an accessible location for every exposed 25 lineal feet of piping. 3. At each piece of equipment.
C. Do not install labels until pipe has been painted.
13027 21 05 53 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
3.05 CONCEALED EQUIPMENT AND VALVE LOCATION MARKER INSTALLATION
A. Install plates directly on to exposed bottom of ceiling T-bar, with glue.
B. Locate plate adjacent to ceiling tile which accesses the equipment or valve
above.
C. Install plates directly on to access panels in drywall ceilings.
END OF SECTION
13027 21 05 64 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 21 05 64 - PAINTING PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary for painting of fire suppression equipment supports and of other surfaces as specified herein. All painting shall be performed by a trade responsible for this type of work.
B. Paint all interior and exterior exposed, non-galvanized, metal hangers, platforms, supports and miscellaneous steel for piping and equipment.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General Provisions: Section 21 05 01
B. Completion and Startup: Section 21 05 03
C. Assignment of Miscellaneous Work: Section 21 05 02
D. Identification of Piping and Equipment: Section 21 05 53
1.03 CERTIFICATE
Submit to Engineer, prior to any approvals of start of any work, a schedule of the exact materials proposed for each application on all surfaces.
1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All surfaces to be painted shall be clean and dry. B. Do not paint valve surfaces which are non-ferrous metals such as brass or bronze and those items which have a factory finish.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish three (3) samples of each type finish and color to Engineer for approval. 1.06 DELIVERY
All paint shall be delivered to the site in manufacturer's sealed containers. Each container
shall be labeled with the manufacturer's labels and shall give manufacturer's name, type of paint, color of paint and instructions for reducing. Thinning shall be done only in accor-dance with directions of manufacturer.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE PAINT MANUFACTURERS
A. Porter Paint Company/Pittsburgh Paint (PPG)
B. Sherwin Williams
C. Glidden Coatings and resins, Division of ICI Corporation
D. Benjamin Moore and Co.
13027 21 05 64 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
E. M.A. Bruder Co. (MAB)
F. Dampney (High Temperature Paint)
2.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Materials of all kinds shall be first line products and of the best quality and of brands approved by the Engineer. All paint shall be delivered in original containers with unbroken seals, plainly marked with manufacturer's name and the trade name or brand,
to be opened and used only after approval and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations with no substitutions.
2.03 SCHEDULE OF PAINTING AND FINISHING
A. Interior and Exterior Bare Ferrous Metal
1. First Coat: rust inhibitive primer 2. Second Coat: acrylic gloss enamel
3. Third Coat: acrylic gloss enamel
B. Interior non-ferrous metal 1. First Coat: rust inhibitive primer
2. Second Coat: interior enamel 3. Third Coat: interior enamel
C. Exterior non-ferrous metal
1. First Coat: rust inhibitive primer 2. Second Coat: acrylic gloss exterior house paint
3. Third Coat: acrylic gloss exterior house paint
D. Interior galvanized metal
1. First Coat: acrylic rust screen primer 2. Second Coat: interior enamel
3. Third Coat: interior enamel
E. Exterior galvanized metal
1. First Coat: galvanized metal primer 2. Second Coat: acrylic gloss exterior house paint
3. Third Coat: acrylic gloss exterior house paint
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Steel and Iron: Remove grease, rust, scale and dust by wire brushing and washing and touch up any chipped or abraded places on items that have been
shop coated. Where steel and iron have a heavy coating of scale, it shall be removed by a wire brushing or as necessary to produce a satisfactory surface for painting.
B. Before painting, remove and protect hardware, accessories, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items and replace same upon completion of area. Protect
adjacent surfaces during work. Damage to or spillage upon adjacent work shall
be repaired and/or cleaned and returned to a finished area.
13027 21 05 64 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
C. Apply paint to clean, dry and smooth surfaces only. Apply paint smoothly, worked
out evenly and allow to dry a minimum of 48 hours before subsequent coats are applied. Protect from dampness. Do not apply exterior paint in damp, rainy
weather or until surface has dried thoroughly. Do not apply any paint when temperature is below 50°F. Avoid painting surfaces while surfaces are exposed
to hot sun.
D. Finished work shall be completely covered, be uniform, smooth and free of runs, sags, clogging or excessive flooding. Make edges of paint adjoining other
materials or colors sharp and clean with no overlaps. Use masking where required.
E. At completion, touch up and restore finish where damaged and leave in new
condition.
3.02 STORAGE
A. A lockable area will be assigned for storing and mixing paints. The floor of this place shall be covered with an approved, reinforced, kraft building paper and then with tarpaulins. No mixing shall be done in rooms or spaces other than those assigned for such purpose.
B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent fire, explosions and other damage. All
rags and paint or solvent must be stored in closed metal containers at all times. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Any materials of other trades damaged to such extent that they cannot be restored to their original condition shall be replaced by this Contractor at his own
expense. B. Protect adjacent work and materials by suitable coverings during progress of work. Remove all splatterings from floors and other surfaces. Leave work in a
clean, orderly, acceptable condition.
END OF SECTION
13027 21 05 64 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE IS LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 21 11 19 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 21 11 19 – PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Backflow preventer shall be designed and manufactured for the purpose of prevention of backflow from non-potable fire suppression system to the potable/municipal water
system.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General Provisions: Section 21 05 01
B. Meters and Gauges: Section 21 05 19
C. Basic Piping Requirements: Section 21 05 29
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for each type of backflow preventer specified in accordance with Specification Section 21 05 01, General Provisions.
B. Submit final backflow preventer test report on each unit into the Operator’s
Maintenance Manuals.
1.04 AGENCY APPROVAL
A. Installation of backflow preventer(s) shall comply with state and local codes and the local water utility requirements.
B. Compliance shall be in accordance with the following standards:
1. ASSE Standard 1013
2. AWWA Standard C-511-92 3. CSA B64.4
4. USC Manual Section 10 5. IAPMO and UPC approved
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 DOUBLE CHECK DETECTOR BACKFLOW PREVENTER
A. Valve Assembly (3" and 4")
1. 3" bronze body or epoxy coated cast iron body; 4" stainless steel and bronze internal parts; flanged connections; inlet strainer.
2. Maximum design: 175 PSI working pressure, temperature 110°F. 3. Shutoff valve: OS&Y gate valves (Matco-Watts)
4. Check valves: tight seating rubber face discs with removable seats. 5. Test Cocks: bronze ball valves
6. Bypass assembly: approved double check valve assembly and water meter.
13027 21 11 19 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
7. UL & FM approved; ASSE 1015
8. Exact size and flow rate as required by hydraulic calculation of the Automatic Sprinkler System.
9. Manufacturers a. Watts Model 709 DCDA
b. Febco Model 806 c. Hersey Model DDC-II
d. Wilkins Model DCDA.
B. Standards
1. ASSE Standard 1015 2. AWWA Std Class D
3. USC Manual as approved by IDEM (Indiana Dept. of Environmental Management)
4. IAPMO and UPC approved 5. UL Listed
6. Factory Mutual
2.02 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION (FREE-STANDING)
A. Cast brass, three-way sidewalk siamese connection with 90C body; independent
drop clappers complete with plugs and chains; chrome plated brass sleeve (18" long); escutcheon lettered "AUTO-SPKR"; threads to local fire department;
chromium plated.
B. Manufacturers
1. Potter-Roemer 2, Allenco
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Pipe relief line where required to nearest drain.
B. Prior to substantial completion and occupation by the Owner, all strainer assemblies shall be removed and cleaned.
C. Backflow preventer shall be tested and all defective devices repaired or replaced
prior to acceptance at no additional cost to Owner.
D. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with the drawings and all applicable state and local codes.
END OF SECTION
13027 21 13 18 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 21 13 18 – COMBINATION WET SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE SYSTEM PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide a combination automatic wet sprinkler and manual standpipe system for the building as shown on the drawings and described herein.
B. Provide all materials, equipment and labor to drain down affected portions of sprinkler systems to be modified and recharge system.
C. The sprinkler system will be hydraulically calculated, fully supervised and installed according to NFPA 13-2010 Edition, "Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems" and as provided herein.
D. Secure all approvals and necessary permits to install a completely approved,
functional wet pipe automatic sprinkler system. E. Contractor is responsible for compliance with all codes and regulations of
governing standards and agencies. Compliance includes existing service(s) or
system(s) when being extended or modified.
F. System shall include all required valves, drains, flow switches tamper switches, etc. and related electrical connections thereto.
G. Fire protection system backflow preventer shall be open on the double check
principle with bypass detector meter and check. It shall be a complete assembly consisting of tight closing OS&Y shutoff valves before and after the backflow
devices and protected with an inlet strainer; ASSE 1015. The bypass meter shall be followed by a double check assembly. The device design shall include
two (2) rubber coated, positive seating check valves, test cocks, approved meter and bypass double check valve.
H. If additional flow switches, tamper switches, or similar devices are required
beyond that which are shown on the contract documents. The Fire Protection Contractor shall include all cost associated with the device and fire alarm
connections, including the Electrical Contractor/Fire Alarm Contractor. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. General Provisions: Section 21 05 01 B. Completion and Startup: Section 21 05 03 C. Meters and Gauges: Section 21 05 19 D. Basic Piping Requirements: Section 21 05 29 E. Identification of Piping and Equipment: Section 21 05 53 F. Painting: Section 21 05 64 G. Piping Specialties: Section 21 11 19 H. Electrical: Division 26
13027 21 13 18 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials and devices used are to be listed for use by the "Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc." and/or Factory Mutual approved (UL/FM) all components shall bear their label wherever "Label Service" is a requirement or is available.
B. Work shall be accomplished by an approved fire protection equipment contractor,
regularly employed in the installation of automatic sprinkler systems and approved by the Owner's representative. All equipment supplied for this system
shall be the products of a single manufacturer (except as specified otherwise) and shall be readily obtainable products from the manufacturer's stock where
possible.
C. Systems shall comply with the following regulating agencies, organizations and publications, which include but may not be limited to:
1. Indiana Building Code (IBC), 2008, consisting of:
a. International Building Code, 2006 b. Indiana Amendments
2. Indiana Mechanical Code (IMC) 2008 consisting of: a. International Mechanical Code 2006
b. Indiana Amendments 3. Indiana Plumbing Code (IPC), 2012 Edition consisting of:
a. International Plumbing Code, Second Printing b. Indiana Amendments
4. Indiana Fire Code (IFC), 2008, consisting of: a. International Fire Code, 2006
b. Indiana Amendments” 5. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
6. Factory Mutual (FM) Global 7. National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA)
8. Local jurisdictional agencies, organizations and ordinances. 9. Insurance Service Office of Indiana (I.S.O.)
10. Local water company 11. State Fire Marshal
12. Indianapolis Fire Department
C. Hazard classifications included in this project are: 1. Light hazard
2. Ordinary hazard, Group 2
D. Finishes: component finishes shall be as specified herein.
1.04 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. It is not the intent of the Contract Documents to neglect or violate any codes or governing agencies by indicating or specifying certain methods, equipment or
material. The Contractor is responsible for full building coverage per code. Review all Architectural Documents to ascertain construction and details and be
familiar with the entire project.
B. Documents indicate coverage, piping and in some instances head locations in areas where special consideration must be given due to aesthetics, structural or
coordination purposes.
13027 21 13 18 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
C. Purpose for the "Products" and "Execution" portions of this section, as well as
related information on the drawings, is to assure quality of system, components, workmanship and aesthetics. If these items are above minimum standards
required by codes and regulations, this specification shall take precedence.
D. Contractor shall perform a flow test upon which the design is to be based. Flow test data shall consist of gpm flow with static and residual pressures. Submit flow test data to the Engineer with sprinkler shop drawings for review.
E. The connection to or extension of the water supply or source shall be considered a suggested method and shall be finalized during the layout and design by this
Contractor. 1.05 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
Coordination drawings are required on this project. Fire protection fabrication drawings as defined below may be used.
A. Submit full set of drawings for each system for Engineer's approval prior to installation. Refer to Specifications Section 21 05 01, General Provisions and Division 1 for submission requirements.
1. Drawings shall be prepared utilizing "AutoCAD" or “BIM”. Contact the Architect to obtain generic AutoCAD floor plans. Engineers’ drawings are
not intended for use as coordination drawings. 2. Drawings shall be minimum scale of 1/4" = 1'-0" for floor plans. Include
sections and elevations of all pipe offsets or risers. 3. Coordinate the routing with all other trades and the
structural/architectural drawings during drawing development period. Detail all areas requiring close or critical coordination points on the
drawings.
B. Thoroughly review all construction documents to verify all routings, heights, and locations of all piping. Visit the job site and field verify all routings, heights, and
locations. Notify the Engineer of any conflicts and proposed coordinated solutions.
C. For remodeled areas the Contractor shall visit the job site and field verify all
routings, heights, and locations of all piping. Notify the Engineer of any conflicts.
D. Completed drawings shall be submitted to General Contractor, Mechanical
Contractor, Plumbing Contractor, Sprinkler Contractor, Sheet metal Contractor, Temperature Control Contractor, and Electrical Contractor for their coordination
and impact to the final layouts. Prepare any drawing corrections required to obtain a coordinated layout. Provide sufficient sets of drawings for distribution.
E. No pay requests for installed work will be honored until fully coordinated
drawings are accepted by the Owner.
13027 21 13 18 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
1.06 FABRICATION DRAWINGS
A Submit system fabrication drawings to and obtain approvals from the State Fire Marshal and the appropriate inspection and rating organization prior to submitting
to the Architect/Engineer. Drawings shall be prepared utilizing "AutoCAD" or “BIM”. Contact Architect to obtain generic AutoCAD floor plans.
1. System fabrication drawings submitted to code authorities should reflect
same general system design and head layout as shown on the drawings and as described in these specifications.
2. System fabrication drawings submitted to the Architect/Engineer shall bear the "Approval" or "Release" stamp of the State Fire Marshal.
Letters of approval or comments from the State Fire Marshal shall also be submitted at this time.
B. Approval from the governing agencies and the Architect and/or Engineer shall be
obtained prior to fabrication or installation of any material or equipment.
C. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all work performed prior to receiving said approvals.
D. Record of final "as built" drawings shall be submitted to Engineer for acceptance
at project completion. As-builts shall be submitted on a CD format and one (1) printed copy.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings on all system components such as valves, flow and tamper
switches, head and escutcheons, alarms, post indicator valves, siamese connections, fire pump, etc.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 INTERIOR PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Wet Sprinkler System - Pipe Material 1. Pipe shall be new, designed for 175 psi working pressure, and conform to the latest approved ASTM standards recognized for the piping specified herein. The piping shall be manufactured in the United States
and have the manufacturer's name and brand along with the applicable ASTM standard marked on each length of pipe.
2. 1" thru 2" Pipe: Pipe shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe shall be joined with screwed, mechanical grooved or push-on fittings per NFPA 13.
Fittings shall be joined by a UL and FM approved combination of couplings, gaskets and grooves. Grooves may be rolled or cut and they
shall be dimensionally compatible with the fitting. 3. 1” thru 2” pipe in living units shall be CPVC pipe. CPVC sprinkler pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D1784. 4. 2-1/2" thru 8" Pipe: Pipe shall be Schedule 10 black steel (ASTM A135)
and/or ASTM A795) sprinkler pipe shall be joined by UL and FM approved mechanical couplings.
5. Acceptable pipe manufacturers a. Allied Atkore and Conduit Corp.
b. Bull Moose Co. c. Youngstown Tube
d. Wheatland Tube
13027 21 13 18 – PAGE 5 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
B. Material - Fittings
1. Screwed fittings shall be cast iron, 125 pound class, (175 pound working
pressure) black and in accordance with ANSI B-16.4 or malleable iron, 150 pound class, black and in accordance with ANSI B-16.3.
2. CPVC fittings shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM F437 or ASTM F438. 3. Flanged fittings shall be cast iron, short body, class 125, black and in
accordance with ANSI B-16.1. Gaskets shall be full face of 1/8" minimum
thickness red sheet rubber. Flange bolts shall be hexagon head machine bolts with heavy semi-flushed hexagon head nuts, cadmium
plated, having dimensions in accordance with ANSI B-18.2. 4. Grooved couplings shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395 Grade 65-45-15 and ASTM A-536 Grade 65-45-12. 350 PSI working pressure for pipe sizes 1" - 3" and 300 PSI for pipe sizes 4" - 8". Bolts
and nuts shall be heat treated carbon steel and conform to the physical properties of ASTM A183 Grade 2 and SAE J429 Grade 5, and zinc
electroplated to meet ASTM B-633. a. Coupling shall be tested and listed by UL and or FM. Coupling
shall be a Grinnell G-FIRE Figure 577 or approved equal. b. Gaskets for Wet Pipe Systems shall be Grade “A” pre-lubricated
EPDMA Gasket System, requiring no field lubrication. Gaskets for Dry Pipe Systems shall be Grade “E” Tri-Seal EPDM Gasket
System. c. Acceptable coupled fitting manufacturers
(1) Grinnell (2) Victaulic
(3) Anvil-Gruvlok
C. Automatic ball drips shall be provided where shown on the drawings and where required.
2.02 VALVES
A. Valves shall be of same size as the pipe shown on the drawings and shall be
listed and approved by Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual. B. Gate valve (located on the riser; accessible only from inside a room) shall have a
minimum working pressure of 175 psi. Valve shall have a cast iron body with
flanged ends, bronze seating ring, bronze stem, cast iron disc with bronze disc ring and Buna-N "O" rings. Valve shall have an outside screw and yoke like
Kennedy Valve #68. Valve shall be provided with a UL listed, FM approved electrically supervised tamper switch, such as Notifier "NGV" series as required.
Switch shall be mounted so as not to interfere with normal operation of the valve. NOTE: Gate valve at riser is typically a butterfly valve – see Item D.
C. Ball valve (2" - 3"): Victaulic "Fire Ball" 727 Series; body and end cap shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, painted; Type 316 stainless steel ball;
stainless steel stem; virgin tetrafluoroethylene (TFE) seals; actuator arm shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, black chromate; steel actuator lead screw; cold rolled steel, painted actuator housing; bronze actuator nut; carbon
steel, painted brackets; switches shall be DPDT (rated 10A at 125/150 VAC, 0.25A at 240VDC, 0.5A at 125VDC).
13027 21 13 18 – PAGE 6 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
D. Butterfly valve (2.5" - 8"): Tyco Model BFV-N; body shall be ductile iron
conforming to ASTM A-536, disc shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536 with Nickel plating, Grade EPDM “E” seat material conforming to ASTM D-2000;
Upper steam to be Type 416 Stainless Steel conforming to ASTM 582; switches shall be DPDT (contacts rated 15.1A/12HP @t 125/150 VAC; 0.25A @ 250VDC;
0.50A @ 125VDC); carbon steel, painted switch housing; brackets shall be carbon steel, zinc plated to ASTM B-633, UL/FM rated for 250 psi.
E. Check valve shall be of the wafer type and have a minimum working pressure of
175 psi and shall have a cast iron body, stainless steel spring and hinge pin, Buna-N "O" ring and seal, bronze seat ring and clapper. Valve shall be like
Kennedy Valve #706. F. Angle drain valve shall have a minimum working pressure of 175 psi and shall
have a bronze body, stem and disc holder. Valve shall have Buna-N seat disc
such as Kennedy Valve #98-SD with renewable composition discs.
G. Alarm Valve (2.5" - 8"): Designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Ductile iron body, with bronze seat ring and EPDM clapper facing. UL listed, F.M. approved. Provide all associated trim and alarm pressure switch as required. Provide retard chamber for non-constant pressure applications. Tyco Model
AV-1-300 with Model RC-1 retard chamber (if required).
2.03 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Heads shall be of the fusible link or glass bulb design with temperature ratings as
required as NFPA.
B. Provide standard wire guards on heads below 7'-6" above the floor or walkway.
Wire guards shall also be provided on heads located in areas subject to physical damage.
C. Heads shall have a minimum orifice size of ½" or 17/32" and shall be UL listed.
D. Sprinkler Types and Locations
1. Sprinklers located in a finished ceiling shall be pendant mounted on concealed piping. 2. Sprinklers located in blind or furred spaces shall be standard uprights
mounted at dimensions from ceiling per UL/FM approvals. 3. Extended coverage sidewall heads shall be used where needed.
4. Provide standard upright heads on remainder of the system. E. Heads, escutcheons and cover plates shall be of the following make, model and finish:
1. Description a. Concealed sprinkler heads shall be equal to Tyco Series RFII
glass bulb, quick response, standard or extended coverage (Contractor’s Option): Model TY3551 or TY3531 (regular coverage), TY3532 (extended coverage). Coverplate shall be
factory painted (white in color). b. Recessed heads shall be equal to Tyco Series TY-FRB glass bulb, recessed head. Sprinkler head finish shall be satin
finished chrome with factory painted two-piece escutcheon (white in color).
13027 21 13 18 – PAGE 7 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
c. Sidewall sprinkler heads shall be equal to Tyco Series TY-FRB
horizontal sidewall, glass bulb, quick response Standard or extended coverage (Contractor’s option), satin finish chrome
head with factory painted two-piece escutcheon (white in color). d. Extended coverage sidewall heads (where required or noted on
drawings) shall be equal Tyco Series TY-FRB 5.6 and 8.0 K-factory head. Sprinkler head finish shall be satin finished chrome with factory painted escutcheon. e. Extended coverage heads shall be equal to Tyco Series EC-11
and EC-14 glass bulb, brass finish, quick response, extended coverage.
f. Standard upright heads shall be equal to Tyco Series TY-L fusible-link type head. Sprinkler head finish shall be satin finished chrome. g. ESFR (early suppression fast response) sprinkler heads shall be
equal to Tyco Models ESFR-1, ESFR-17, or ESFR-25. Upright or pendent orientation and spacing shall be per UL/FM
Approvals. Sprinkler head finish shall be cast brass. h. Quick response concealed heads shall be equal to Tyco Series RFII fusible link head. Coverplate shall be factory painted (white in color).
i. Quick response recessed heads shall be equal to Tyco Series TY-FRB glass bulb head. Sprinkler head finish shall be satin
chrome with a factory painted escutcheon (white in color). j. Quick response upright heads shall be equal to Tyco Series
TY-FRB glass bulb head. Sprinkler head finish shall be cast brass.
k. Combustible concealed spaces requiring sprinkler protection shall be equal to Tyco Models CC1 and CC2 for protections of
interstitial concealed spaces. Recessed or standard style shall be determined by contractor review of lighting type used in
freezer unit.
2. Acceptable manufacturers a. Tyco
b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. c. Viking Corporation F. Provide two wrenches which fit each type of sprinkler head to be used on the
project.
G. Provide spare sprinkler heads and cabinets for each type of head to be used on the project as required by NFPA.
2.04 FLOW SWITCH
Flow switches shall be of the vane type; UL listed. The switch shall be capable of being mounted in the horizontal or vertical position and shall have a minimum adjustable retard
range of 0 to 60 seconds. Vane shall be polyethylene and shall extend into the waterway of the pipe. Unit shall be capable of operating on a maximum of 120 V.A.C. signal to an electric bell or remote annunciator panel as shown on the drawings. Switch
shall be equal by McDonnell Miller; Viking or Potter Electric.
13027 21 13 18 – PAGE 8 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.05 ELECTRIC BELL
Provide an electric bell on the outside near the incoming service. Bell shall operate from
a 120 V.A.C. signal, be of the underdome design with an aluminum housing, steel gong shell as Notifier "N-CO-BELL" or an approved equal.
2.06 SUPERVISORY LIMIT SWITCH
Supervisory limit switches shall be mechanical type unit with an operating mechanism
that will signal when the valve is moved from or returned to its normal (open) position.
2.07 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING COMPONENTS A. Provide inspectors test connection with proper restriction orifice coinciding with heads used. Sight glass provided shall be similar to United Brass UL/FM type.
B. Provide automatic ball drips to allow for proper drainage where shown or
required. Ball drip shall be 3/4" such as manufactured by United Brass. Pipe to nearest floor drain.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION A. Interior pipe and fittings
1. Piping which passes through a non sprinklered area shall be adequately protected by a required insulating enclosure or automatic sprinklers
below the pipe (as required). 2. Piping which passes through an electrical switchgear room or transformer room shall be double piped unless the pipe is a branch line serving heads in said rooms. Sleeve shall be set in such a manner as to
avoid joints in the room. If a joint is required in the room, it shall be a welded joint. Pipe shall be of Schedule 40, black steel.
3. Drains shall terminate at an open site drain, roof conductor or outside of the building. Location of drains to building exterior shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer. 4. Route piping in order that a minimum number of offsets shall be installed
in pipe lines or to avoid shifting equipment. Avoid all lighting fixtures, structural members, ductwork, piping, etc. 5. Do not route any pipe over an electrical panel(s) or transformer(s).
6. All piping and hangers installed in corrosive environments shall be galvanized.
13027 21 13 18 – PAGE 9 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
B. Heads
1. Heads shall be installed per manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Piping run above ceilings shall expose only the sprinkler head cover plate below the ceiling surface. Where sprinkler heads are required in a
grid or lay-in ceiling, the heads shall be centered both ways in the 2'-0" x 2'-0" tile or grid and in the 2'-0" direction in 2'-0" x 4'-0" tile or grid. Provide arm-overs or swing joints as required to accomplish this centering. The final positioning of the heads shall be done after the
ceiling grid is in place but prior to the installation of the tile. 3. Cover plates shall be protected against scratches, dents and
discoloration. Defective items will not be acceptable. C. Hangers and Supports
1. Spacing shall be per NFPA #13. 2. When mechanical grooves or push on fittings are used, hangers and
supports shall not exceed maximum spacing recommended by manufacturer.
3.02 TESTING OF SYSTEMS
A. All piping in this system shall be flushed and tested hydraulically to 150 psig or
per NFPA Standards, if stricter. Test pressure and results shall comply with NFPA #13.
B. All tests shall be made in the presence of the Owner's representative and
representative of the insurance interest. A complete written report of the tests shall be sent to the Engineer within ten days of the completion of the tests stating
the results of the test and the names of the representatives present during the test.
C. Any alterations and repairs shall be made immediately and the tests run to prove
final security.
END OF SECTION
13027 21 13 18 – PAGE 10 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE IS LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 21 31 13 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 21 31 13 – FIRE PUMP PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide a complete operational fire pump assembly and indicated on drawings and as specified herein.
B. Secure all approvals and necessary permits to install a completely approved,
functional wet pipe automatic sprinkler system.
C. Contractor is responsible for compliance with all codes and regulations of governing standards and agencies. Compliance includes existing service(s) or
system(s) when being extended or modified.
D. System shall include all required valves, drains, flow switches tamper switches, etc. and related electrical connections thereto.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General Provisions: Section 21 05 01
B. Basic Piping Requirements: Section 21 05 29
C. Identification of Piping and Equipment: Section 21 05 53
D. Painting: Section 21 05 64
E. Electrical: Division 26
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials and devices used are to be listed for use by the "Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc." and shall bear their label wherever "Label Service" is a requirement or is available.
B. Work shall be accomplished by an approved fire protection equipment contractor,
regularly employed in the installation of automatic sprinkler systems and approved by the Owner's representative. All equipment supplied for this system
shall be the products of a single manufacturer (except as specified otherwise) and shall be readily obtainable products from the manufacturer's stock where
possible. C. Systems shall comply with the following regulating agencies, organizations and
publications, which include but may not be limited to:
1. Indiana Building Code (IBC), 2014, consisting of: a. International Building Code, 2012
b. Indiana Amendments 2. Indiana Mechanical Code (IMC) 2014 consisting of:
a. International Mechanical Code 2012 b. Indiana Amendments
3. Indiana Plumbing Code (IPC), 2012 Edition consisting of: a. International Plumbing Code, 2006 Second Printing
b. Indiana Amendments
13027 21 31 13 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
4. Indiana Fire Code (IFC), 2014, consisting of:
a. International Fire Code, 2012 b. Indiana Amendments”
5. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 6. Factory Mutual Global (FM)
7. National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA) 8. Local jurisdictional agencies, organizations and ordinances.
9. Insurance Service Office of Indiana (I.S.O.) 10. Local water company
11. State Fire Marshal 12. Indianapolis Fire Department
D. Finishes: component finishes shall be as specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Submit Shop drawings on all system components in accordance with Specifications
Section 21 05 01, General Provisions.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND CONTROL
A. Furnish and install where shown on drawings, one (1) UL listed centrifugal fire pump complete with motor, control, fittings, jockey pump and specialty
accessories necessary for complete installation in every respect. Fire pump shall bear listing approval by UL for required design conditions. Pumps and
accessories shall be of the manufacturer and model specified.
B. Fire pump shall be horizontal split case, bronze fitted centrifugal type. Pump shall be furnished complete with all fittings and accessories as shown and/or
required by NFPA Pamphlet 20, including the following:
1. Eccentric suction reducer 2. Suction and discharge gauges 4-1/2" dial
3. Automatic air release valve 4. Casing relief valve
5. Concentric discharge increaser
C. Field Acceptance Test: shall be through Test Manifold. Pump and motor shall be mounted on rigid one-piece cast iron, drip-rim base, grouted in accordance
with Hydraulic Institute Standards by this Contractor. Power shall be transmitted from motor to pump by means of approved flexible coupling with coupling guard.
D. Fire pump motor shall be an approved horizontal, ball bearing, squirrel cage
induction design and shall be of such capacity that, at rated voltage and frequency, pump will not exceed full load ampere rating under any conditions of
pump load. Motor horsepower shall be derived from the hydraulic demand requirements necessary to meet flow and pressure requirements of system.
Motor shall be suitable for operation at 208 volt, 3 phase, 60 cycle, AC current.
13027 21 31 13 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
E. Fire Pump Controller: UL listed, combined manual and automatic, soft start/stop type with automatic transfer switch. Control equipment shall be furnished in steel
floor mounted drip-proof enclosure with front operated circuit breaker and disconnect switch. Pressure regulator shall have range of 0 to 300 psi with
pressure settings established at time of Field Acceptance Test. Instantaneous recycling running period timer, to prevent too frequent automatic starting of fire
pump motor, set to keep motor in operation for 6 minutes on automatic start, shall be interwired with pressure regulator. Controller shall be furnished by this
Contractor for installation and wiring by Electrical Contractor.
F. Pumps, drivers, controls and necessary attachments specified herein shall be purchased under unit contract from pump manufacturer or his representative
stipulating compliance with these specifications and satisfactory performance of unit when installed. Fire pump shall be laboratory tested with Certified
Performance Test Curve furnished to Engineer and Insurance Authority at time of Field Acceptance Test. Upon aware of contract, manufacturer shall furnish
required number of pump unit dimension prints, control cubicle dimension prints and schematic wiring diagrams, all contained in an indexed booklet for
Engineer's approval.
G. Pump manufacturer shall provide services of qualified Field Engineer to advise Contractor on proper installation of equipment, make necessary mechanical
adjustment and align fire pump flexible coupling. Pump manufacturer shall arrange and conduct final Field Acceptance Test and provide all required test
equipment including UL playpipes, hose, pitot, tachometer and clamp-on ammeter.
H. Manufacturers
1. Peerless
2. Aurora 3. Worthington
2.02 JOCKEY PUMP ASSEMBLY AND CONTROL
A. Vertically mounted centrifugal pump: pump casing shall be cast iron, bronze
fitted, equipped with mechanical shaft seal and stainless steel shaft. Pump shall be motor driven with both pump and motor mounted in vertical position on cast
iron base. Power shall be transmitted form motor to pump by means of pre-aligned solid shaft coupling. Suitable for operation at 208 volt, 3 phase, 60
cycle, AC current.
B. Jockey pump motor: vertical solid shaft, ball bearing, squirrel cage induction design and not less than 3 horsepower, suitable for operation of 208 volt, 3
phase, 60 cycle, AC current, of such capacity that at rated voltage and frequency, pump will not exceed full load ampere rating of motor under any
condition of pump load.
C. Jockey pump panel: control panel shall incorporate an across-the-line magnetic motor starter, fusible disconnect switch, hand-off-automatic selector switch and
pressure regulator having range of 0 to 200 psi. Running period timer to prevent too frequent automatic starting of the jockey pump motor, set to keep the motor
in operation for at least one minute, shall be interwired with pressure regulator.
13027 21 31 13 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
D. Pressure Gauge: provide a 4-1/2" dial brass case pressure gauge on discharge side of jockey pump.
E. Manufacturers
1. Peerless
2. Aurora 3. Worthington
2.03 FIRE PUMP TEST CONNECTION
A. Cast brass four-way flush type pump test connection with brass straight through
body; 2-1/2" NH male outlets with full flow gate valves having swivel inlet to facilitate valve removal. Chrome plated escutcheon lettered "PUMP TEST
CONNECTION".
B. Manufacturer: Allenco #1345 or equal.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION FOR FIRE AND JOCKEY PUMPS
Install pumps on vibration isolators on a poured concrete pad in accordance with the
manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION
13027 22 05 01 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 22 05 01 – GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. The requirements of the General Conditions, General Requirements, Special Conditions, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Documents and other information bound herewith form a part of and shall govern all work performed under these specifications.
B. The accompanying plumbing drawings are issued as part of this specification.
Any requirements shown thereon are equally affective as if included in this specification. Any omissions in the specification or on the drawings are not to be
a basis for failure on the part of the Contractor, from installing components required by the systems to operate in the intended manner. Should any work be
called for on the drawings, specifications or in the codes, in such a manner that the Contractor cannot, in his judgement, comply with the requirements, then the
Contractor shall bring the matter to the attention of the Engineer before proceeding with the work.
C. The drawings depict the systems’ components and distribution method. Every
attempt is made to complete the distribution piping, however discrepancies may develop in the process. The contractor, within reason, is required to prepare his
bid and construct the project that the result is fully developed, complete and operable systems. (This includes obvious omitted piping connections). In the
event of discrepancies in pipe sizes from drawing to drawing, the contractor shall include the cost for the larger size.
D. Work includes the installation of equipment, piping, and components necessary
for complete and operable systems.
E. This project includes the following systems:
1. Domestic hot and cold water system 2. Sanitary waste and vent system
3. Condensate drain piping system 1.02 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS USED IN THE DIVISION 22 SPECIFICATIONS AND
PLUMBING DRAWINGS
A. The word "Owner" shall mean the party mentioned in the prime contract
agreement, or any representative of his party duly authorized to act in his behalf in the execution of the work. B. The word “Construction Manager” shall mean the person, firm or corporation
entering into a contract with the Owner to manage construction operations. C. The word "Contractor" shall mean the person, firm or corporation entering into a
contract to construct and complete the work as described herein.
D. The word "Engineer" shall mean Circle Design Group, Inc. and their
representatives assigned to this project. E. The word "Architect" shall mean CSO Architects and their representatives acting as the Owner's appointed agent.
13027 22 05 01 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
F. The words "furnish" or “supply” shall mean to purchase and deliver to project site,
ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar subsequent requirements.
G. The word "install" shall mean operations at the project site, including unloading,
assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar requirements.
H. The word "provide” shall mean to furnish and install complete and ready for
intended use.
1.03 CODES, FEES AND MISCELLANEOUS COSTS A. All materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable codes, specifications, local ordinances, industry standards and utility company
regulations.
B. In cases of difference between building codes, specifications, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations and the Contract
documents, the most stringent shall govern. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer in writing of any such differences.
C. Non-Compliance: Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply
with requirements of applicable building codes, states laws, local ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations, he shall bear all costs arising for correction of non-complying items.
D. Applicable Codes and Standards shall include all state laws, local ordinances, utility company regulations and applicable requirements of the following
nationally accepted laws, codes and standards. These requirements are to be considered minimum and are to be exceeded when so indicated on the drawings or herein specified.
1. Governing Agencies
a. Fire Prevention and Building Safety Commission b. Indiana Department of Health
2. Applicable Codes
a. Indiana Building Code (IBC), 2014, consisting of:
(1) International Building Code, 2012 (2) Indiana Amendments
b. Indiana Electrical Code (IEC), 2009, consisting of: (1) NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, 2008
(2) Indiana Amendments c. Indiana Safety Code for Health Care Facilities, 1991, consisting
of: (1) NFPA 99 Standard for Health Care Facilities 1992
(2) Indiana Amendments d. Indiana Mechanical Code (IMC) 2014 consisting of:
(1) International Mechanical Code 2012 (2) Indiana Amendments
e. Indiana Plumbing Code (IPC), 2012 Edition, consisting of: (1) International Plumbing Code 2006 Second Printing
(2) Indiana Amendments f. Indiana Swimming Pool Code (ISPC 20) 2011
13027 22 05 01 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
g. Indiana Energy Conservation Code (IECC) 2010, consisting of: (1) American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air
Conditioning Engineers, Inc. Standard 90.1, 2007 Edition (2) Indiana Amendments
h. Indiana Elevator Safety Code 2011 Edition 675 IAC21-3 (ANSI ASME A17.1, 2007 Edition)
i. Indiana Fire Code (IFC), 2014, consisting of: (1) International Fire Code, 2012
(2) Indiana Amendments j. Indiana Rules for Boilers and Pressure Vessels and excerpts
from Indiana Statue (IC22-12) governing licensing and regulation k. Indiana Fuel Gas Code 2014 Edition Consisting of:
(1) International Fuel Gas Code 2012 (2) Indiana Amendments
3. Standards
a. AGA: American Gas Association
b. STM: American Society of Testing Materials c. ANSI: American National Standards Institute
d. AMCA: Air Moving and Conditioning Association e. ASCI: American Standard Code for Information
Exchange f. ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers
g. NEC: National Electric Code h. NECA: National Electrical Contractors Association
i. NEIS: National Electrical Installation Standards j. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association
k. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association including NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code
l. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Act m. SMACNA Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors
Assn. n. UL: Underwriters Laboratories
o. ADAAG: Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines
p. Ten State Standards E. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits, payment of all fees, necessary drawings and arranging and paying for all inspections, tests, etc.
which may be required by any governing authority or utility company in connection with the furnishing or installation of any of his work.
1.04 WORK AND WORKMANSHIP
A. All materials and equipment shall be of the highest quality in every respect. All
materials and equipment shall be new and of the latest design and free of defects.
B. Workmanship shall be by skilled workmen of highest standard in strict
accordance with all applicable manufacturers' printed specifications (which, by reference, are made completely a part of these specifications as though herein
repeated), performed under supervision of competent foremen at all times.
13027 22 05 01 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
C. The Owner has full power to condemn or reject any work, materials or equipment
not in accordance with these specifications and construction drawings or not in conformance with the manufacturers' specifications or drawings which were
approved by the Owner or Engineer.
D. Work or equipment that is rejected shall be removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the owner, at the Contractor's expense. Work or equipment that is
rejected shall be so stated in writing by the Owner or Engineer.
E. Such decisions that the Owner or Engineer may make with respect to questions concerning the quality, fitness of materials, equipment and workmanship shall be
binding upon the parties thereto.
F. Special attention shall be given to accessibility of working parts and controlling parts. Adjustable parts shall be within easy reach. Removable parts shall have
space for removal.
1.05 DEVIATIONS FROM DRAWINGS A. Plumbing drawings show the intended arrangement and routing of all piping, equipment and appurtenances. They shall be followed as closely as actual
building construction and work of other trades will permit.
B. The Contractor shall investigate structural and finish conditions affecting his work and shall provide any fittings, offsets and accessories required to accommodate
said conditions.
C. Adjustments as a result of coordination with other trades or for reasons to improve performance, etc. may be made upon receiving the approval of the
Engineer. The Contractor shall document that the adjustment has been coordinated with all parties concerned.
1.06 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT
All work shall comply with the current requirements of the U.S. Department of Labor
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, entitled Occupational Safety and Health Standards; National Consensus Standards and Established Federal Standards. 1.07 COORDINATION BETWEEN CONTRACTORS
A. The Contractor and his subcontractors shall study all drawings and specifications
for this project so that complete coordination between trades will be obtained. Special attention shall be given to points where piping crosses ducts, other piping or conduit, where lights fit into ceilings and where pipes, pass through walls and structural elements.
B. It is the responsibility of the contractor and his Subcontractors to leave necessary room for other trades. No extra compensation will be allowed to cover the cost of
relocating piping or equipment found encroaching on space required by the
other trades.
C. The Contractor shall review the electrical requirements of the final equipment selections with the Electrical Contractor to ensure such items receive proper electrical services or connections.
13027 22 05 01 – PAGE 5 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
D. The Contractor shall provide complete information and cooperation to the other
Contractors and trades pertaining to his work to accomplish coordination for the complete project.
E. The Contractor shall provide the necessary sleeved openings, excavations, etc.
Cutting and patching shall be held to a minimum.
F. The Contractor and his Subcontractors shall be required to attend the periodic progress meetings to accomplish coordination with the Owner, Architect and
Engineer.
1.08 INSPECTION At the appropriate intervals of the mechanical installation, the Contractor shall inform the
local and state authorities to arrange inspections of his work. Provide Certificate’s of
Inspection when completed.
1.09 REPORTS AND FINAL SUBMISSIONS A. The Contractor shall submit, for attachment to the Substantial Completion Certificate, a letter certifying that the plumbing systems are in accordance with
the Indiana Mechanical Code, Indiana Plumbing Code and Indiana Fire Code as amended by the State of Indiana.
B. Submit all other test reports, as hereinafter specified.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCT AND MATERIAL APPROVAL A. When Manufacturer’s model numbers are listed they are for reference only and are not to be considered a basis of design. The model numbers listed are the
best information made available to the designer by the manufacturer and not intended to supplant or be inclusive of the criteria defined in the specifications
and drawings. The Contractor/Manufacturer shall review the complete construction documents to assure the products proposed are appropriate and
meet the system design criteria.
B. The performance requirements listed in the specifications, or shown on the drawings are the basis of design and will be the benchmark used for submittal
review and approval as well as determining if work is accepted or rejected.
C. A specification followed by one or more manufacturers is limited to those manufacturers. Names of other proposed manufacturers may be submitted for
approval to the Engineer a minimum of ten (10) days prior to receiving bids. Approval will be granted only if issued by Addendum (no exceptions).
D. A specification followed by one or more manufacturers and "or approved equal"
is open to equal products or materials. However, the Contractor shall supply one of the listed manufacturers at no additional cost if Engineer determines
substituted product unsatisfactory.
E. Any substituted equipment offered for consideration shall be stated as a separate item with the bid. State any additive or deductive cost.
13027 22 05 01 – PAGE 6 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
F. If changes in piping, equipment, layout or electrical service are brought about by
the use of equipment which is not compatible with the layout shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall include the cost of the necessary changes in his
bid.
2.02 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY SCHEDULE A. Submit a schedule listing equipment and materials required for complete installation, quantity ordered, date of placing order and the promised delivery
dates.
B. Any and all probable delivery delays shall be identified at the pre-construction meeting.
2.03 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings, fabrication drawings, and specific
product literature for all products specified and shown on the drawings. B. Approval of submittals does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for ordering proper quantities and miscellaneous appurtenances required for
operation and/or installation of the respective material or equipment.
C. The following general information is required with each submittal as applicable: 1. The full manufacturer's model number of each item
2. Identification of each item's performance, physical size and construction data.
3. Identification of finishes. Furnish two (2) chips for each color for items requiring color/finish selections.
4. Indicate any modifications made to manufacturers' standard design which are required by these specifications.
5. Location of connection points for external piping or electrical connections.
6. Rough-in, foundation and support point dimensions. 7. Complete wiring diagrams and connection identifications, specific to this
project. 8. Contractor's stamp, signature and date shall be affixed to the submittal
with indication of his review and approval.
D. In addition submit any detailed or specific information as stated in the respective specifications sections.
2.04 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall submit record drawings as stated in the General Conditions,
and as specified herein. B. During construction, maintain a complete and legible set of drawings, at the job
site showing changes and deviations between actual construction and Engineer's
drawings.
C. Submit to Engineer for review at the 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% completion of the work a complete, accurate and neat set of marked-up blueline drawings showing the complete "as built" construction.
D. This marked-up set shall be returned to the Contractor as many times as necessary in order to obtain desired results.
13027 22 05 01 – PAGE 7 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.05 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Contractor shall submit at job completion, three (3) maintenance manuals and (1) electronic one in pdf format to the Engineer for approval. The electronic one will
be retained by the Engineer and three (3) will be forwarded to the Owner.
B. Maintenance manuals are to include all information relative to maintenance and operating instructions for all new plumbing products. C. Maintenance manuals shall be assembled in the following sections:
1. Section 1
a. Title of project b. Name and addresses of:
(1) Owner (2) Engineer
(3) Contractor 2. Section 2: Index of complete contents
3. Section 3: a. List of all equipment with model number and serial number
b. Warranty of each piece of equipment with start and completion dates.
4. Section 4: valve tag chart 5. Section 5: Products
a. Incorporate data sheets, operating instructions, maintenance instructions, parts list, installation instruction and performance
characteristics on each piece of equipment or system in individually tabbed subsections.
b. Label and assemble tabbed sections in numerical order by corresponding specification section number.
D. Each section shall be separated by a pasteboard tabbed divider. Each section
tab shall identify equipment by same name as listed in the index. Tabs shall extend outside of sheet size.
E. All information shall be arranged in as many three-ring (3" D configuration) vinyl
coated notebooks as necessary. Do not overload capacity of binder. PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Handle equipment and components carefully to prevent damaging, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged equipment or components; replace with new.
B. Store equipment and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, theft, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage at all times.
END OF SECTION
13027 22 05 01 – PAGE 8 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 22 05 03 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAI
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 22 05 03 – COMPLETION AND STARTUP PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish material and labor required to perform startup of equipment and systems installed and modified in this project and provide operating and maintenance
instructions to the Owner.
B. Furnish labor and material required to inspect the installed piping systems and correct deficiencies as specified herein.
C. Furnish labor and equipment required to maintain clean work areas throughout
the project and to perform final cleanup.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General Provisions: Section 22 05 01
PART 2: PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS
A. Adhere strictly to the following procedures in completing plumbing systems.
1. Piping
a. Inspect screwed joints for leakage and remake each joint that appears to be faulty. Do not wait for rust to form. Clean threads
on both parts, apply compound and remake joint. b. Clean dirt pockets, orifices, valve seats and headers in all fluid
systems after system has been placed in operation to assure they are free from foreign material.
c. Adjust pipe hangers and supports for correct pitch and alignment.
d. Inspect valves, clean bonnets and stems, tighten packing glands to assure no leakage but permit valve stems to operate without
galling. Replace packing in valves that require same to retain maximum adjustment after system is judged complete. Replace
entire packing in any valve that continues to leak after adjustment, remove and repair bonnets that leak, coat packing
gland threads and valve stems with surface preparation similar to MolyCote or FelPro after cleaning.
e. Inspect each pressure gauge and thermometer for calibration and replace those that are defaced, broken or read incorrectly.
13027 22 05 03 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAI
CARMEL, INDIANA
2. General
a. Remove rust, scale and foreign materials from equipment and renew any defaced surfaces. If equipment is badly marred,
Engineer shall have authority to request that new materials be provided.
b. Repair pipe insulation that may have been damaged during construction period.
B. Complete all applicable startup procedures described in preceding paragraphs and in the associated articles for particular systems prior to occupancy of spaces
served.
C. Provide such continuing adjustment services as necessary to insure proper functioning of all plumbing systems after building occupancy and during warranty
period.
3.02 STARTUP
A. The Contractor shall bear prime responsibility for startup of all plumbing systems.
B. Perform a startup of each system installed in this project in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed procedure.
C. All involved contractors shall submit to the decision of the Owner/Engineer of any
conflict of responsibility.
3.03 TEMPORARY USE OF NEW EQUIPMENT
A. The warranty on the equipment will not begin until the date of Owner's final acceptance at the completion of the project.
B. Should the Owner elect to receive beneficial operation of the equipment prior to
project final acceptance, he may do so. The warranty period may begin then upon the Contractor receiving written approval from the Owner accepting the
equipment with conditions of any incomplete portions of the work.
3.04 TOUCH-UP
A. All plumbing equipment, cabinets, control panels and other enclosures shall be cleaned and paint touched up as necessary to duplicate factory finished
appearance. Touch-up paint shall exactly match color, composition and quality of factory applied finish.
B. Equipment furnished with factory applied finish shall be protected from injury by
the installing contractor. Any damaged surface shall be repaired by the installing contractor to match original finish or shall be replaced before final acceptance.
13027 22 05 03 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAI
CARMEL, INDIANA
3.05 CLEANING
A. Maintain a clean project site throughout the construction period. Provide
personnel to regularly remove debris and unused materials. Coordinate this cleaning effort with your subcontractors.
B. Remove all debris and unused materials from job site created by plumbing work.
C. Clean all plumbing equipment to a "like new" condition prior to systems startup,
prior to balancing and in preparation of final inspection. Vacuum clean all internal components.
D. Clean all mechanical rooms and/or areas of debris and unused material.
Vacuum clean mechanical room floors.
E. Clean the exterior surfaces of all piping systems. Vacuum clean if appropriate. Damp/wet clean with soap (chemical if necessary) and water where required or
directed by Owner/Engineer.
END OF SECTION
13027 22 05 03 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAI
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE IS LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 22 05 19 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 22 05 19 – METERS AND GAUGES PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Provide thermometers and pressure gauges in the piping systems where shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 22 05 01
B. Domestic Water Piping System: Section 22 11 16 1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings on each gauge and thermometer type to be used on this project in
accordance with Specifications Section 22 05 01, General Provisions.. PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 PRESSURE GAUGES - STANDARD
A. Dial size: 4" B. Case: open front style, phenol or stainless steel
C. Bourdon tube: bronze
D. Connection: lower or back as required
E. Accuracy: within 1% of scale range
F. Range: refer to Application - Part 3: Execution
G. Manufacturers
1. Weksler 2. Ashcroft
3. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
13027 22 05 19 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PRESSURE GAUGES - INSTALLATION/APPLICATION
A. Connection in piping: provide a 1/4" ball valve ahead of each gauge. Mount
gauges for maximum visibility. B. Scale range for domestic cold water system: 0-100 psig
3.03 LOCATION REQUIREMENTS
Provide pressure gauge on outlet side of domestic water service backflow preventers. END OF SECTION
13027 22 05 29 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 22 05 29 – BASIC PIPING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Pipe Hangers and Supports
B. Sleeves and Plates
C. Installation of Piping Systems
D. Fire Stop Sealants
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions - Plumbing : Section 22 05 01
B. Completion and Startup: Section 22 05 03
C. Plumbing Pipe Insulation: Section 22 07 19
D. Domestic Water Piping System: Section 22 11 16
E. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: Section 22 13 16
F. Condensate Drain Piping System: Section 22 13 17
1.03 GENERAL PIPE SYSTEM INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Fabricate and install all pressure piping systems in accordance with the procedures established in the ANSI B31 Code. Materials and fittings shall be as
defined by the applicable standards of ANSI, ASHRAE, ASME, AWWA, API, NPC, Plumbing Code, etc.
B. Provide fittings in accordance with the ANSI B16 Code for all changes in
direction, elevation or size. No mitered joints or pipe bends will be permitted. Reduction of pipe size shall be by reducing fittings or couplings. Bushings will
not be permitted.
C. Each length of pipe, fitting and item shall be marked with the manufacturer's name and material identification.
D. Install all piping to present a neat and orderly appearance. Run all lines parallel
with building walls and construction. Keep piping free from contact with structure or equipment to prevent noise transmission, allowing clearance for
expansion and contraction. Offset piping, in approved manner, where required to avoid interference with other work, to increase headroom under piping or to
improve appearance of the work.
E. Anchor piping as required to prevent undesirable movements.
F. Provide ample space between piping and construction for proper insulation covering thickness.
G. Provide adequate protection for piping and equipment against freezing.
13027 22 05 29 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
H. Provide eccentric reducing couplings in all cases where air or water pockets would occur due to a reduction in pipe size. Do not use bushings.
I. Use dielectric couplings when joining dissimilar piping materials.
J. Pipes passing through exposed construction shall be provided with escutcheons
or other seals as described herein. Exposed escutcheons in finished areas shall have a chrome finish.
K. Penetrations of fire rated walls, floors, roofs and ceilings are to be made with
rated fire stops equal/exceeding the fire rating of the building separation being penetrated.
L. The installation of exposed polyvinylchloride pipe (PVC) or similar materials shall
not be permitted for use in plenums and shafts serving supply or return air streams of the building’s ventilation system. Exception: PVC pipe may be used in
supply/return air plenum/shafts when covered with insulation or similar approved materials having a flame spread rating not exceeding twenty five (25) and a
smoke developed rating not exceeding fifty (50).
1.04 PIPING SYSTEMS WARRANTY
A. Maintain integrity of all piping systems through warranty period, repairing all leaks.
B. Warranty work shall include repair/replacement of building materials and finishes
damaged by leak(s).
C. All damage resulting from leaking pipes shall be paid for by the installing contractor.
1.05 CLEARANCE FROM ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Piping is prohibited in electric and telephone rooms and closets, elevator
machine rooms, and for installations over or within 5ft. or transformers, substations, switchboards, motor control centers, standby power plants, and
motors.
B. Branch piping to equipment is acceptable when installed over or within 5ft. of motors.
1.06 DRIP PANS
Provide drip pans under piping when installation over or within 5ft. of electrical apparatus
is unavoidable or in rooms containing electrical equipment or under drainage piping at ceilings of food preparation areas. Pan shall be reinforced, properly supported and made
watertight. Provide enclosed type for pressure piping. Extend 1-1/2 in. drain pipe from pan to spill over nearest floor drain or as indicated.
13027 22 05 29 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING SYSTEM MATERIALS
All pipe hangers and supports shall conform to the latest requirements of ANSI Code For Pressure Piping B 31.1
2.02 PIPE HANGERS (UNINSULATED PIPE)
A. Hangers: CPVC or copper pipe
1. 2" and smaller: copper plated adjustable split ring
a. Grinnell Fig. CT-109 b. Elcen Fig. 310A
c. PHD Fig. 502 2. Larger than 2": copper plated adjustable clevis
a. Grinnell Fig. CT-65 b. Elcen Fig. 312
c. PHD Fig. 502
B. Riser clamps: CPVC or copper pipe
1. Grinnell Fig. CT-121 2. Elcen Fig. 339
3. PHD Fig. 552
C. Floor supports: CPVC or copper pipe, 2" and smaller: U-bolt on structural steel channel secured to floor with angle clips
1. Grinnell Fig. 120
2. Elcen Fig. 368
2.03 PIPE HANGERS (INSULATED PIPE)
A. Provide hanger and support materials as specified for uninsulated pipe but with the following exceptions:
1. Size hanger ring to fit outside insulation
2. Copper plated rings are not required
B. Insulation cradles
1. Provide hard wood cradles on all insulated domestic water pipe services sized for the insulation thickness.
2. Provide hard wood (oak, etc.) cradles on all insulated waste and storm water pipe sized for the insulation thickness. The insulation vapor barrier
is to encompass the wood block. Wood cradles shall be 6" in length.
13027 22 05 29 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.04 SLEEVES AND PLATES (ESCUTCHEONS)
A. Schedule of Sleeve Usage
1. All sleeves through concrete walls shall be Schedule 40 PVC pipe. 2. All sleeves through wall board, drywall, plasterboard or wall panels shall
be 20 gauge galvanized steel. 3. All sleeves through masonry walls, metal roof deck, concrete floors on
grade and metal deck shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.
B. Special sleeves and sealing as shown on drawings.
C. Plates shall be chromium plated for finished areas and plain cast iron elsewhere.
2.05 FIRE STOP SEALANTS
A. Penetration Sealants
1. Dow Corning "Firestop Foam" and "Firestop Sealant" 2. Insta-Foam Products, Inc. "Insta-Foam Seal Silicone RTV Foam"
3. 3M Brand "Fire Barrier" Caulk 4. 3M Brand Moldable Putty "Pads" and Moldable Putty "Stix"
B. Intumescent sealants for use in openings and sleeves involving plastic pipe,
insulated pipe or flexible cable:
1. Dow Corning "Firestop Intumescent Wrap Strip" 2. Fox Coupling, Inc. "Cast-In-Place Firestop Coupling"
3. 3M Brand "Fire Barrier" Caulk with FS-195 wrap strip and CS-195 composite sheet.
2.06 PEX PIPE HANGERS
A. Single pipe horizontal hangers shall be nylon pex tubing suspension clip with
dual anchor points.
B. Multi-pipe horizontal hangers shall be nylon pex tubing suspension clips with dual anchor points mounted on trapeze channel.
C. Single pipe vertical hangers shall be metal economy pex tubing clamp with
spacer to accommodate pipe insulation along anchor surface.
13027 22 05 29 – PAGE 5 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General
1. Furnish and install supports and anchors required for proper installation and support of pipe lines.
2. Pipe suspensions shall prevent excessive stress and excessive variation in supporting force. Fabrication and installation of supports for pipe
lines shall not constrain piping to cause excessive transfer of load from supports to piping or from support to support when expansion or
contraction occurs. Supports shall be capable of taking entire piping load imposed by expansion or contraction.
3. Piping system where flexibility is not desired shall be supported by rigid hangers.
B. Pipe Hanger and Supports
1. The following piping must be suspended by individual pipe hangers,
rather than being suspended with other piping on trapeze type supports. a. All sanitary waste and vent piping
b. All condensate drain piping c. All relief piping terminating over indirect waste
2. Piping, other than as specified above, may be suspended by individual pipe hangers or where two or more pipes are paralleling each other at
same elevation, Contractor may at his option support them on common trapeze bars. Construct of structural steel angles or channels with rods
of sufficient strength to support weight and of design satisfactory to the Owner. Use U-bolts for securing individual pipes in trapeze. Under no
circumstances shall piping be supported from other piping. 3. Where smaller piping must be suspended closer to overhead
construction than is possible with single rod hangers, use double rod supports.
4. Spacing a. All pipe hanger spacing specified below are also applicable to
trapeze hangers. Spacing shall be determined by smallest pipe among pipes carried on trapeze.
b. Provide hanger or support at all valves, tees and elbows. c. Follow pipe manufacturer’s specific recommendations for
support frequency for CPVC pipe. Avoid binding or cramping pipe in racks or spaces that would limit natural flexing of the
pipe. Pipe support spacing shall be one half of the spacing allowed for steel pipe.
d. Other risers shall be supported at lowest floor through which they pass. Pipe 2" and smaller in size shall be guided at every floor.
5. Pex Pipe Hangers a. Horizontal pex pipe hangers spacing to be 4’-0” O.C. maximum.
b. Vertical pex pipe hanger spacing to be 6’-0” O.C. maximum c. Isolate pex pipe passing through openings within metal framing
to avoid abrasion.
13027 22 05 29 – PAGE 6 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
C. Securing Hangers and Supports at Building Construction
1. Provide as required steel or malleable iron inserts in poured concrete
construction. Maximum load which may be applied to any one foot length of continuous insert shall not exceed 1000 pounds.
2. Where piping is suspended from masonry construction, use expansion shields to attach pipe supports to construction. Expansion shield bolt
diameter the same size as the support rod diameter specified. 3. Where piping is suspended from structural steel building framing or
supporting members, furnish and install beam clamps for attaching piping support device to building member beam clamps made of heavy
steel forged to fit structural member (I-beam, angle, channel) and securely fastened in place. No building member to be drilled, welded,
cut or otherwise deformed in attaching pipe supports unless approved by the Engineer.
4. Where existing masonry is not suitable to receive and hold expansion shields or where other means of attachment is advantageous, the
Contractor shall submit alternate method for approval to Engineer. 5. Do not suspend hangers from deck. Suspend from structural framing
members in an approved and workmanlike manner. 6. Provide additional bracing and supports wherever needed, in opinion of
the Engineer. Install structural steel members, attached to building framing, where required, to provide additional points of support. Drill
building structural and miscellaneous steel only as directed by the Engineer.
D. Vertical Pipe Hangers
1. Support vertical runs under 15 feet long with hanger adjacent to elbows.
2. Support vertical runs over 15 feet long with riser clamps. Weld clamps to pipe and support on pipe sleeve or building structure. Space clamps at
every floor with maximum spacing of 28 feet. 3. Malleable iron risers shall be supported at every floor.
4. All risers shall be supported at lowest floor through which they pass. Pipe 2" and smaller in size shall be guided at every floor through which it
passes. Larger pipe may be guided at every other floor. 5. Provide supports at the bottom of risers with structural steel supports of a
Structural Engineer approved design. Secure to floor with angle clips.
3.02 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Furnish, locate and set pipe sleeves where piping passes through floors, walls and other concrete or masonry structural materials except where tunnels, chases
or shafts are provided in the construction.
B. Wall Sleeves
1. Below Grade a. Sleeves set in walls below finished grade, in which one side is
open to a space within the building, shall be provided with a water stop/collar which will seal against the passage of water
between the sleeve and concrete. Sleeve shall be sized to finish flush with face of wall. Manufacturer" 'Century Line
Sleeves' or approved equal.
13027 22 05 29 – PAGE 7 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
b. Sleeves shall be installed where pipes pass under or through
footings, grade beams or other structural bearing walls existing or new.
2. Above Grade: Sleeves set in walls above grade shall be sized to finish flush with face of walls and shall be constructed of material which is
equal to or greater than the fire rating of the wall.
C. Floor Sleeves: Floor sleeves shall extend 1-1/2" above finished floor in chases and mechanical spaces. Sleeve shall extend to 3" above finished floors in areas
such as kitchens, food preparation, dishwashing and laboratory areas. Sleeves shall be flush with finish floor in occupied spaces.
D. Sleeves shall be in accordance with the following schedule unless otherwise
specified. SLEEVE SCHEDULE
PIPE SIZE UNINSUL. 1" INSUL. 1-1/2" INSUL. 2" INSUL.
1" 2" 4" 6" 6"
1-1/2" 3" 4" 6" 8" 2" 3" 6" 8" 8"
3" 4" 6" 8" 10" 4" 6" 8" 10" 10"
6" 8" 10" 12" 12"
E. The void between the sleeve and wall, and the pipe or insulation jacket shall be neatly filled with an approved fire stop material.
3.03 UNION AND FLANGES
Provide at intervals and locations where they will facilitate disconnection and removal of
piping at all valves, at connections to equipment and elsewhere as shown.
3.04 APPLICATION OF FIRE STOP SEALANTS
A. Prepare and apply preparation sealing system in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Employ installation techniques which will ensure that fire-stopping is deposited
to fill and seal holes and openings.
1. Provide flame (F) rating minimum one-hour, but not less than fire resistance rating of the assembly in which it is installed, per ASTM
E-814. 2. Ensure effective smoke seal.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of applied sealant smooth.
13027 22 05 29 – PAGE 8 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
3.05 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and install valves as specified in domestic water specification.
B. Unless specifically otherwise indicated, provide valves in accordance with the following:
1. Shut-off valves shall be provided at each piece of equipment
2. Valves same size as lines in which they are installed. 3. Valves in each service branch at point where it leaves main.
4. All valves 2" and smaller shall be threaded. 5. Install a union just down stream of all threaded valves.
C. Install valves with stems vertical where possible but in no case lower than
horizontal position.
D. Where locations of valves are not shown in detail, install valves in accessible positions arranged for easy access.
E. Provide chain wheels with guides, and extension stem hand-wheels, for
convenient operation of frequently used valves located above 7 feet from floor in mechanical room(s).
F. Where mixing faucet assemblies with shutoff control located down stream of
the mixer are furnished by others (i.e.: hose spray assemblies). Contractor shall coordinate and provide necessary check valves with unions and
appurtenances required.
END OF SECTION
13027 22 05 41 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 22 05 41 – TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING (INTERIOR)
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK
A. General Provisions: Section 22 05 01
B. Domestic Water Piping System: Section 22 11 16
C. Sanitary Waste and Vent System: Section 22 13 16
1.02 SCOPE
Work in this section pertains to that located within the building and to a coordinated point beyond the exterior wall.
1.03 REFERENCES
The latest issues of the following American Society of Testing Materials' documents form
a part of this specification to the extent hereinafter.
A. D698 Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density
B. D1556-64 Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method
C. D2167-66 Density of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Imported materials shall be stockpiled on site where directed if not ready for installation. Maintain segregation of differing materials.
B. Do not deliver materials until ready for incorporation into the permanent work.
Storage space is not available.
1.05 TRENCH CONDITIONS
Protection of trench surrounding structures, surfaces and equipment:
A. Embankments and excavations shall be kept shaped and drained.
B. Operate pumping equipment as required to keep the excavation free of water, firm and undisturbed until approval of the permanent work has been received
from the Engineer.
C. Provide adequate shoring and brace excavations as necessary to prevent cave-ins and excessive settlement
D. Do not use mechanical excavation equipment within two feet of existing piping,
appurtenances, structural columns, footings and grade beams.
E. Damage of piping, structures or surfaces as mentioned above shall be repaired or replaced by the appropriate trades at the expense of this contractor.
13027 22 05 41 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Select Aggregate: No. 14-2 sand.
B. #12 crushed stone with fines
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
Before commencement of work, verify the following with the documents associated with
all work below grade.
A. Type of existing floor and wall finishes.
B. Existing structural conditions near trenches (i.e. load bearing walls, columns. etc).
C. Demolition of miscellaneous structures (i.e. manholes inside the building).
D. Means, methods and routing of transporting materials in and out of building.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Lay out the various lines on the floor with a washout type paint in areas subject to
traffic or a chalk line where not subject to traffic. Lay out lines must not be applied on carpet unless approval is given by the Owner.
B. Do not proceed with excavation until layout is approved.
C. Set line and grade stakes as required or specified in the various sections
covering the installation of piping.
3.03 TRENCHING
A. General: All excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered shall be performed to the depths indicated or as otherwise
specified. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be piled in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the edge of the floor cut. All slab and
excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill shall be removed. Sheeting and shoring shall be placed as may be necessary for the protection of
the work and for the safety of personnel. Unless otherwise indicated, excavation shall be by open cut except that short sections of a trench may be tunneled if the
pipe can be safely and properly installed and backfill can be properly compacted in such tunnel sections. Where specifically allowed, tunneled or directional bore
pipe shall be in accordance with the Local Code.
13027 22 05 41 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
B. Trench Excavation: Trenches shall be of the necessary width for proper laying of pipe. The banks of pipe trenches shall be as nearly vertical as practical. Care
shall be taken not to overexcavate unless the trench bottom is of a non-compressible material (i.e. rock, etc.), refer to overexcavation described
below when required. The bottom of the trenches shall be accurately graded to provide a uniform surface for the type of bedding specified. Stones shall be
removed as necessary to avoid point bearing. Except as hereinafter specified for wet or otherwise unstable material, overdepths shall be backfilled with materials
specified for backfilling the lower portion of trenches. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable material that is incapable of properly supporting the pipe is encountered
in the bottom of the trench, such material shall be overexcavated to a depth to allow for construction of a stable pipe bedding. Bedding shall be a minimum of 6"
deep.
C. Special requirements for specific systems.
1. Storm, waste and vent piping: The width of the trench at and below the top of the pipe shall be such that the clear space between the barrel of
the pipe and the trench wall shall not exceed eight inches on either side of the pipe. The width of the trench above that level shall be as wide as
necessary for the proper performance of the work. The bottom of the trench shall be rounded so that at least the bottom quadrant of the pipe
shall rest firmly on undisturbed soil for as near the full length of the barrel as proper jointing operations will permit. This part of the excavation shall
be done manually, only a few feet in advance of the pipe laying. 2. Water Lines: Unless otherwise indicated, trenches shall be graded to avoid high points which necessitate placing vacuum and relief valves in the lines. Maintain minimum vertical and horizontal distances between
water and sewer piping as required by the Indiana Plumbing Code. 3. Excavation for Appurtenances: Excavation for pits, tanks and similar
structures shall be sufficient to leave at least 12" clear space between the outer surface of structure and the bank or timber that may be used to
hold and protect the banks. Any overdepth excavation below such appurtenances that has not been directed will be considered
unauthorized and shall be refilled with sand, gravel or concrete as directed at no additional cost to the Owner.
13027 22 05 41 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
3.04 BACKFILLING
A. General: After bedding, the trenches shall not be backfilled until all required pressure tests are performed. Where damage is likely to result from withdrawing
sheeting, the sheeting will be approved to be left in place and the contract price will be adjusted accordingly. Except as otherwise specified for special conditions
of overdepths, trenches shall be backfilled to the ground surface with selected material as hereinafter specified. Trenches improperly backfilled shall be
reopened to the depth required for proper compaction, then refilled and compacted as specified or the condition shall be restored to its original condition
as near as practical and as hereinafter specified.
B. Backfilling of trench: Backfill material shall be deposited in 6" maximum thickness layers and compacted with suitable tampers to the specified density as described
in Specifications, Division I. If any portion of the cover in the lower portion of the trench is in the depth of special compaction and materials requirements under
pavement, the special requirements shall control. Special care shall be taken not to damage the coating or wrapping of pipes.
END OF SECTION
13027 22 05 76 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 22 05 76 – DRAINAGE PIPING CLEANOUT PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install all piping specialty items as described herein or as shown on the drawings.
B. Cleanouts shall be required on all soil, waste, and storm water piping as
described in the latest Indiana approved edition of the Plumbing Code and as described herein.
C. Cleanouts are to be installed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet on straight runs of pipe 4" and smaller.
D. Cleanouts are to be installed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet on straight runs of pipe 6" and larger.
E. Cleanouts are to be installed inside the building near connection between the building drain and building sewer or installed outside the building and extended to grade where shown on the drawings.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General Provisions: Section 22 05 01 B. Completion and Startup: Section 22 05 03
C. Basic Piping Requirements: Section 22 05 29
D. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping System: Section 22 13 16
E. Condensate Drain Piping System: Section 22 13 17
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 FLOOR CLEANOUT (FINISHED AREAS)
A. For concrete floor finished and unfinished surfaces, medium duty use
1. Cleanout shall have a MIP connection for attachment to FIP fitting. 2. Materials: a. Ring/Cover: nickel bronze
b. Threaded body: cast iron
c. Cleanout plug: slotted polypropylene 3. Manufacturers: Sioux Chief 852 Series or approved equal
13027 22 05 76 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
B. For floor areas covered with vinyl tile and linoleum surfaces
1. Cleanout shall have a MIP connection for attachment to FIP fitting.
2. Materials: a. Ring/Cover: nickel bronze
b. Threaded body: cast iron c. Cleanout plug: slotted polypropylene 3. Manufacturers: Sioux Chief 852 Series or approved equal
2.02 FLOOR CLEANOUTS (UNFINISHED AREAS)
A. Cleanout shall have a MIP connection for attachment to FIP fitting. B. Materials:
1. Ring/Cover: nickel bronze 2. Threaded body: cast iron
3. Cleanout plug: slotted polypropylene C. Manufacturers: Sioux Chief 852 Series or approved equal
2.03 WALL CLEANOUT TEE AND COVER - (FINISHED AREAS)
For concealed piping where cleanout is desired in wall in lieu of floor such as base of soil and waste stacks and base of roof conductors
A. PVC cleanout tee. Threaded bronze cleanout plug. Nickel-bronze frame
stainless steel cover, vandal proof screws.
B. Manufacturers: Sioux Chief 813 Series or approved equal
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide cleanout branches throughout the entire building soil, waste, storm water and condensate drain piping systems. Install at every 90° turn or angle of the piping systems.
B. All cleanouts above ceilings are to be coordinated with other trades for
accessibility. C. All floor and wall cleanouts are to be installed flush and true to finished surfaces.
END OF SECTION
13027 22 07 19 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 22 07 19 – PIPE INSULATION
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Work shall include all labor, equipment, accessories, materials and services required to furnish and install all insulation, fittings and finishes for the following piping systems:
1. Domestic water piping
2. Condensate drain piping
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 22 05 01
B. Completion and Startup: Section 22 05 03
C. Basic Piping Requirements: Section 22 05 29
D. Domestic Water Piping System: Section 22 11 16
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Insulation shall be installed by skilled workmen regularly engaged in this type of work.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Specification Sections 22 05 01, General Provisions.
B. Submit shop drawings which indicate complete material data, a list of materials
proposed for this project and thickness of material for individual services.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Deliver material to job site in original non-broken factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's density and thickness.
B. Perform work at ambient and equipment temperatures as recommended by the
adhesive manufacturer. Repair separation of joints or cracking of insulation due to thermal movement or poor workmanship.
1.06 SCHEDULING
A. Work shall be scheduled by the Contractor.
B. Maintain communication with the Contractor throughout construction period to
assure coordination of the insulation installation with the progress of the piping systems.
1.07 DEFINITION OF TERMS
A. Concealed: shall mean hidden from sight and/or access such as in trenches,
chases, furred spaces, pipe shafts, or above suspended ceilings.
13027 22 07 19 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
B. Exposed: shall mean that piping or equipment is not "concealed" as defined
above. Piping and equipment in service tunnels, mechanical equipment rooms, storage areas or unfinished rooms are to be considered as "exposed".
C. Accessible: shall mean above suspended lay-in type ceilings.
D. Inaccessible: shall mean above suspended ceilings not readily accessed from
most areas.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All pipe insulation and coverings on pipe shall have a flame spread rating not
exceeding twenty five (25) and a smoke developed rating not exceeding fifty (50).
B. Pipe insulation coverings and adhesives on pipes used in chases, shafts or other concealed spaces shall have a flame spread rating not exceeding twenty five
(25) and a smoke developed rating not exceeding one hundred fifty (150).
C. Pipe insulation and coverings on pipe used in plenums and shafts serving as supply or return air ducts or exposed in finished areas shall have a flame spread
rating not exceeding twenty five (25) and a smoke developed rating not exceeding fifty (50).
2.02 INSULATING MATERIALS: PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. Fiberglass
1. Cold piping: a fine inorganic fibrous glass insulation with factory applied
vapor barrier jacket, molded to conform to piping, "K" value at 75°F, maximum 0.24 btu inch/sq.ft./°F/hour.
2. Hot piping: a fine inorganic fibrous glass insulation with factory applied general purpose jacket, molded to conform to piping, "K" value at 75°F,
maximum 0.25 btu inch/sq.ft./°F/hour.
B. Elastomeric foam: a closed cellular material, odorless, self-extinguishing, UL approved, maximum water vapor transmission of 0.20 perms; "K" value at 75°F,
maximum 0.27 btu inch/sq.ft./°F/hour.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS JACKET MATERIALS
A. Aluminum jacket: embossed aluminum with factory attached 30-9-30 duplex waterproof asphalt laminated paper as manufactured by Childers (0.010"
thickness); Childers Ell-Jacs for fittings.
B. Reinforced foil and paper: FSK (foil-skrim-kraft) aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass yard mesh and laminated to 40# chemically treated, fire resistant kraft;
UL listed.
2.04 ACCEPTABLE INSULATION MANUFACTURERS
A. Owens-Corning
B. Johns-Manville
13027 22 07 19 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
C. Armstrong
D. Knauf
2.05 ACCEPTABLE INSULATION SUNDRIES/ADHESIVES MANUFACTURERS
A. Benjamin Foster
B. Childers
C. Vimasco
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
Application of insulation materials to piping shall be done in accordance with
manufacturers' written recommendations. Where thickness of insulation is not specified, use applicable thickness recommended by manufacturer for specific use.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Apply insulation only after piping and equipment have been tested and cleaned.
B. Protect furniture, equipment, ducts, pipes, etc. with tarpaulins. Keep premises
clean.
C. Insure surface is clean and dry prior to installation. Insure insulation is dry before and during application. Finish with systems at operating condition.
3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. All insulation shall be continuous through wall and ceiling openings and sleeves.
All covered pipe is to be located a sufficient distance from walls, other pipe, ductwork and other obstacles to permit the application of the full thickness of
insulation specified. (If necessary, extra fittings and pipe are to be used.)
B. Vapor barrier jackets shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken vapor seal.
C. Pipe hangers shall be sized large enough to be installed over the outer surface of the insulation. Load distributing corrosion resistant #14 USG metal shields shall
be installed around the lower one-third circumference of the insulation. Shields shall be 12 gauge for smaller sizes. Length of the shield shall be 12" and up
through 6"; 16" for 6" through 12"; and 20" over 12" IPS.
3.04 APPLICATION OF PIPE INSULATION
A. All pipe insulation shall be installed with joints butted firmly together.
B. Seal all punctures in vapor barrier jacket with vapor barrier adhesive on cold piping.
C. Apply minimum 0.016 thick aluminum metal jackets on all piping, as follows:
1. In public and occupied areas where pipe is subjected to damage from normal traffic.
13027 22 07 19 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2. All insulated pipe installed outdoors.
3. All exposed vertical and horizontal piping below 6'-0" AFF in mechanical rooms or occupied non-finished rooms, such as storage, work rooms,
etc. This includes elbows and fittings. Not included are valves or strainers.
4. The metal jacket shall be retained with rivets or other suitable method that does not puncture the insulation.
D. Jackets on pipe insulation shall be vapor sealed using self-sealing lap, lap-seal
tape gun or adhesive such as 520.
E. All fiberglass insulation ends are to be tapered at 45° and sealed.
F. Insulation of valves and fittings
1. Valves and fittings a. Provide mitered sections of fiberglass insulation of same
thickness and density as adjoining pipe insulation or provide insulating type cement equal to adjoining pipe insulation
thickness. b. Cover insulation with vapor tight jacket of same jacket as
adjoining pipe insulation. 2. Elbows
a. Insulate elbows with fiberglass insulation of same thickness and density as adjoining pipe insulation. b. A flexible fibreglass type insulation is not acceptable. c. Insulate elbows with high temperature rated fiberglass insulation
for steam and condensate piping. d. Cover insulated elbows with pre-molded PVC elbow covers.
(1) PVC covers shall be rated for 25 fire/50 smoke develop maximum.
(2) Manufacturer: Zeston; or approved equal 3. Mechanical couplings (mechanical contractor's option): Insulate all
mechanical couplings in systems utilizing same (as determined by mechanical contractor) with manufacturer's molded fiberglass insulation sections. Insulation thickness shall be of same density, jacket and thickness as adjoining pipe insulation.
3.05 APPLICATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. General: Insulate all manholes, removable heads and access doors so they
may be removed.
B. Round equipment: Secure insulation with ½" wide metal bands, 12" on center, or with mechanical pins welded to equipment 12" on center.
C. Flat or irregular equipment (metal partitions, plenums, etc.): Secure insulation
with mechanical pins welded to equipment 12" on center each way.
13027 22 07 19 – PAGE 5 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
3.06 COLD SERVICE AND NON-POTABLE - PIPE INSULATION
A. Service for domestic cold water; service entrance and all water main piping to
public areas and living units. PEX tubing in living units need not be insulated.
1. Exposed: Type 1 2. Concealed: Type 1 or 2
3. Accessible: Type 1
B. Materials Type (1) Type (2)
1. Insulation Fiberglass Elastomeric foam
2. Jacket Factory ASJ (Not required) 3. Insulation thickness for
pipe:
½" thru 1" 1" 1 /2" 1-1/4" thru 5" 1" 3 /4"
6" and above 1" Use Type 1
3.07 HOT SERVICE - PIPE INSULATION
A. Service for domestic hot in public areas
1. Exposed: Type 1 2. Concealed: Type 1 or 2
3. Accessible: Type 1 or 2
B. Materials Type (1) Type (2)
1. Insulation Fiberglass Elastomeric foam
2. Jacket Factory ASJ (Not required) 3. Insulation thickness for
pipe:
½" thru 2" 1" 1" 2-1/2" and above 1-1/2" Use Type 1
13027 22 07 19 – PAGE 6 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
3.08 DRAINAGE SERVICE - PIPE INSULATION
A. Service for condensate drains from cooling coils:
1. Concealed: Type 1 or 2 2. Accessible: Type 1 or 2
3. Exposed: Not required if in conditioned space; Type 1 if in unconditioned space.
B. Materials Type (1) Type (2)
1. Insulation Heavy density Elastomeric
fiberglass foam 2. Jacket Factory ASJ (Not required)
3. Insulation thickness for pipe:
Thru 2-1/2" 1" 3 /4"
3" and above 1" Use Type 1
END OF SECTION
13027 22 11 16 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 22 11 16 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install domestic hot and cold water pipe and fittings to plumbing fixtures and equipment as shown on the drawings or herein specified. B. All piping shall be installed in compliance with the latest Indiana approved
Plumbing Code and as recommended by the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO).
C. All work specified in this section includes domestic water piping and valves within
the building.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 22 05 01 B. Completion and Startup: Section 22 05 03
C. Meters and Gauges: Section 22 05 19
D. Basic Piping Requirements: Section 22 05 29
E. Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting (Interior): Section 22 05 41
F. Pipe Insulation: Section 22 07 19
G. Plumbing Fixtures and Trim: 22 42 00
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING (ABOVE GROUND)
A. Maximum Design: pressure 125 psig, temperature 200°F. B. Piping System Notes
1. Domestic cold water, hot water and hot water return piping for above
ground and exposed installation 2. Fabricate piping system in strict accordance with the materials specified
herein and per the following restrictions. 3. Grooved and coupled piping systems are acceptable only in fully
accessible locations, no exceptions. 4. Coupled system products are not acceptable for valves, strainers, etc.
13027 22 11 16 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
C. Pipe and Fitting Material
1. ½” thru 4” CPVC: Schedule 40 pipe shall be manufactured from a Type IV, Grade I Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) compound with a
minimum Cell Classification of 23447 per ASTM D1784. The pipe shall be manufactured in strict compliance to ASTM F441, consistently
meeting the Quality Assurance test requirements of this standard with regard to material, workmanship, burst pressure, flattening, and
extrusion quality. The pipe shall be produced in the USA using domestic materials, by an ISO 9001 certified manufacturer, and shall be stored
indoors after production, at the manufacturing site, until shipped from factory. This pipe shall carry the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)
seal of approval for potable water applications. The pipe shall have a Flame Spread rating <25 and a Smoke Development rating <50 when
tested and listed for Surface Burning Characteristics in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102-2-M88 or equivalent.
2. PEX plumbing system - for Apartments or Guest Rooms a. 1" diameter Type L copper manifold comprised with 3/4" inlet
with shut-off ball valve, spun closed end and ½" PEX crimp outlets, the ½" copper PEX outlets are brazed to the header.
Zurn copper manifold - QCM43 or Nibco manufacturer. b. Pipe shall be rolled tubing made of cross-linked high density
polyethylene, produced using the silane method of cross linking (PEX-B) and meeting the performance specifications of ASTM
F876/F877 and CSA B137.5 Pipe shall also comply with NSF 61 and 14 as suitable for use with potable water. Temperature and
pressure ratings shall be 160 psi at 73°F, 100 psi at 180°F, and 80 psi at 200° F. Pipe shall have UV stabilization additives to
protect it from UV exposure. Pipe shall be chlorine resistant utilizing the ASTM F2023 testing standards.
c. Pex crimp fittings shall employ stainless steel clamping system. All terminations at fixture rough-ins shall have drop ear elbows
with rigid 90 degree connection and ½" threaded female outlet.
2.02 PIPING (BELOW GROUND)
A. Maximum Design: pressure 125 psig; temperature 200°F. B. Pipe and Fittings Material (¾” thru 4"):
1. Type L, hard drawn, seamless copper pipe and fittings ASTM B-88, 95-5/’Silfos’ soldered joints
2. Schedule 40/80 CPVC, Type IV, Grade L, with a minimum cell classification of 2344-7 per ASTM D1784.
2.03 VALVES
A. Shutoff Valves
1. ½” to 2” CPVC ball valves: Valve pressure rating 250 psi at 73°F water non-shock full-port; maximum service temperature 210°F, full port, EPDM o-rings
a. Nibco b. Spears c. Or approved equal
13027 22 11 16 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2. 3” to 4” CPVC ball valves: Valve pressure rating 150 psi at 73°F water
non-shock full-port; maximum service temperature of 210°F full port; FKM o-ring; female NPT threaded end connections; orange handle;
ASTM F1970, NSF/ANSI Standard 14, NSF/ANSI Standard 61 G a. Nibco
b. Spears c. Or approved equal
B. Check Valves
1. ½” to 2” Schedule 80, CPVC check valve: valve pressure rating 150 psi at 73°F water non-shock; maximum service temperature of 210°F full
port, EPDM o-rings; both socket and female NPT threaded end connections; ASTM F1970, NSF/ANSI Standard 14, NSF/ANSI Standard
61 G a. Nibco
b Spears c. Or approved equal
2. 3” to 4” Schedule 80, CPVC check valve: valve pressure rating 150 psi at 73°F water non-shock; maximum service temperature of 210°F; EPDM
o-rings; female NPT threaded end connections; ASTM F1970, NSF/ANSI Standard 14, NSF/ANSI Standard 61 G
a. Nibco b. Spears
c. Or approved equal
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 TESTING
Cap all plumbing fixture rough-ins and apply hydrostatic pressure to 1-1/2 times the
normal operating pressure of the system but not less than 75 psig. System must be able to hold test pressure for thirty minutes. If system fails test, Contractor will drain system,
repair leaks and retest until system hold the rated hydrostatic test pressure. 3.02 DISINFECTING
A. The domestic hot and cold water systems used for potable water shall be disinfected in accordance with, Owner requirements, AWWA C601, and Indiana
Department of Health requirements. B. Provide a "Water Sample Report" supplied from the Indiana Department of Health. Submit test results to Owner and Engineer. The sample is to be taken
from faucets selected by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for any costs incurred for water analysis.
END OF SECTION
13027 22 11 16 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 22 11 19 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 22 11 19 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Backflow preventer shall be designed and manufactured for the purpose of prevention of backflow from non-potable water system to the potable/municipal
water system.
B. Domestic water system backflow preventer(s) shall operate on the reduced pressure principle. It shall be a complete assembly consisting of tight closing
shutoff valves before and after the backflow device and protected by a strainer. An additional shut off isolation valve shall be located ahead of the strainer.
1. Reduced pressure principle devices shall be designed to include test
cocks, a pressure differential relief valve located between two positive seating check valves and have renewable seats. The relief valve shall
discharge to an air gap drain funnel assembly (ASSE 1013). 2. Double check principle devices shall be designed to include test cocks
and two positive seating check valves with renewable seats (ASSE 1015).
C. Water hammer arresters shall be sized in accordance with the Plumbing and
Drainage Institute (PDI) recommendations.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General Provisions: Section 22 05 01
B. Completion and Startup: Section 22 05 03
C. Basic Piping Requirements: Section 22 05 29
D. Domestic Water Piping System: Section 22 11 16
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for each type of backflow preventer specified in accordance with Specification Section 22 05 01, General Provisions.
B. Submit final backflow preventer test report on each unit into the Operator’s
Maintenance Manuals.
1.04 AGENCY APPROVAL
A. Installation of backflow preventer(s) shall comply with state and local codes and local water utility requirements.
B. Compliance shall be in accordance with the following standards:
1. ASSE Standard 1013
2. AWWA Standard C-511-92 3. CSA B64.4
4. USC Manual Section 10 5. IAPMO and UPC approved
13027 22 11 19 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 REDUCED PRESSURE PRINCIPLE BACKFLOW Preventer
A. Valve Assembly (1/4" thru 2" size)
1. Bronze body construction, stainless steel and brass internal parts,
screwed connection, inlet strainer (union body connections 3/4" and 1" only).
2. Maximum design: 175 psi; temperature 140°F. 3. Shut-off valves: quarter-turn ball valves
4. Check valves: double seated with removable seats 5. Test Cocks: ball valves
6. Exact size and flow rate as noted on the drawings. 7. Manufacturers
a. Wilkins b. Hersey
c. Febco
B. Valve Assembly (2-1/2" thru 3" size)
1. Bronze body construction with internal waterways epoxy coated. Stainless steel and brass internal parts and flanged connection; inlet
strainer 2. Air inlet, water outlet discharge ports
3. Maximum design: 175 psi; temperature 110°F 4. Shutoff valves: NRS gate valves
5. Check valves: double seated with removable seats 6. Test cocks: ball valves
7. Air gap drain funnel assembly 8. Exact size and flow rate as noted on the drawings.
9. Manufacturers a. Wilkins
b. Hersey c. Febco 825YD Series
2.02 WATER HAMMER ARRESTER (PISTON TYPE)
A. Type 'K', hard drawn copper barrel with internal free floating piston with double
"O-ring" seals. Seal lubricant to be approved for use in potable water systems.
B. ASSE 1010 and Plumbing Drainage Institute (PDI) standards approval
C. Manufacturers
1. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. 2. Sioux Chief
3. Or approved equal
13027 22 11 19 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Pipe relief line where required to nearest drain.
B. Prior to substantial completion and occupancy by the Owner, all strainer assemblies shall be removed and cleaned.
C. Backflow preventer shall be tested and all defective devices repaired or replaced
prior to acceptance..
D. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with the drawings and all applicable state and local codes.
3.02 APPLICATION
Water hammer arrestors shall be provided at washer connections and at main water
service shutoff valve per apartment.
END OF SECTION
13027 22 11 19 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 SECTION 22 11 22 - PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 22 11 22 – DOMESTIC WATER BOOSTER PUMP
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish and install domestic water booster pump system as shown on drawings and specified herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General Conditions: Division 1
B. General Provisions: Section 22 05 01
C. Completion and Startup: Section 22 05 03
D. Basic Piping Requirements: Section 22 05 29
E. Vibration and Controls for Piping and Equipment: Section 22 05 48
F. Variable Frequency Drives: Section 23 10 00
1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
Electrical: Division 26
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 DOMESTIC BOOSTER PUMP
A. Furnish and install variable speed, booster pumps as scheduled on the drawings.
B. The complete Packaged Pumping System, including pumps, motors, control equipment, variable frequency drives, tank, valves, fittings and manifolds must be UL Listed under
Category QCZJ (Packaged Pumping Systems). In addition to the UL Listing for the complete system the control panel assembly must be separately listed under UL 508A
(Industrial Control Panels).
C. The booster system shall be factory assembled on a steel skid including pumps, motors, valves, stainless steel suction and discharge manifolds, and all interconnecting piping,
wiring and controls. Provide isolation valves on the suction and discharge of each pump. The valves shall be full-port ball valves. One thermal purge valve shall be
provided on each pump. Provide panel mounted gauges for indicating system suction and system discharge pressure. All skid mounted components shall be factory finished
in a high quality enamel paint.
D. Individual pumps, motors and pressure regulating or check valves must be serviceable with the booster system in operation and all components shall be suitable for the
maximum working pressure and temperature in the system.
13027 SECTION 22 11 22 - PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.02 PUMPS
System shall include horizontal mounted close-coupled end suction centrifugal pumps with ANSI flanged connections. Pump features to include foot supported casing, back pull out design, top
centerline discharge and hydraulically balanced impeller. Pumps shall be cast iron bronze fitted construction with a replaceable shaft sleeve and mechanical seal suitable for the working
pressure of the system as specified. Motor shall be NEMA close-coupled type with a JM shaft.
2.03 MOTORS
Motors shall be open drip proof and manufactured in accordance with Specification Section 22 05 13 Common Motor Requirements. Motors shall be selected so that they do not exceed
nameplate HP rating throughout the programmed sequence of pump operation.
2.04 SYSTEM VALVES
Each pump discharge shall have a wafer style silent non-slam check valve with cast iron body and sized for a maximum loss of 3 PSI at design flow and be suitable for the maximum working
pressure of the system as specified.
2.05 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
A. Provide and mount on the system skid variable frequency drives of the PWM design suitable for variable torque applications using any standard NEMA Design B squirrel
cage induction motor. Variable frequency drives shall be sized for the maximum possible amp draw throughout the programmed sequence of pump operation.
B. Reference Specifications Section 23 05 48 Vibration and Controls for Piping and
Equipment.
2.06 PRESSURE SENSOR/TRANSMITTER
Provide one pressure sensor/transmitter that provides a 4 to 20 mA DC output, compatible with the building controls system, temperature and pressure requirements. Pressure
sensor/transmitter shall have zero, span and damping devices. The transmitter shall be installed on the system discharge header and factory wired to the control panel.
2.07 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
The lead pump shall run only as necessary to maintain system pressure and controlled
automatically by means of a pressure sensor/transmitter and programmable logic controller, programmed to prevent short cycling. If the lead pump is unable to maintain system pressure
the lag pump(s) shall be started after a time delay and operate in parallel with the lead pump in accordance with the program. When one pump can handle the system demand, the controls
shall shut down the lag pump(s). When a low or no flow condition is reached, the controls shall accelerate the lead pump to charge the system, then shutoff the lead pump and alternate.
13027 SECTION 22 11 22 - PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.08 CONTROL PANEL
A. Logic Section: Provide, mount and wire on the skid a programmable logic controller in a NEMA 1 enclosure to interface the signal from the pressure sensor to the VFD's and
provide a stabilized response to speed up or slow down the pump or add the lag pump(s) to meet system requirements. The controller shall provide setpoint adjustment, timer
adjustment, PID functions and both system and controller self diagnostics via touch screen display. The touch screen display / human machine interface shall include a
minimum of two line display, resistive analog touch, numerical system keyboard. All user interface setpoints shall be easily accessible via a password protected display
screen. Normal system operation shall be tuned to eliminate hunting. Controller shall have one RS 485 Communication port, real time calendar/clock and EEPROM memory
transfer cartridge. B. Power Section: Each system shall include a UL listed enclosed industrial control panel in
a NEMA 1 enclosure, factory mounted and wired on the steel skid. The panel shall be furnished with individual pump disconnects with through the door handles, pump run
lights, H-O-A selector switches and 115 volt fused control transformer.
2.09 CONTROL PANEL FEATURES
A. UL listed enclosed industrial control panel
B. NEMA 1 Enclosure
C. Individual fused disconnects with external handle
D. Programmable logic controller (PLC)
E. Pump running lights
F. H/O/A selector switches
G. 115 volt fused control circuit transformer
H. Pump minimum run timers
I. Mounted and wired on skid
J. Pump operating and sequence controls
K. Control power (on-off) switch and light
L. Low suction pressure shutdown circuit with auto reset, delay timer and light
M. Auto alternate equal pumps
13027 SECTION 22 11 22 - PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 FACTORY TEST
The booster system shall be hydrostatically tested and shall undergo a complete electric and hydraulic test from 0 to 100% design flow at the factory. All control devices including transmitters
and all safety features shall be factory calibrated and tested.
3.02 WARRANTY
The booster system shall be warranted in writing against defects in materials or workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one year after date of original operation.
END OF SECTION
13027 22 13 16 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 22 13 16 – SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING SYSTEM PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install all sanitary, waste and vent piping from plumbing fixtures, drainage fittings and specialty items as shown on the plumbing drawings.
B. All piping shall be installed in compliance with the latest Indiana approved
Plumbing Code and as recommended by the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO).
C. All work specified under this section includes sanitary waste and vent system piping to a coordinated point outside the building.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General Provisions: Section 22 05 01 B. Completion and Startup: Section 22 05 03
C. Basic Piping Requirements: Section 22 05 29
D. Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting (Interior): Section 22 05 41
E. Drainage Piping Cleanouts: Section 22 05 76
F. Pipe and Equipment Insulation: Section 22 07 19
G. Sanitary Drains: Section 22 13 19
H. Plumbing Fixtures and Trim: Section 22 42 00
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING SYSTEM MATERIALS
A. Sanitary Waste Pipe and Fittings - Underground
2" thru 10": DWV, Schedule 40 PVC, bell ends/couplings; ASTM D2564; solvent
weld joints; ASTM A-2665; ASTM F656; ASTM D2855 B. Sanitary Waste Pipe and Fittings - Above Ground
1. 2" thru 10": DWV, Schedule 40 PVC, bell ends/couplings; ASTM D2564; solvent weld joints; ASTM A-2665; ASTM F656; ASTM D2855 2. 1-1/4" thru 8": DWV, hard drawn seamless copper tube and fittings
50-50 soldered joints; ASTM-306.
13027 22 13 16 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
C. Sanitary Vent Pipe and Fittings
1. 1-1/4" thru 8": DWV, Schedule 40 PVC, bell ends/couplings; ASTM A-2665; solvent weld joints; ASTM D 2564; ASTM F656; ASTM D2855.
2. 1-1/4" thru 8": DWV, hard drawn seamless copper tube and fittings 50-50 soldered joints; ASTM-306/ASME B16.32 or ASME B16.29; ASTM
B32. D. Relief Water Piping and Fittings: 3/4" thru 10": DWV, hard drawn seamless
copper tube and fittings; ASTM-306; 50-50 soldered joints; ASME B16.29 or
B16.32; ASTM B32.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All horizontal waste drainage piping shall be installed with the minimum required
pitch unless otherwise shown or specified. B. The bell of all horizontal pipe shall not rest upon the earth but have free area for
caulking.
C. Any pipe junction shall be made with a "Y" branch or combination "Y" and 1/8
bend. D. Cleanout fitting/adaptors shall be of the same manufacturer as the pipe
manufacturer.
E. Horizontal and vertical pipe cleanouts shall be installed in accessible locations
with clearances as required by the Plumbing Code. Countersunk cleanout plugs shall be installed where raised heads may cause a hazard. F. Cleanout plugs shall be threaded type; gas and watertight without the use of
gasket or packing material.
G. All openings for connections must be closed with screw plugs until used and all hand holes must be closed at once and the sewer kept clean (any earth or
foreign matter that may get into the sewer must be removed by this trade).
H. Furnish all required plumbing vents from soil and waste pipes. All vents are to extend 12" above the roof line and be provided with regular roof connections to
receive flashing made for this purpose. I. Rough in piping shall be stubbed three inches from the finished building surfaces.
Temporarily plug and cap piping until equipment is ready for final installation.
J. Obtain dimensioned rough-in shop drawings from the equipment suppliers.
K. Any suspended drain line serving fixtures on floors above shall be suspended from the floor as high as possible.
L. Provide on each vent pipe, a seamless lead or neoprene rubber flashing specifically manufactured for vent size penetrating roof.
13027 22 13 16 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
3.02 TESTING - HYDROSTATIC METHOD
A. The drainage systems shall be tested by plugging the drainage outlets and filling the systems with water which is then permitted to stand thus for one (1) hour. A
hydrostatic head of ten feet of water must be attained for the entire test period.
B. Tests shall be performed before any covering or backfilling is done and before piping is built in or concealed.
C. The system shall be considered satisfactory only if there is no loss of water or
leakage for the duration of the test period.
END OF SECTION
13027 22 13 16 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 22 13 17 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 22 13 17 – CONDENSATE PIPING SYSTEM PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install air conditioning condensate drain pipe and fittings from equipment as shown on the drawings or herein specified.
B. All piping shall be installed in compliance with the latest Indiana Plumbing Code.
C. All work specified in this section includes condensate drain piping within the
building.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General Provisions: Section 22 05 01
B. Basic Piping Requirements: Section 22 05 29
C. Plumbing Pipe Insulation: Section 22 07 19
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING
For above ground (1-1/4" through 2"): DWV, Schedule 40 PVC, bell ends/couplings;
solvent weld joints: ASTM A-2665.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All horizontal condensate drain piping shall be installed with the minimum
required pitch unless otherwise shown or specified.
B. Condensate drains which are connected to drain/drip pans of various mechanical equipment units shall be connected with DWV piping. Each drain/drip pan shall
be protected by a full size trap assembly at each unit with a minimum of a 2" depth plus a static seal of the size shown on the drawings. Provide a sanitary
tee on the inlet side of the trap assembly with a removable threaded cleanout plug in the vertical position.
C. Any pipe junction shall be made with a "Y" branch or combination "Y" and 1/8
bend. Cleanouts are to be provided at every change of direction including traps at the unit.
D. Obtain dimensioned rough-in shop drawings from the equipment suppliers.
13027 22 13 17 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
3.02 TESTING - HYDROSTATIC METHOD
A. The drainage system shall be tested by plugging the drainage outlets and filling the system with water which is then permitted to stand thus for one hour. A
hydrostatic head of ten feet of water must be attained for the entire test period.
B. The system shall be considered satisfactory only if there is no loss of water or leakage for the duration of the test period.
END OF SECTION
13027 22 13 19 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 22 13 19 – SANITARY DRAINS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install drainage fittings as shown on the drawings or herein specified.
B. Fittings include floor drains, shower drains, open site drains, trench drains and
specialty fittings.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General Provisions - Plumbing: Section 22 05 01
B. Basic Piping Requirements: Section 22 05 29
C. Drainage Piping Cleanouts: 22 05 76
D. Sanitary Waste & Vent Piping System: Section 22 13 16
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings for sanitary waste drainage fittings in accordance with Specifications Section 22 05 01, General Provisions.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 DRAINS
A. Refer to Drainage Fitting Schedule on drawings for characteristics of drains.
B. Manufacturers
1. Sioux Chief Manufacturing 2. Light Commercial
3. Oatey SCS 4. Or approved equal.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install drains plumb to finished floor surface.
B. Drain outlets to be same size as shown on drawings.
C. Provide deep seal P-traps on all drains not specified with integral traps.
END OF SECTION
13027 22 13 19 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 22 14 13 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 22 14 13 – STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install all storm water piping from roof drains, areas drains, canopy drains, overflow drains, fittings and specialty items as shown on the plumbing
drawings.
B. All piping shall be installed in compliance with the latest approved Plumbing Code.
C. All work specified under this section includes storm water system piping to a
coordinated point outside the building.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General Provisions: Section 22 05 01
B. Completion and Startup: Section 22 05 03
C. Basic Piping Requirements: Section 22 05 29
D. Plumbing Pipe and Equipment Insulation: Section 22 07 19
E. Storm Drainage Fittings: Section 22 14 26
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING SYSTEM MATERIALS
A. Storm Water Pipe and Fittings – Underground
1. 2" thru 16": DWV, Schedule 40 PVC, bell ends/couplings; ASTM A-2665;
solvent weld joints; ASTM D-2564; ASTM F656; ASTM D2855.
B. Storm Water Pipe and Fittings - Above Ground
1. 2" thru 16": DWV, Schedule 40 PVC, bell ends/couplings; ASTM D2665 solvent weld joints; ASTM D2564; ASTM F656; ASTM D2855.
C. Pumped discharge pipe and fittings - aboveground 1-1/4" - 4" DWV, Schedule
40 PVC, bell ends/couplings; ASTM D2665 solvent weld joints; ASTM D2564; ASTM F656; ASTM D2855.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All horizontal storm drainage piping shall be installed with the minimum required pitch unless otherwise shown or specified.
13027 22 14 13 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
B. Any pipe junction shall be made with a "Y" branch or combination "Y" and 1/8 bend.
C. Cleanouts are to be provided where shown or where necessary and at the base
of all roof conductors.
D. All openings for connections must be closed with screw plugs until used and all hand holes must be closed at once and the sewer kept clean (any earth or
foreign matter that may get into the sewer must be removed).
E. The installation of exposed polyvinylchloride pipe (PVC) or similar materials shall not be permitted for use in plenums and shafts serving supply or return air
streams of the building’s ventilation system.
3.02 TESTING - HYDROSTATIC METHOD
A. The drainage systems shall be tested by plugging the drainage outlets and filling the systems with water which is then permitted to stand thus for one (1) hour. A
pneumatic test at 65 psi must be maintained for the entire test period.
B. Tests shall be performed before any covering or backfilling is done and before piping is built in or concealed.
C. The system shall be considered satisfactory only if there is no loss of water or
leakage for the duration of the test period.
END OF SECTION
13027 22 14 26 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 22 14 26 – STORM DRAINS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install storm drainage fittings as shown on the drawings or herein specified.
B. Fittings shall include roof drains, overflow roof drains, canopy drains, area drains
and specialty fittings.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General Provisions: Plumbing: Section 22 05 01
B. Basic Piping Requirements: Section 22 05 29
C. Plumbing Pipe and Equipment Insulation: Section 22 07 19
D. Storm Drainage Piping: Section 22 14 13
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings for storm drainage fittings in accordance with Specification Section 22 05 01, General Provisions.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 DRAINS
A. Refer to Drainage Fitting Schedule on drawings for characteristics of drains.
B. Manufacturers: Jay R. Smith; Zurn; Josam; Wade; or approved equal
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All roof drains shall be of the size and type noted in the schedule and/or detailed
on the drawings.
B. All roof drains shall be of cast iron construction and have underdeck clamps and body extension when roof insulation of 1" or thicker is utilized.
C. Provide cleanouts in the base of each roof conductor. Roof drains shall be
designed for the type of roof construction to be used.
13027 22 14 26 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
D. All roof drains installed in metal deck, precast or similar construction shall have
deck clamps.
E. Roof drains shall be properly flashed into the roof with lead flashing or other approved material.
F. Install area drains level and plumb to finished surface. Compress insulation to
form positive flow from surface into drain.
END OF SECTION
13027 22 14 29 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 22 14 29 – STORM WATER SUMP PUMPS/BASIN PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK
A. General Provisions - Plumbing: Section 22 05 01
B. Completion and Startup: Section 22 05 03
C. Common Motor Requirements: Section 22 05 13
D. Electrical: Division 26
1.02 SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings on each piece of equipment specified herein in accordance with Specifications Section 22 05 01, General Provisions.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 SUMP PUMP
A. Refer to Plumbing Equipment Schedule on drawings for equipment characteristics.
B. Pump shall have waterproof motor with automatic thermal overload protection.
C. Bronze fitted with stainless steel shaft.
D. Integral float control.
E. Pump Power Cord: of length required, heavy duty neoprene three conductor cord
and shall have parallel bladed integrally grounded plug.
F. Pump discharge to have gate and check valve.
G. Manufacturers
1. Zoeller 2. Hydromatic
3. Approved equal
2.02 PIPING
1-1/2" thru 3": Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; screwed or Victaulic fittings; ASTM A-53 Permatex pipe joint compound; Crane 40 or teflon tape.
13027 22 14 29 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.03 SUMP BASIN
A. The sump basin shall be reinforced fiberglass designed with gas tight cover.
1. Hub inlets as required or shown on drawings.
2. Coordinate location and elevation of basin and pipe inlets with underground work.
3. Gasketed cast iron cover with vent flange and openings for discharge pipe and power aid control cord as required.
B. Manufacturers
1. Topp Industries
2. Or approved equal
PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 FACTORY TESTING
Before shipping, all component parts shall be tested for compliance with the hydraulic,
mechanical and electrical requirements of the specifications.
3.02 SUPERVISION
When so specified, supervision of the installation and initial startup and adjustment shall be provided by a field trained representative of the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
13027 22 34 00 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 22 34 00 – DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Provide water heater(s) and appurtenances as shown on the drawings and herein specified.
1.02 DESIGN BASE
A. The construction drawings indicate a system based on the information available
to Engineer by a selected manufacturer of equipment. Electrical services, size, configuration and space allocations are consistent with that manufacturer's
information.
B. This manufacturer and other listed or approved manufacturers are encouraged to provide equipment on this project; however, it shall be the Contractor and/or
Supplier's responsibility to assure the equipment is consistent with the design base. No extra compensation will be approved for revisions required by the
manufacturer for any different services, space, clearances, etc.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. General Provisions: Section 22 05 01
B. Completion and Startup: Section 22 05 03
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings for domestic water heaters specified herein in accordance with Specifications Section 22 05 01, General Provisions.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
A. Refer to Plumbing Equipment Schedule for water heater characteristics.
B. Steel tank construction with glass lining, 150 psi working pressure.
C. Extruded high density anode.
D. Foam insulated exceeding ASHRAE 90A-1980 energy requirements.
E. Screw in type direct emersion element; standard watt density (75 watts per square inch).
F. Baked enamel outer steel jacket.
G. Temperature control with overheat protection.
H. Drain and temperature pressure relief valves.
I. UL listed.
J. 3-year limited warranty.
13027 22 34 00 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
K. Characteristics: Refer to Plumbing Equipment Schedule for characteristics of
water heater.
L. Manufacturers: A.O. Smith, Bradford White, State or approved equal.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Furnish and install dielectric couplings at piped connections to heater.
B. Terminate all temperature/pressure relief valves over nearest code approved
drain.
END OF SECTION
13027 22 42 00 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 22 42 00 – PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Work includes the installation and clean up of all plumbing fixtures as shown on the drawings and herein specified.
B. All plumbing fixtures manufactured and installed under the provisions of this
section shall comply with the latest Indiana approved Plumbing Code.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General Provisions - Plumbing: Section 22 05 01
B. Complete and Startup: Section 22 05 03
1.03 GENERAL
A. All equipment, materials and components shall be new and specifically designed for the intended purpose as shown on the drawings.
B. Fixtures shall have individually trapped waste outlet and individual hot/cold water
supply shutoff or stop.
C. All exposed metal work and tubing in or around the fixtures shall be best quality brass, chromium plated. Supply pipes shall be seamless and chrome plated.
Escutcheons for pipes which pass through walls, floors or ceilings shall be chromium plated brass.
D. Furnish all plumbing fixtures complete with the necessary accessories for a
complete installation, such as supplies, shutoff valves for hot and cold water, risers, couplings, nuts, drain fittings, etc.
E. Vitreous china fixtures to be Class A and white unless color is specifically noted.
All enamelware to be acid resisting.
F. Fixtures and equipment requiring anti-siphon devices shall be constructed to eliminate possibility of siphoning waste or foreign material into water supply.
G. All fixtures except those provided with flush valves shall be provided with supply
stops.
H. Chromium plate to be in accordance with the U.S. Government standards under license from Chrome Corp. of America.
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
Provide shop drawings for all plumbing fixtures and trim in accordance with Specifications
Section 22 05 01, General Provisions. Plumbing fixture shop drawings shall contain a picture of the plumbing fixture as well as specific written information on the fixture and
accessories as specified herein.
13027 22 42 00 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
PART 2: PRODUCTS
REFER TO PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE ON DRAWINGS.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES
A. Contractor shall protect all fixtures from damage until final acceptance. Keep
fixtures completely covered and all exposed pipes, fittings and faucets wrapped to prevent injury or scratching.
B. All fixtures, trim and supplies shall be set plumb and true to wall lines and
securely held in place.
C. The trade shall install all plumbing fixtures complete with all water, waste and vent connections.
D. Upon completion of the work and before final acceptance, all plumbing fixtures
shall be thoroughly tested, inspected and found to be free from defects.
3.02 CONNECTIONS TO FIXTURES
A. Each plumbing fixture or equipment item shown or implied shall be provided with all connections required (including piping, valves, union, stops, traps, etc.)
B. All pipes shall be connected to fixtures with chrome plated brass couplings or
unions of such type that fixtures can be removed and reset without making new joints. Supply connections shall be made with ground joint unions and not with
slip joints. 7/16" O.D. flexible risers will be permitted for lavatory and sink supply connections. All supply lines shall be securely held in place.
C. All escutcheons shall be finished to match the pipe rough-ins and shall be
provided around waste and supply piping wherever piping passes through the floors, walls or ceilings, including under countertops and within vanities and
casework.
D. A supply stop, finished to match the fixture trim, shall be provided on each supply connection.
3.03 CLEANING FIXTURES
Upon completion of installation, all trade labels shall be removed and all fixtures shall be
thoroughly cleaned. The fixtures shall be cleaned and caulked to wall/floor as required a second time immediately before turning them over to the Owner.
3.04 CAULKING
Caulk plumbing fixtures to finished building surfaces (i.e.: floors, walls, etc.). Use
silicone caulking compound with mildew resistive silicone formula.
END OF SECTION
13027 23 05 01 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 23 05 01 – GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. The requirements of the General Conditions, General Requirements, Special Conditions, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Documents and other information bound herewith form a part of and shall govern all work performed under these specifications.
B. The accompanying mechanical drawings are issued as part of this project
manual. Any specification requirements shown on the drawings are equally affective as if included herein. Any omissions of specifications or on the
drawings are not to be a basis for failure on the part of the Contractor, from installing mechanical components required by the systems to operate in the
intended manner.
C. The drawings depict the systems’ components and distribution method. Every attempt is made to complete the distribution piping and ductwork, however
discrepancies may develop in the process. The contractor, within reason, is required to prepare his bid and construct the project that the result is fully
developed, complete and operable systems. (This includes obvious omitted piping and duct connections). In the event of discrepancies in duct or pipe sizes
from drawing to drawing, the contractor shall include the cost for the larger size.
D. Should any work be called for on the drawings, specifications or in the codes, in such a manner that the Contractor cannot, in his judgement, comply with the
requirements, then the Contractor shall bring the matter to the attention of the Engineer before proceeding with the work.
E. Work includes the installation of equipment, piping, ductwork and components
necessary for complete and operable systems.
F. This project includes the following systems:
1. Supply and return air distribution system(s) 2. Toilet exhaust system
3. Exhaust air system
1.02 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS USED IN THE DIVISION 23 SPECIFICATIONS AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS
A. The word "Owner" shall mean the party mentioned in the prime contract agreement, or any representative of his party duly authorized to act in his behalf in the execution of the work.
B. The word “Construction Manager” shall mean the person, firm or corporation entering into a contract with the Owner to manage construction operations.
C. The word "Contractor" shall mean the person, firm or corporation entering into a contract to construct and complete the work as described herein.
D. The word "Engineer" shall mean Circle Design Group, Inc. and their representatives assigned to this project.
13027 23 05 01 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
E. The word "Architect" shall mean Weaver Sherman Design and their representatives acting as the Owner's appointed agent.
F. The words "furnish" or “supply” shall mean to purchase and deliver to project site,
ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar subsequent requirements.
G. The word "install" shall mean operations at the project site, including unloading,
assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar requirements.
H. The word "provide” shall mean to furnish and install complete and ready for
intended use.
1.03 CODES, FEES AND MISCELLANEOUS COSTS
A. All materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable codes, specifications, local ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations.
B. In cases of difference between building codes, specifications, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations and the Contract
documents, the most stringent shall govern. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer in writing of any such differences.
C. Non-Compliance: Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply
with requirements of applicable building codes, states laws, local ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations, he shall bear all costs arising
for correction of non-complying items. D. Applicable Codes and Standards shall include all state laws, local ordinances,
utility company regulations and applicable requirements of the following
nationally accepted laws, codes and standards. These requirements are to be considered minimum and are to be exceeded when so indicated on the drawings
or herein specified.
1. Governing Agencies a. Fire Prevention and Building Safety Commission
b. Indiana Department of Health 2. Applicable Codes
a. Indiana Building Code (IBC) 2014, consisting of: (1) International Building Code, 2012
(2) Indiana Amendments b. Indiana Electrical Code (IEC), 2009, consisting of:
(1) NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, 2008 (2) Indiana Amendments
c. Indiana Safety Code for Health Care Facilities,1991, consisting of:
(1) NFPA 99 Standard for Health Care Facilities 1992 (2) Indiana Amendments
d. Indiana Mechanical Code (IMC) 2014 consisting of: (1) International Mechanical Code 2012
(2) Indiana Amendments
13027 23 05 01 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
e. Indiana Energy Conservation Code (IECC) 2010, consisting of: (1) American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air
Conditioning Engineers, Inc. Standard 90.1, 2007 Edition
(2) Indiana Amendments f. Indiana Elevator Safety Code 2011 Edition 675 IAC21
(ANSI ASME A17.1 2007 Edition) g. Indiana Fire Code (IFC), 2014, consisting of:
(1) International Fire Code, 2012 (2) Indiana Amendments
h. Indiana Rules for Boilers and Pressure Vessels and excerpts from Indiana Statue (IC22-12) governing licensing and regulation
3. Standards a. ADAAG: Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility
Guidelines b. AGA: American Gas Association
c. ANSI: American National Standards Institute d. ARI: American Refrigeration Institute
e. ASCI: American Standard Code for Information Exchange
f. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, including but not
limited to: ASRAE 55 – 2004; ASHRAE 62.1 – ` 2007; ASHRAE 90.1 – 2007, ASHRAE 189.1 –
2009 g. ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers
h. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials i. NECA: National Electrical Contractors Association
NEC: National Electric Code j. NEIS: National Electrical Installation Standards
k NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association l. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association, including
but not limited to:: NFPA 90A – Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems; NFPA 90B – Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air
Conditioning Systems; NFPA 92B – Standard for Smoke Management Systems in Malls, Atria and
Large Spaces; NFPA 101A – Life Safety Code m. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Act
n. SMACNA: Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association
o. UL: Underwriters Laboratories . E. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits, payment of all fees, necessary drawings and arranging and paying for all
inspections, tests, etc. which may be required by any governing authority or utility company in connection with the furnishing or installation of any of his work.
13027 23 05 01 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
1.04 WORK AND WORKMANSHIP
A. All materials and equipment shall be of the highest quality in every respect. All materials and equipment shall be new and of the latest design and free of
defects.
B. Workmanship shall be by skilled workmen of highest standard in strict accordance with all applicable manufacturers' printed specifications (which, by
reference, are made completely a part of these specifications as though herein repeated), performed under supervision of competent foremen at all times.
C. The Owner has full power to condemn or reject any work, materials or equipment
not in accordance with these specifications and construction drawings or not in conformance with the manufacturers' specifications or drawings which were
approved by the Owner or Engineer.
D. Work or equipment that is rejected shall be removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner, at the Contractor's expense. Work or equipment that is
rejected shall be so stated in writing by the Owner or Engineer.
E. Such decisions that the Owner or Engineer may make with respect to questions concerning the quality, fitness of materials, equipment and workmanship shall be
binding upon the parties thereto.
F. Special attention shall be given to accessibility of working parts and controlling parts. Adjustable parts shall be within easy reach. Removable parts shall have
space for removal.
1.05 DEVIATIONS FROM DRAWINGS
A. Mechanical drawings show the intended arrangement and routing of all piping, ductwork, equipment and appurtenances. They shall be followed as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will permit.
B. The Contractor shall investigate structural and finish conditions affecting his work and shall provide any fittings, offsets and accessories required to accommodate
said conditions.
C. Adjustments as a result of coordination with other trades or for reasons to improve performance, etc. may be made upon receiving the approval of the
Engineer. The Contractor shall document that the adjustment has been coordinated with all parties concerned.
1.06 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT
All work shall comply with the current requirements of the U.S. Department of Labor
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, entitled Occupational Safety and Health Standards; National Consensus Standards and Established Federal Standards.
13027 23 05 01 – PAGE 5 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
1.07 COORDINATION BETWEEN CONTRACTORS
A. The Contractor and his subcontractors shall study all drawings and specifications for this project so that complete coordination between trades will be obtained.
Special attention shall be given to points where ducts cross other ducts, piping or telephone cables, where lights fit into ceilings and where pipe, ducts and conduit
pass through walls and structural elements.
B. It is the responsibility of the contractor and his Subcontractors to leave necessary room for other trades. No extra compensation will be allowed to cover the cost of
relocating piping, conduit, ducts or equipment found encroaching on space required by other trades.
C. The Contractor shall review the electrical requirements of the final equipment
selections to ensure such items receive proper electrical services or connections.
D. The Contractor shall provide complete information and cooperation to the other Contractors and trades pertaining to his work to accomplish coordination for the
complete project.
E. The Contractor shall provide the necessary sleeved openings, excavations, etc. Cutting and patching shall be held to a minimum.
F. The Contractor and his Subcontractors shall be required to attend the periodic
progress meetings to accomplish coordination with the Owner, Architect and Engineer.
1.08 INSPECTION
At the appropriate intervals of the mechanical installation, the Contractor shall inform the
local and state authorities to arrange inspections of his work. Provide Certificates of Inspection when completed.
1.09 REPORTS AND FINAL SUBMISSIONS
A. The Contractor shall submit, for attachment to the Substantial Completion
Certificate, a letter certifying that the mechanical systems are in accordance with the Indiana Mechanical Code, as amended by the State of Indiana. B. Submit all other test reports, as hereinafter specified.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCT AND MATERIAL APPROVAL
A. When Manufacturer’s model numbers are listed they are for reference only and
are not to be considered a basis of design. The model numbers listed are the best information made available to the designer by the manufacturer and not intended to supplant or be inclusive of the criteria defined in the specifications
and drawings. The Contractor/Manufacturer shall review the complete
construction documents to assure the products proposed are appropriate and meet the system design criteria.
13027 23 05 01 – PAGE 6 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
B. The performance requirements listed in the specifications, or shown on the drawings are the basis of design and will be the benchmark used for submittal
review and approval as well as determining if work is accepted or rejected.
C. A specification followed by one or more manufacturers is limited to those manufacturers. Names of other proposed manufacturers may be submitted for
approval to the Engineer a minimum of ten (10) days prior to receiving bids. Approval will be granted only if issued by Addendum (no exceptions).
D. A specification followed by one or more manufacturers and "or approved equal"
is open to equal products or materials. However, the Contractor shall supply one of the listed manufacturers at no additional cost if Engineer determines
substituted product unsatisfactory.
E. Any substituted equipment offered for consideration shall be stated as a separate item with the bid. State any additive or deductive cost.
F. If changes in piping, ductwork, equipment, layout or electrical service are brought
about by the use of equipment which is not compatible with the layout shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall include the cost of the necessary changes in
his bid.
2.02 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY SCHEDULE
A. Submit a schedule listing equipment and materials required for complete installation, quantity ordered, date of placing order and the promised delivery dates.
B. Any and all probable delivery delays shall be identified at the pre-construction meeting.
2.03 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings, fabrication drawings, and specific
product literature for all products specified and shown on the drawings.
B. Approval of submittals does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for ordering proper quantities and miscellaneous appurtenances required for
operation and/or installation of the respective material, equipment or system.
C. The following general information is required with each submittal as applicable:
1. Contractor's stamp, signature and date shall be affixed to the submittal with indication of his review and approval.
2. The full manufacturer's model number of each item 3. Identification of each item's performance, physical size and construction
data. 4. Identification of finishes.
5. Indicate any modifications made to manufacturers' standard design which are required by these specifications.
6. Location of connection points for external piping, duct or electrical connections.
7. Rough-in, foundation and support point dimensions. 8. Complete wiring diagrams and connection identifications, specific to this
project.
13027 23 05 01 – PAGE 7 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
D. In addition submit any detailed or specific information as stated in the respective
specifications sections.
2.04 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall submit record drawings as stated in the General Conditions, and as specified herein. B. During construction, maintain a complete and legible set of drawings, at the job
site showing changes and deviations between actual construction and Engineer's drawings.
C. Submit to Engineer for review at 100% completion of the work a complete,
accurate and neat set of marked-up blueline drawings showing the complete "as built" construction.
2.05 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Contractor shall submit at job completion, three (3) maintenance manuals and (1) electronic one in pdf format to the Engineer for approval. The electronic one will be retained by the Engineer and three (3) will be forwarded to the Owner.
B. Maintenance manuals are to include all information relative to maintenance and
operating instructions for all new mechanical equipment.
C. Maintenance manuals shall be assembled in the following sections:
1. Section 1 a. Title of project
b. Name and addresses of: (1) Owner
(2) Engineer (3) Contractor
2. Section 2: Index of complete contents 3. Section 3:
a. List of all equipment with model number and serial number b. Warranty of each piece of equipment with start and completion
dates. 4. Section 4: Products
a. Include performance characteristics of each piece of equipment. b. Incorporate data sheets, operating instructions, maintenance
instructions, parts list, installation instruction and performance characteristics on each piece of equipment or system in
individually tabbed subsections. c. Label and assemble tabbed sections in numerical order by
corresponding specification section number. d. Include a copy of the final approved submittals for each piece of
equipment.
13027 23 05 01 – PAGE 8 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
D. Each section shall be separated by a pasteboard tabbed divider. Each section tab shall identify equipment by same name as listed in the index. Tabs shall
extend outside of sheet size.
E. All information shall be arranged in as many three-ring (3" D configuration) vinyl coated notebooks as necessary. Do not overload capacity of binder.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Handle equipment and components carefully to prevent damaging, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged equipment or components; replace with new.
B. Store equipment and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather,
theft, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage at all times.
END OF SECTION
13027 23 05 02 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 23 05 02 – ASSIGNMENTS OF MISCELLANEOUS WORK PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WALL OPENINGS
A. Wall openings for mechanical work not noted on the Architectural or Structural drawings shall be arranged for and provided by the Mechanical Contractor. B. Lintels for wall openings required by mechanical work will be furnished and
installed by the Contractor constructing the wall. Mechanical Contractor is responsible for notifying that Contractor of locations and sizes of openings
requiring lintels prior to wall construction. Openings not coordinated and provided shall be arranged for and provided by the Mechanical Contractor.
C. Final sizes and locations of mechanical penetrations in walls are the
responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor.
D. Provide approved fire stops for fire rated wall openings.
E. Provide acoustical seals for sound proofing in wall openings.
1.02 ROOF AND FLOOR OPENINGS
A. Roof and floor openings for mechanical work not noted on the architectural or structural drawings shall be arranged for and provided by Mechanical Contractor. Miscellaneous framing required and cutting of openings, shall be furnished and installed by the contractors constructing the roof or floor structure. Mechanical
Contractor is responsible for notifying those Contractors of exact locations and sizes prior to construction of the framing. Openings not coordinated and provided
shall be arranged and paid for by the Mechanical Contractor.
B. Final sizes and locations of mechanical penetrations through the roof and floor structures are the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor.
C. All post-tensioned slab penetrations shall be sleeved. Sleeves shall be provided
by the Mechanical Contractor and coordinated with the General Contractor.
D. Roof curbs and supports for mechanical equipment and penetrations shall be provided by the Mechanical Contractor requiring same.
E. Counterflashing shall be provided by the Mechanical Contractor. Roof flashing
shall be provided by the roofing contractor.
F. Provide fire retardant plywood sheets when roof areas are completed during construction operations for walkways and work areas. The Contractors working
on the completed new roof shall be responsible for roof protection and assuring the warranty on the roof system is maintained.
1.03 WALL AND CEILING ACCESS PANELS
A. Wall and ceiling panels shall be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor.
B. Mechanical Contractor is responsible for coordinating and assisting in locating all access panels, for installation by the General Contractor, prior to his wall or
ceiling construction, to obtain access to equipment, dampers and valves, etc.
13027 23 05 02 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
C. Access panels are required in inaccessible (non lay-in) ceilings and walls for all
valves, actuators, dampers, controls, filters, or other components requiring periodic maintenance. Panels shall be located to be accessible without causing
damage to final finishes. Coordinate items requiring access including with other trades so that the quantity of access panels is kept to a minimum.
D. The panel locations shall be also coordinated with, and receive the approval of,
the Architect and Engineer.
1.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and patching of finished areas for mechanical work shall be provided by the Mechanical Contractor. Mechanical Subcontractors shall coordinate responsibility for cutting and patching with Mechanical Contractor prior to bidding.
B. Cutting and patching of finished areas shall be provided by the Contractor requiring same, however, the work shall be performed by the trade responsible
for this type of work.
C. Patched surfaces shall be finished to match existing unless the surface is scheduled to receive new finish.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
NOT USED PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PLATFORMS AND SUPPORT STANDS
A. Platforms and supporting stands for mechanical equipment shall be provided by Mechanical Contractor.
B. Each piece of equipment or apparatus suspended from ceiling or mounted above floor level shall be provided with suitable structural support, platform or carrier
constructed in accordance with best recognized practice in a neat and workmanlike manner.
C. Contractor shall exercise extreme care that structural members of building are
not overloaded by such equipment. In all cases, details of such hangers, platforms and supports together with total weights of mounted equipment shall be
approved by Structural Engineer. 3.02 ATTACHING TO BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
A. Equipment, ductwork and piping supports shall be attached to structural members (beams, joists, etc) rather than to floor or roof slabs.
B. Where equipment is suspended from concrete or masonry construction, use expansion shields to attach supports to construction. Expansion shield bolt diameter shall be the same size as support rod diameter, hereinafter specified.
C. Where existing masonry is not suitable to receive and hold expansion shields or where other means of attachment is advantageous, Contractor shall submit
alternate method for approval of Architect and/or Engineer.
13027 23 05 02 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
D. Where supports are attached to structural members coated with fireproofing, the contractor shall clean the fireproofing, attach the support and patch the
fireproofing with like material.
3.03 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT
A. In the event that equipment furnished requires a larger starter or disconnect than that which is indicated on the documents, the Contractor supplying the larger equipment shall reimburse the Electrical Contractor supplying the larger starter or disconnect for the difference in labor and material cost.
B. Detailed diagrams and instructions shall be provided by Contractor supplying
equipment. If connections are different from those shown on the drawings, the contractor shall notify the electrical contractor prior to start of his related work.
C. Relays, switches, contactors, etc. which may be required in addition to those
specified or indicated on the electrical drawings shall be furnished by the supplying contractor for installation by the Electrical Contractor. These devices
shall be mounted by the Electrical Contractor at the apparatus to be installed and the contractor supplying these additional devices shall reimburse the Electrical
Contractor for his labor and material costs.
D. In the event that several pieces of mechanical equipment from different suppliers are combined into one system, Contractor shall furnish complete interface wiring
and control diagram to enable the Electrical Contractor to make proper connections. Diagrams shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to
actual wiring.
E. Contractor shall furnish to Electrical Contractor written notice of approval and acceptance of all control wiring which was installed by the Electrical Contractor
for his system(s). Such approval shall be given within thirty (30) days of completion of all such control wiring. The letter shall be copied to the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
13027 23 05 02 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 23 05 03 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 23 05 03 – COMPLETION AND STARTUP
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish material and labor required to perform startup of equipment and systems installed and modified in this project and provide operating and maintenance
instructions to the Owner. Coordinate, schedule and perform this work with the Engineer.
B. Furnish labor and material required to inspect the installed piping and duct
systems and correct deficiencies as specified herein.
C. Furnish labor and equipment required to maintain clean work areas throughout the project and to perform final cleanup.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General Provisions: Section 23 05 01
B. Assignment of Miscellaneous Work: Section 23 05 02
PART 2: PRODUCTS NOT USED
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS
A. Adhere strictly to the following procedures in completing mechanical systems. 1. Adjust tension in V-belt drives, adjust vari-pitch sheaves and drives for
proper equipment speed. Remove any foreign materials from sheaves or belts before starting operations, adjust drives for alignment of sheaves
and V-belts. 2. Adjust direct drives for proper alignment of flexible couplings, provide
lubrication of particular couplings so required, check security of couplings to driver and driven shafts, set drive components to assure free rotation
with no undesirable stresses present on coupling or attached equipment. 3. Inspect bearings for cleanliness and alignment and remove any foreign
materials found. Grease as necessary and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Replace bearings that run rough or
noisy. 4. Inspect screwed joints for leakage and remake each joint that appears to
be faulty. Do not wait for rust to form. Clean threads on both parts, apply compound and remake joint.
5. Adjust pipe hangers and supports for correct pitch and alignment. 6. Remove rust, scale and foreign materials from equipment and renew any
defaced surfaces. If equipment is badly marred, Engineer shall have authority to request that new materials be provided.
7. After completion of equipment test, replace air filters in all units. 8. Repair pipe and duct insulation or duct liner that may have been damaged
during construction period.
13027 23 05 03 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
B. Complete all applicable startup procedures described in preceding paragraphs and in the associated articles for particular systems prior to occupancy of spaces
served.
C. Provide such continuing adjustment services as necessary to insure proper functioning of all mechanical systems after building occupancy and during
warranty period.
3.02 STARTUP
A. A pre-startup construction meeting shall be scheduled by the Mechanical Contractor for the specific purpose of achieving a coordinated systems startup with
the Engineer and Owner.
B. The Engineer, Owner, Mechanical Contractor, Sheetmetal Contractor and Electrical Contractor shall be present at the pre-startup meeting and at the initial
startup of each mechanical.
C. The Mechanical Contractor shall bear prime responsibility for startup of all mechanical systems.
D. Perform a startup of each system installed in this project in strict accordance with
manufacturer's printed procedure.
E. Check for proper rotation of all fans.
F. Check for proper electrical services and usage during the startup procedure.
G. Perform operational tests on all equipment.
H. All involved contractors shall submit to the decision of the Owner/Engineer of any conflict of responsibility.
3.03 TEMPORARY USE OF NEW EQUIPMENT
A. The permanent heating and cooling systems shall not be utilized as the temporary
tempering source for constructing the building, prior to full enclosure.
B. When it becomes necessary to operate any equipment during the construction period for system checkouts, or maintaining reasonable temperatures or humidity
levels for finishes, the Contractor will be required to do so, but only after proper adjustments, trial operation and Owner or Engineer's approval in writing.
1. When this occurs, the contractor shall prepare a written procedure for the
temporary operation to the Owner/Engineer for acceptance. The procedure shall address the following issues:
a. All ductwork openings shall be protected with filter media to prevent dust, dirt, and debris from entering. The media shall be
maintained and replaced periodically to obtain protection.
13027 23 05 03 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
b. All equipment intended to run shall be protected for operation with all safeties intact and operational.
C. The warranty on the equipment will not begin until the date of Owner's final
acceptance at the completion of the project.
D. Should the Owner elect to receive beneficial operation of the equipment prior to final acceptance, he may do so. The warranty period may begin then upon the
Contractor receiving written approval from the Owner accepting the equipment with conditions of any incomplete portions of the work.
3.04 TOUCH-UP
A. All mechanical equipment, cabinets, control panels and other enclosures shall be
cleaned and paint touched up as necessary to duplicate factory finished appearance. Touch-up paint shall exactly match color, composition and quality of
factory applied finish.
B. Equipment furnished with factory applied finish shall be protected from injury by the installing contractor. Any damaged surface shall be repaired by the installing
contractor to match original finish or shall be replaced before final acceptance.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Maintain a clean project site throughout the construction period. Provide personnel to regularly remove debris and unused materials. Coordinate this cleaning effort
with your subcontractors.
B. Remove all debris and unused materials from job site created by mechanical work.
C. Clean all mechanical equipment to a "like new" condition prior to systems startup and in preparation of final inspection. Vacuum clean all internal components.
D. Clean all mechanical rooms and/or areas of debris and unused material. Vacuum
clean mechanical room floors.
E. Clean the exterior surfaces of all ductwork and piping systems. Vacuum clean if appropriate. Damp/wet clean with soap (chemical if necessary) and water where
required or directed by Owner/Engineer.
END OF SECTION
13027 23 05 03 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 23 05 13 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 23 05 13 – COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide open drip-proof or totally enclosed fan cooled motors for mechanical equipment of the type and efficiency as specified herein. B. This section is applicable to motors on packaged heating and cooling units.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
All motors shall be designed, selected and applied in accordance with the latest applicable standards of NEMA, IEEE, ANSI, and the current edition of the National Electric Code.
1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 23 05 01 B. Packaged Heating and Cooling Units: Section 23 81 00
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 SINGLE PHASE MOTORS (THRU 1.0 HP)
Single Phase Motors shall be the highest energy efficiency available, permanent split-capacitor where possible or as approved. Provide capacitor start or two-capacitor
type motor for high torque applications. Provide automatic resetting in-built thermal protection unless otherwise specified.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 MOTOR SIZING
Motors shall be rated for 1.15 service factor, but shall be selected for operation within
their full load rating without applying the service factor.
END OF SECTION
13027 23 05 13 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE IS LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 23 05 29 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 23 05 29 – BASIC PIPING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Pipe Hangers and Supports
B. Sleeves and Plates
C. Installation of Piping Systems
D. Fire Stop Sealants
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 23 05 01
B. Refrigeration Piping System: Section 23 23 00
1.03 GENERAL PIPE SYSTEM INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Fabricate and install all pressure piping systems in accordance with the procedures established in the ANSI B31 Code. Materials and fittings shall be as
defined by the applicable standards of ANSI, ASHRAE, or ASME
B. Install all piping to present a neat and orderly appearance. Run all lines parallel with building walls and construction. Keep piping free from contact with
structure or equipment to prevent noise transmission, allowing clearance for expansion and contraction. Offset piping, in approved manner, where required
to avoid interference with other work, to increase headroom under piping or to improve appearance of the work.
C. Provide ample space between piping and construction for proper insulation
covering thickness.
D. Pipes passing through exposed construction shall be provided with escutcheons or other seals as described herein. Exposed escutcheons in finished areas shall
have a chrome finish.
E. Penetrations of fire rated walls, floors, roofs and ceilings are to be made with rated fire stops equal/exceeding the fire rating of the building separation being
penetrated.
1.04 PIPING SYSTEMS WARRANTY
A. Maintain integrity of all piping systems through warranty period, repairing all leaks.
B. Warranty work shall include repair/replacement of building materials and finishes
damaged by leak(s).
C. All damage resulting from leaking pipes shall be paid for by the installing contractor.
13027 23 05 29 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
1.05 CLEARANCE FROM ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Piping is prohibited in electric and telephone rooms and closets, elevator machine rooms, and for installations over or within 5ft. or transformers,
substations, switchboards, motor control centers, standby power plants, and motors.
B. Branch piping to equipment is acceptable when installed over or within 5ft. of
motors.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING SYSTEM MATERIALS
All pipe hangers and supports shall conform to the latest requirements of ANSI Code for
Pressure Piping B 31.1
2.02 PIPE HANGERS (UNINSULATED PIPE)
A. Hangers 2" and smaller : copper plated adjustable split ring
1. Grinnell Fig. CT-109 2. Elcen Fig. 310A
3. PHD Fig. 502
B Riser clamps: copper pipe
1. Grinnell Fig. CT-121 2. Elcen Fig. 339
3. PHD Fig. 552
C. Floor supports: copper pipe, 2" and smaller: U-bolt on structural steel channel secured to floor with angle clips
1. Grinnell Fig. 120
2. Elcen Fig. 368
D. Rods: galvanized steel, all threaded hanger rods; threaded both ends
PIPE SIZE ROD DIAMETER
2" and smaller 3/8"
2.03 PIPE HANGERS (INSULATED PIPE)
Provide hanger and support materials as specified for uninsulated pipe but with the following exceptions:
A. Size hanger ring to fit outside insulation
B. Copper plated rings are not required
13027 23 05 29 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.04 SLEEVES AND PLATES (ESCUTCHEONS)
A. Schedule of Sleeve Usage:
1. All sleeves through wall board, drywall, plasterboard or wall panels shall
be 20 gauge galvanized steel. 2. All sleeves through masonry walls, metal roof deck, concrete floors on
grade shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.
B. Special sleeves and sealing as shown on drawings.
C. Plates and escutcheons shall be chromium plated for finished areas and painted steel elsewhere.
2.05 FIRE STOP SEALANTS
A. Penetration Sealants
1. Dow Corning "Firestop Foam" and "Firestop Sealant"
2. Insta-Foam Products, Inc. "Insta-Foam Seal Silicone RTV Foam" 3. 3M Brand "Fire Barrier" Caulk
4. 3M Brand Moldable Putty "Pads" and Moldable Putty "Stix"
B. Intumescent sealants for use in openings and sleeves involving plastic pipe or insulated pipe:
1. Dow Corning "Firestop Intumescent Wrap Strip"
2. Fox Coupling, Inc. "Cast-In-Place Firestop Coupling" 3. 3M Brand "Fire Barrier" Caulk with FS-195 wrap strip and CS-195
composite sheet
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General
1. Furnish and install supports required for proper installation and support
of pipe lines. 2. Pipe suspensions shall prevent excessive stress and excessive variation
in supporting force. Fabrication and installation of supports for pipe lines shall not constrain piping to cause excessive transfer of load from
supports to piping or from support to support when expansion or contraction occurs. Supports shall be capable of taking entire piping
load imposed by expansion or contraction.
13027 23 05 29 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
B. Pipe Hanger and Supports
1. Piping may be suspended by individual pipe hangers or where two or
more pipes are paralleling each other at same elevation. Construct of structural steel angles or channels with rods of sufficient strength to
support weight and of design satisfactory to the Owner. Under no circumstances shall piping be supported from other piping.
2. Where smaller piping must be suspended closer to overhead construction than is possible with single rod hangers, use double rod
supports. 3. Spacing
a. Spacing of hangers or supports for copper pipe as scheduled below.
PIPE SIZE MAXIMUM SPACING
(1) thru 3/4" 5'-0"
(2) 1" and 1-1/4" 7'-0" (3) 1-1/2" to 3" 9'-0"
b. Other risers shall be supported at lowest floor through which they
pass. Pipe 2" and smaller in size shall be guided at every floor.
3.02 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Furnish, locate and set pipe sleeves where piping passes through floors, walls
and other concrete or masonry structural materials except where tunnels, chases or shafts are provided in the construction.
B. Wall Sleeves
1. Below Grade:
a. Sleeves set in walls below finished grade, in which one side is
open to a space within the building, shall be provided with a water stop/collar which will seal against the passage of water
between the sleeve and concrete. Sleeve shall be sized to finish flush with face of wall. Manufacturer" 'Century Line
Sleeves' or approved equal. b. Sleeves shall be installed where pipes pass under or through
footings, grade beams or other structural bearing walls existing or new.
2. Above Grade: Sleeves set in walls above grade shall be sized to finish flush with face of walls and shall be constructed of material which is
equal to or greater than the fire rating of the wall.
13027 23 05 29 – PAGE 5 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
C. Floor Sleeves: Floor sleeves shall extend 1-1/2" above finished floor in chases
and mechanical spaces. Sleeve shall extend to 3" above finished floors in areas such as kitchens, food preparation, dishwashing and laboratory areas. Sleeves
shall be flush with finish floor in occupied spaces.
D. Sleeves shall be in accordance with the following schedule unless otherwise specified.
SLEEVE SCHEDULE
PIPE SIZE UNINSUL. 1" INSUL. 1-1/2" INSUL. 2" INSUL.
1" 2" 4" 6" 6" 1-1/2" 3" 4" 6" 8"
2" 3" 6" 8" 8"
E. The void between the sleeve and wall, and the pipe or insulation jacket shall be neatly filled with an approved fire stop material.
3.03 APPLICATION OF FIRE STOP SEALANTS
A. Prepare and apply preparation sealing system in accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Employ installation techniques which will ensure that firestopping is deposited to fill and seal holes and openings.
1. Provide flame (F) rating minimum one-hour, but not less than fire
resistance rating of the assembly in which it is installed, per ASTM E-814.
2. Ensure effective smoke seal.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of applied sealant smooth.
END OF SECTION
13027 23 05 29 – PAGE 6 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 23 05 30 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 23 05 30 – PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install prefabricated roof curbs for mechanical equipment and pipe supports as specified herein and as detailed on the drawings.
B. Roof curbs for specific roof type mechanical equipment requiring openings shall
be furnished by the manufacturer of that equipment selected to its respective size and requirements.
C. Furnish and install equipment support for piping and duct systems and
mechanical equipment as specified herein and detailed on the drawings.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 23 05 01
B. Assignment of Misc. Work: Section 23 05 02
C. Basic Piping Requirements: Section 23 05 29
D. Refrigerant Piping System: Section 23 23 00
E. HVAC Ducts and Casings: Section 23 31 00
F. Packaged Heating and Cooling Equipment: Section 23 81 00
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings for each roof curb, equipment and pipe support to be furnished on this project in accordance with Specification Section 23 05 01, General Provisions.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 ROOF CURBS
A. Provide roof curbs for all roof penetrating equipment listed as follows: 1. Exhaust fans
2. Duct penetrations 3. Pipe penetrations
B. Curbs shall be prefabricated 18 gauge or heavier galvanized steel with factory
installed, pressure treated wood nailer.
C. Curbs shall be a minimum of 12" in height above the finished roof surface. Total curb height shall include depth of roof insulation.
D. Curbs for sloping roofs shall be installed to obtain a level top.
E. Curbs shall be insulated with 1-1/2" thick, 3 pound density, rigid insulation.
13027 23 05 30 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
F. Manufacturer:
1. Wherever possible, curbs shall be furnished by the same manufacturer as the equipment it supports, i.e. exhaust fans, relief units, etc.
2. Equipment manufacturer supplied curbs and any additional curbs shall be Thycurb Model TC-3, Pate, Curb Plus Inc., or equal.
2.02 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Provide equipment supports for roof mounted equipment, ductwork and piping
where shown on the drawings.
B. Supports shall be prefabricated 18 gauge or heavier galvanized steel with factory installed, continuous pressure treated 2"x6" wood nailer. The supports shall
incorporate internal bulkheads welded into position at intervals along the support length.
C. Supports shall be minimum height to obtain 12" in height above the roof surface.
Total curb heights shall include the depth of insulation.
D. Provide, where required, support construction to accommodate roof deck pitch. The support top shall be maintained true level.
E. Provide removable counterflashing.
F. Manufacturers: Thycurb Model TEMS-3, Curb Plus, Inc. or approved equal
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 ROOF CURBS AND SUPPORTS
A. Curbs and supports shall be installed on the structural deck, not on insulation or roofing.
B. All curbs or pedestals provided for buildings with any roof pitch must be leveled.
Prefabricated pitch built into curbs shall be provided.
END OF SECTION
13027 23 05 48 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 23 05 48 – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide vibration isolation systems, complete, as specified herein and shown on the drawings.
B. Provide seismic supports as specified herein.
C. The work of this section includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Vibration isolators for ductwork.
2. Equipment vibration isolators for: a. Fan coil units
b. Fans c. Air cooled condensing units
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 23 05 01
B. HVAC Ducts and Casings: Section 23 31 00
C. HVAC Fans: Section 23 34 00
D. Packaged Heating and Cooling Equipment: Section 23 81 00
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the vibration isolator’s data for approval, clearly identifying each item of
equipment supported and the isolation to be installed at each point of support.
1.04 MANUFACTURER RESPONSIBILITIES
Manufacturer of vibration isolation equipment shall have the following responsibilities:
A. Determine vibration isolation sizes and locations
B. Provide equipment isolation systems as scheduled or specified.
C. Guarantee specified isolation system deflection.
D. Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to assure proper installation and performance.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
It is the objective of this specification to require the necessary design for the control of
excessive noise and vibration in the buildings due to the operation of machinery or equipment and/or due to interconnected piping, ductwork or conduit. The installation of
all vibration isolation units and associated hangers and bases shall be under the direct supervision of the vibration isolation manufacturer's representative.
13027 23 05 48 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Submit to compliance with requirements specified herein, provide vibration
isolation materials, bases and systems by one of the following or approved equal.
1. Kinetics Noise Control, Incorporated 6300 Irelan Place, P.O. Box 655
Dublin, Ohio 43017 (614) 889-0480
2. Mason Industries, Incorporated
350 Rabro Drive Hauppauge, New York 11788
(516)348-0282
3. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 113 Main Street
Bloomington, NJ 07403 (201) 838-1780
4. Keflex
221 S. Main St Barlett, IL 60103
(630)837-2581/2686(f)
5. Vibro-Acoustics Tel 416-291-7371 Fax 416-291-8049
info@vibro-acoustics.com
6. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. Tel 631-841-4000 Fax 631-841-0020
B. Where listed, references are to Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. (K.N.C.), Mason
Industries, Inc. (M.I.I.), and Vibration Mountings and Controls , Inc. (V.M.C.I.).
C. Where exposed to outdoors or corrosive elements: provide corrosion protection.
2.02 VIBRATION ISOLATOR GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All vibration isolators shall have either known undeflected heights or other markings so that after adjustment, when carrying their load, the deflection under
load can be verified, thus determining that the load is within the proper range of the device and that the correct degree of vibration isolation is being provided
according to the design.
B. All isolators shall operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve. Load versus deflection curves shall be furnished by the manufacturer and
shall be linear over a deflection range of 50% above the design deflection.
C. The ratio of lateral to vertical stiffness shall not be less than 1.0 or greater than 2.0.
13027 23 05 48 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.03 ELASTOMER MOUNTINGS
A. General: all elastomer isolators shall incorporate the following:
1. Bolt holes for bolting to equipment base. 2. Bottom steel plates for bolting to sub-base as required.
3. Unit type design molded in black oil-resistant neoprene. 4. All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered.
5. Neoprene to be compounded to meet the following: a. Not greater than 50 durometer
b. Maximum tensile strength 2000 psi c. Minimum elongation 300%
d. Maximum compression set at 25% of the original deflection.
B. Type ‘F’ Pad type neoprene mountings
1. 5/16 inch minimum thickness 2. 50 psi maximum loading
3. Ribbed or waffled design 4. 1/16 inch deflection per pad thickness.
5. 1/16 inch galvanized steel plate between multiple layers of pad thickness.
6. Suitable bearing plate to distribute load. 7. Manufacturers:
a. M.I.I - Type W
b. V.M.C.I. - Type Shearflex c. K.N.C - Type NP
2.04 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Type “FC-3": Flexible duct connections to fans
1. 30 ounce woven glass fiber coated with neoprene, sewn together at the edges and joints.
2. 6" long and held in place with 1" wide bands of 12 gauge galvanized steel bolted to duct and to outlets and inlets of the units and fans with
1/8"stove bolts, 5" o.c. Metal connections 3" wide on either side of the flexible material, as provided by the manufacturer, may also be used.
3. Manufacturers:
a. Ventglass, manufactured by Ventfabrics, Inc., Chicago, IL
312-775-4477
b. Insulflex, manufactured by DuroDyne, Farmingdale, NY
516-249-9000
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
Examine all work prepared by the appropriate trades to receive work of this section and report problems or defects affecting installation to the General Contractor/Construction
Manager for correction.
13027 23 05 48 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install vibration isolation devices and systems in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
B. General Equipment Isolation
1. Isolation mounting deflection (minimum) as specified or scheduled on manufacturer’s certified drawings.
2. Temperature Control and electrical conduit connections to isolated equipment shall be looped or installed with flexible conduit to allow free
motion of isolated equipment.
3. Install equipment directly on isolation system. Support rails between the
equipment and isolators should not be used.
4. Verify all installed isolators and mounting systems permit equipment
motion.
5. No rigid connections between rotating or vibrating equipment and
building structure shall be made that degrades the vibration isolation system herein specified.
6. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the “building”. Inform other trades following, such as plastering, drywall,
electrical or sheet metal, to avoid any contact which would reduce the vibration isolation.
7. Bring to the Engineer’s attention immediately, prior to installation, any conflicts with other trades which will result in unavoidable rigid contact
with equipment or piping as described herein, due to inadequate space or other unforseen conditions. Corrective work necessitated by conflicts
after installation shall be at the contractor’s expenses. 8. Correct, at no additional costs, all installations which are deemed
defective in workmanship or material as a result of project completion inspection or subsequent inspections due to Owner complaints within a
period of one year following the project completion date.
3.03 VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE
EQUIPMENT TYPE ISOLATOR TYPE MINIMUM STATIC
DEFLECTION INCHES
A. Fan Coil Units F, FC-3 (H) 2.00"
B. Roof mounted air cooled F 1.00”
Condensing units
END OF SECTION
13027 23 05 53 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 23 05 53 – IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Label all mechanical equipment furnished and/or installed in this project. B. Label all electrical equipment furnished by the Mechanical Contractor.
1.02 RELATED WORK
General Provisions: Section 23 05 01 1.03 SUBMITTALS
In accordance with Specifications Section 23 05 01, General Provisions, submit manufacturer's data on labels. Include a listing of labels ordered with name of equipment.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Labels shall be engraved, laminated plastic plates. Height of letters shall be as scheduled herein. B. Letters shall be black; plates shall be white.
C. Manufacturers
1. Seton Nameplate Corporation
2. Brady 3. Or approved equal
2.02 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Labels shall be engraved, laminated plastic plates. Height of letters shall be as scheduled herein.
B. Letters shall be black; plates shall be white
C. Manufacturers
1. Seton Nameplate Corporation 2. Brady
3. Or approved equal
13027 23 05 53 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Schedule of Mechanical Equipment Labels (List is not necessarily inclusive of all
equipment on this project to be labeled). Equipment Example Letter
Wording Height
Ductless split system SS-1 1”
Air Cooled Condensing Units ACCU-1 1" Fan Coil Units FCU-1 1” B. Labels shall be secured to the equipment in a readily apparent location with a
minimum of four (4) screws for 1" size labels and two (2) screws for ½" and smaller. (Glue shall not be used.) Drill holes for screw openings. Cracked
labels shall be replaced.
C. Equipment which is not suitable to receive the above fastening method shall be labeled on an adjacent wall, chain hung from the ceiling, or on a readily sighted
disconnect switch, at the direction of the Designer.
3.02 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Items to be labeled include:
1. Motor starters: ½" high 2. Remote pushbutton stations: 1/8" high
3. Motors which cannot be readily identified by their starter label when observer is standing by the motor: ½" high
B. 1" and ½" letter size labels shall be secured to the devices with appropriately
sized screws or rivets. (Glue shall not be used.) Screw holes shall be drilled. Cracked labels shall be replaced.
C. 1/4" and 1/8" letter size labels shall be glued to the device.
END OF SECTION
13027 23 07 13 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 23 07 13 – DUCT INSULATION PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Work shall include all labor, equipment, accessories, materials and services required to furnish and install all insulation, fittings and finishes for ducts and related mechanical equipment in the heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems.
B. Duct insulation shall be provided for the following systems.
1. Conditioned air supply duct 2. Outside air ducts and plenums 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 23 05 01
B. HVAC Ducts and Casings: Section 23 31 00 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Insulation shall be installed by skilled workmen regularly engaged in this type of work.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product brochures in accordance with Specifications Section 23 05 01,
General Provisions.
B. Submit shop drawings which indicate complete material data, a list of materials proposed for this project and thickness of material for individual services.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Deliver material to job site in original non broken factory packaging, labeled with
manufacturer's density and thickness. B. Perform work at ambient and equipment temperatures as recommended by the
adhesive manufacturer. Repair insulation separated at joints or cracked due to
thermal movement or poor workmanship.
1.06 SCHEDULING A. Work shall be scheduled by the Mechanical Contractor.
B. Maintain communication with General Contractor throughout construction period to assure coordination of the insulation installation with the progress of the duct systems.
13027 23 07 13 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
1.07 DEFINITION OF TERMS
A. Concealed: shall mean hidden from sight and/or access such as in trenches, chases, furred spaces, pipe shafts, or above suspended ceilings.
B. Exposed: shall mean that duct or equipment is not "concealed" as defined
above. Ductwork and equipment in mechanical equipment rooms, storage areas or unfinished rooms are to be considered as "exposed".
C. Accessible: shall mean above suspended lay-in type ceilings.
D. Inaccessible: shall mean above suspended ceilings not readily accessed from
most areas.
E. Conditioned Air: shall mean ducted air that has been filtered, cooled or heated in secondary air ductwork or constant airflow air handling units.
F. Primary Air: supply air from the discharge of Air Handling Units to the upstream
inlet of a terminal unit.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
Duct insulation coverings and adhesives used shall have a flame spread rating not exceeding twenty five (25) and a smoke developed rating not exceeding fifty (50).
2.02 INSULATING MATERIALS - DUCTWORK
A. Flexible Blanket: 3/4# density, lightweight, highly resilient, blanket-type thermal and acoustical insulation designed for use to 250°F faced with reinforced foil and paper FSK (foil-skrim-kraft).
B. Adhesives: adhesives or mastics used in manufacturer of insulating materials or in application of same shall be fire retardant.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS JACKET MATERIALS
A. Flame Resistant: 2 layer laminate of flame resistant creped kraft laminated to
.0007 aluminum foil.
B. Reinforced foil and paper: FSK (foil-skrim-kraft) aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn mesh and laminated to 40# chemically treated, fire resistant kraft. UL rated.
2.04 ACCEPTABLE INSULATION MANUFACTURERS A. Owens-Corning
B. Johns-Manville
C. Armstrong D. Knauf
13027 23 07 13 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.05 ACCEPTABLE INSULATION SUNDRIES/ADHESIVES MANUFACTURERS
A. Benjamin Foster
B. Childers
C. Vimasco
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 SCHEDULE OF DUCT INSULATION A. Service 1. All concealed conditioned air supply: Type (1)
2. All exposed primary air conditioning supply in conditioned spaces: Type (1)
3. All exposed conditioned air supply in Mechanical Rooms and unconditioned spaces: Type (1)
4. All exposed outside air in equipment rooms/areas: Type (1)
Type 1 Insulation 3 /4 # flexible
Fiberglass Jacket FSK
Insulation thickness For all duct sizes 1-1/2”
B. Do not externally insulate air conditioning supply duct exposed within
conditioned space serving that respective space.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Apply insulation only after ductwork has been tested and cleaned. B. Protect furniture, equipment, ducts, pipes, etc. with tarpaulins. Keep premises
clean.
C. Insure surface is clean and dry prior to installation. Insure insulation is dry
before and during application. 3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Application of insulation materials to duct shall be performed in accordance with manufacturers' written recommendations. Where thickness of insulation is not specified, use applicable thickness recommended by manufacturer for specific
use. B. Provide removable sections of insulation at access points for servicing of the
equipment or duct accessories.
13027 23 07 13 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
C. All insulation shall be continuous through wall and ceiling openings and sleeves. All covered ductwork is to be located a sufficient distance from walls, pipes,
ductwork and other obstacles to permit the application of the full thickness of insulation specified. (If necessary, extra fittings are to be used).
D. Vapor barrier jackets shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken vapor seal.
3.04 APPLICATION FOR DUCT INSULATION
A. Insulate ducts by wrapping the duct and securing the ends and sides with an
overlap and staples no greater than 4" spacing. Tape joints.
B. Install full perimeter band of .02 gauge aluminum (allow insulation thickness, do not compress insulation). Bands to be installed no greater than 24" spacing.
END OF SECTION
13027 23 07 19 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 23 07 19 – HVAC PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Work shall include all labor, equipment, accessories, materials and services required to
furnish and install all insulation, fittings and finishes for the refrigeration piping system. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 23 05 01
B. Assignment of Misc. Work: Section 23 05 02
C. Basic Piping Requirements: Section 23 05 29
D. Refrigerant Piping System: Section 23 23 00 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Insulation shall be installed by skilled workmen regularly engaged in this type of work.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Specification Sections 23 05 01, HVAC General Provisions.
B. Submit shop drawings which indicate complete material data, a list of materials proposed for this project and thickness of material for individual services.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Deliver material to job site in original non-broken factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's density and thickness.
B. Perform work at ambient and equipment temperatures as recommended by the
adhesive manufacturer. Repair separation of joints or cracking of insulation due to thermal movement or poor workmanship.
1.06 SCHEDULING
A. Work shall be scheduled by the Mechanical Contractor. B. Maintain communication with General Contractor throughout construction period
to assure coordination of the insulation installation with the progress of the piping systems.
1.07 DEFINITION OF TERMS
A. Concealed: shall mean hidden from sight and/or access such as in trenches, chases, furred spaces, pipe shafts, or above suspended ceilings.
B. Exposed: shall mean that piping or equipment is not "concealed" as defined above. Piping and equipment in service tunnels, mechanical equipment rooms,
storage areas or unfinished rooms are to be considered as "exposed".
13027 23 07 19 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
C. Accessible: shall mean above suspended lay-in type ceilings.
D. Inaccessible: shall mean above suspended ceilings not readily accessed from most areas.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All pipe insulation and coverings on pipe shall have a flame spread rating not exceeding twenty five (25) and a smoke developed rating not exceeding fifty (50).
B. Pipe insulation coverings and adhesives on pipes used in chases, shafts or other concealed spaces shall have a flame spread rating not exceeding twenty five (25)
and a smoke developed rating not exceeding one hundred fifty (150). C. Pipe insulation and coverings on pipe used in plenums and shafts serving as
supply or return air ducts or exposed in finished areas shall have a flame spread rating not exceeding twenty five (25) and a smoke developed rating not
exceeding fifty (50). 2.02 INSULATING MATERIALS: PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Elastomeric foam: a closed cellular material, odorless, self-extinguishing, UL approved,
maximum water vapor transmission of 0.20 perms; "K" value at 75°F, maximum 0.27 btu
inch/sq.ft./°F/hour. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS JACKET MATERIALS
A. Aluminum jacket: embossed aluminum with factory attached 30-9-30 duplex waterproof asphalt laminated paper as manufactured by Childers (0.010" thickness); Childers Ell-Jacs for fittings.
2.04 ACCEPTABLE INSULATION MANUFACTURERS A. Owens-Corning B. Johns-Manville
C. Armstrong
D. Knauf
2.05 ACCEPTABLE INSULATION SUNDRIES/ADHESIVES MANUFACTURERS A. Benjamin Foster B. Childers
C. Vimasco
13027 23 07 19 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Apply insulation only after piping and equipment have been tested and cleaned.
B. Protect furniture, equipment, ducts, pipes, etc. with tarpaulins. Keep premises clean.
C. Insure surface is clean and dry prior to installation. Insure insulation is dry before and during application. Finish with systems at operating condition.
3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Application of insulation materials to piping shall be done in accordance with manufacturers' written recommendations. Where thickness of insulation is not
specified, use applicable thickness recommended by manufacturer for specific use.
B. Provide removable sections of insulation or insulation boxes at all points where access is required for servicing of the equipment.
C. All insulation shall be continuous through wall and ceiling openings and sleeves. All covered pipe is to be located a sufficient distance from walls, other pipe, ductwork and other obstacles to permit the application of the full thickness of insulation specified. (If necessary, extra fittings and pipe are to be used.)
D. Vapor barrier jackets shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken vapor seal.
E. Pipe hangers shall be sized large enough to be installed over the outer surface of the insulation. Load distributing corrosion resistant #14 USG metal shields shall
be installed around the lower one-third circumference of the insulation. Shields shall be 12 gauge for smaller sizes. Length of the shield shall be 12" and up.
Secure shields to pipe insulation with adhesive. 3.03 APPLICATION OF PIPE INSULATION
A. All pipe insulation shall be installed with joints butted firmly together.
B. Seal all punctures in vapor barrier jacket with vapor barrier adhesive on cold piping.
C. Jackets on pipe insulation shall be vapor sealed using self-sealing lap, lap-seal tape gun or adhesive such as 520.
3.04 APPLICATION OF PROTECTIVE JACKETS
Apply minimum 0.016 thick aluminum metal rated jackets on all piping, as follows:
A. All insulated pipe installed outdoors.
B. All exposed vertical and horizontal piping below 6'-0" AFF in mechanical rooms or occupied non-finished rooms, such as storage, work rooms, etc. This includes elbows and fittings. Not included are valves or strainers.
C. The metal jacket shall be retained with rivets or other suitable method that does
not puncture the insulation.
13027 23 07 19 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
3.05 COOLING SERVICE - PIPE INSULATION
A. Service for refrigerant piping; all locations
1. All suction piping: Type 1 2. All hot gas piping: Type 1
B. Materials Type (1)
1. Insulation Elastomeric foam
2. Jacket Not required 3. Insulation thickness for
pipe:
Thru 2-1/2" 1" C. Special conditions
1. All insulated refrigerant lines exposed outdoors shall be covered with an
aluminum jacket. 2. All piping includes all ancillary piping, stubs, etc. subject to condensation.
END OF SECTION
13027 23 23 00 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 23 23 00 – REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish and install a complete refrigerant piping system(s) where shown on the drawings
and herein specified. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 23 05 01
B. Basic Piping Requirements: Section 23 05 29
C. Packaged Heating and Cooling Units: Section 23 81 00
1.03 COORDINATION Provide coordination with all other trades in the routing of piping prior to installation. No
extra compensation for piping offsets of routing changes will be allowed due to lack of coordination.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM A. Service: Refrigerant R410.
B. Maximum design: pressure 350 psig; temperature 200°F
C. Piping (above ground): Type L, hard drawn, seamless copper, cleaned, dehydrated and sealed
D. Joints
1. 1/4" thru 3/8" O.D.: flared 2. 1/2" O.D. and larger: silver brazed; Handy-Harmon SIL-FOS; J.W.
Harris Stay-Silv 15 E. Fittings
1. 1/4" thru 3/8": 45° flared, Full-Flo Refrigeration 2. 1/2" and larger: wrought copper
F. Flanges (7/8" and larger): flange unions, forged steel flanges, brass tailpieces,
Henry Products G. Gaskets: 1/16" neoprene bonded sheet packing, Johns-Manville, Chicago
Wilcox
H. Nuts and bolts: machine bolts with hex nuts
13027 23 23 00 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
I. Shutoff Valves
1. Globe (1/4" thru 5/8") a. Bronze body and trim, diaphragm packless type, screwed bonnet, metal diaphragm, composition seat disc, globe or angle
pattern, solder b. Manufacturers: 500# Henry 626 or 647; 500# Mueller
Linemaster LMS-1-2 2. Globe (7/8" and larger) a. Bronze body and trim, threaded or bolted bonnet, packing gland,
composition seat disc, with wing cap seal, solder, globe or angle pattern
b. Manufacturers: 450# Henry 203 04 216; 500# Mueller Globemaster VS or VGA 3. Ball (1/2" and larger)
a. Bronze body and chromeplated ball, teflon seats and seals, wrench operated, cap cover, soldered
b. Manufacturers: 500# Apollo 79-200 4. Service - charging and purging (1/4" through 5/8") a. Bronze body and trim, diaphragm, packless type, screwed
bonnet, metal diaphragm, seal cap and chain for flared charging connection, solder, globe or angle pattern
b. Manufacturers: 500# Henry 623 or 643; 500# Mueller III
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 REFRIGERANT PIPING TESTING A. Any holding charge in the compressor used for shipping shall be purged.
B. Perform an initial test on the refrigerant system, in accordance with packaged
heating and cooling equipment manufacturers instructions. 3.02 REFRIGERANT PIPING INSTALLATION
Piping system shall be installed as specified in Specifications Section 23 05 29, Basic
Piping Requirements. 3.03 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Perform a preliminary check before charging the system.
1. Check fan coil units for design air flow conditions prior to refrigeration system startup.
2. Compressors shall be checked for proper lubrication, voltage and control sequences prior to startup.
B. Charge the system completely and test the system through its steps of unloading. Check the system frequently to assure a proper refrigerant charge.
C. Perform all system testing and startup in the presence of the Owner's Engineer
and maintenance personnel.
13027 23 23 00 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
D. When all checks have been completed, the system shall be allowed to run
normally for at least 72 continuous hours. A qualified service mechanic shall remain on the job for at least 24 of the 72 hours of run-in period. During this period, the system shall be checked for refrigerant leaks, compressor oil level
and for proper operating pressures and temperatures.
E. Provide follow up service and checks as directed by the Owner and required until system operates satisfactorily.
END OF SECTION
13027 23 23 00 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 23 31 00 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 23 31 00 – HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install equipment, specialties and accessories to provide ducted
systems as shown on the drawings and herein specified. B. Systems in this section include:
1. Air conditioning supply 2. Air conditioning return
3. Outside air 5. Exhaust air
C. Ductwork shall be constructed to meet the following classification(s). 1. Supply ductwork from constant volume air handling units: 2" W.G.
2. Return air, exhaust air, outside air and mixed air ductwork: negative 2"W.G.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 23 05 01 B. Assignment of Misc. Work: Section 23 05 02
C. Vibration and Seismic Controls for Piping and Equipment: Section 23 05 48
D. Duct Insulation: Section 23 07 13
E. Non-Metal Ducts: Section 23 31 16
F. Air Duct Accessories: Section 23 33 00 G. Fire Dampers: Section 23 33 13.16
H. Duct Lining: Section 23 33 53
I. Air Outlets and Inlets: Section 23 37 00
1.03 COORDINATION
A. Provide coordination with all other trades in the routing of duct prior to installation. No extra compensation for ductwork offsets or routing changes will be allowed due to lack of coordination.
B. Provide coordination with the project Air Balance Contractor in furnishing and
locating all necessary balancing dampers to obtain a properly balanced system.
13027 23 31 00 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
1.04 REFERENCE MANUALS
A. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, second edition, 1995.
B. ASHRAE Guide and Data Book, 2009 Fundamentals edition, Chapter on Air Duct
Design. C. SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual
1.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized steel or aluminum as noted on the drawings.
B. All exhaust ductwork handling moist air or shower exhaust shall be constructed of
aluminum. 1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings are required on this project.
1. Sheet metal fabrication drawings may be used. However, complete coordination with all other trades is required.
2. No pay requests for installed work will be honored until fully coordinated drawings are accepted by the Owner.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 RECTANGULAR AND ROUND DUCT A. Construct duct of first quality materials in strict accordance with the SMACNA
HVAC Duct Construction Standards Manual, Second Edition - 1995, for pressure classification specified herein, unless a more stringent requirement is specified
herein. B. Duct sizes 19" wide and larger, which have more than 10 square feet of unbraced
panels shall be cross broken, unless ducts are noted to be internally lined. This requirement is applicable to 20 gauge or less thickness and 3" W.G. or less.
C. Fittings 1. Elbows (30" wide and less): use standard radius elbow. Inside radius shall be same as width of duct, unless specifically noted otherwise on the
drawings. 2. Elbows greater than (31" wide): use radius elbow where shown on
drawings with inside radius the same as the duct width. Otherwise use square elbows with turning vanes. Elbows less than 36" wide shall have single bladed vanes. Elbows 36" and over shall have double blade
vanes in airfoil pattern.
13027 23 31 00 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
3. Main tee connections
a. Rectangular to rectangular: radius or 45° inlet
b. Round to rectangular: conical connection
4. Branch tee connections: 45°tap in. Provide balancing damper in branch duct to diffuser or grille.
5. Transitions, raises and drops: built so that change in direction does not
exceed 20° angle measured at centerline of air flow.
2.02 ALUMINUM DUCTWORK CONSTRUCTION A. Apply the conversions applicable to a comparable steel duct gauge of the
pressure classification specified, to determine aluminum thickness, reinforcement, and joint connectors.
B. Aluminum flexible duct can be used in bathroom and kitchen exhaust fan connections to outside or where shown on drawings.
C. Aluminum Flexible duct shall be Class 0 air duct which meets the requirements of
NFPA 90A-B constructed of heavy gauge corrugated aluminum. Similar to Model 017 as manufactured by Atco, or approved equal.
2.03 T-24, T-24a and T-25b JOINT SYSTEMS
A. Contractor has option to fabricate the duct system utilizing "Ductmate Industries, Inc."; Lockformers T.D.C., or Engles T.D.F. Joint Systems.
B. Ducts: Lock forming quality steel with G-90/Z275 zinc coating to A.S.T.M. A525-79.
C. Fabrication: Ducts and fittings configuration in accordance with performance requirements of SMACNA, and this specification.
2.04 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide flexible connections at each inlet and outlet duct connection to every piece of fan equipment. Fabric fastened to metal with double lock seam. Fabric
for ordinary heating, ventilating and air conditioning uses to be waterproof, fire
retardant and suitable for temperature of 200°F.
B. Refer to product Specification in Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Control for Piping and Equipment.
2.05 PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING
A. Refer to Section 078413 Penetration Firestopping
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All duct dimensions shown on the drawings are inside dimensions, including ducts insulated on inside.
13027 23 31 00 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
B. All ductwork shall be installed tight to walls, partitions or underside of the
structure except where specific elevations are noted on the plans. Provide offsets to accomplish this and to avoid conflicts with other trades. Provide coordination with electrical, plumbing and sprinkler contractors prior to and during
fabrication drawing period. No extra compensation from the Owner or Engineer will be approved for duct sizing and routing revisions required for structural or
coordination purposes. C. Support ducts suspended from floor and roof structural members with band type
hangers. Do not support main ducts from roof decking. Hanger rods shall be minimum of 3/8".
D. Duct support spacing shall comply with local seismic requirements and in accordance with SMACNA, but in no case greater than 6'-0" O.C.
E. Furnish, locate and set suitable sleeves and trim flanges where ducts pass
through walls. F. Provide for maintenance access to fire dampers, damper operators, filters,
balancing dampers, etc.
G. All ductwork at 7'-0" or below above floor, plus any ductwork which may come near ladders or walkways shall have flattened seams. In addition, this ductwork shall have no protrusions or sharp edges.
H. Contractor to include all balancing dampers as shown on drawings and as
required by the Balancing Contractor to obtain proper flow and noise requirements. Contractor to insure accessibility to all balancing dampers.
3.02 DUCT SEALING REQUIREMENTS
A. All ductwork from constant volume air handling units and all secondary supply air ductwork in pressure classification 2" W.G., shall be sealed to SMACNA Seal Class B with UL-181 listed mastic and foil tape; all transverse joints and
longitudinal seams.
B. All return air and exhaust ductwork in pressure classification negative 2" w.g. shall be sealed to SMACNA seal Class B with UL-181 listed mastic and foil tape : all transverse joints and longitudinal seams.
C. Neatly caulk all joints, slips and keys to insure an absolutely tight system, suitable
to the pressure classification specified. D. The duct leakage shall not exceed 6% of the floor area served by the system or
75 CFM50 whichever is greater, as measured according to the Performance Tested Comfort Systems (PTCS) Duct Testing Procedure.
3.03 DUCTWORK EXPOSED TO VIEW IN OCCUPIED SPACES
A. Exposed ductwork shall be installed in a neat workmanlike manner. Refer to the mechanical, architectural and structural plans, elevations and sections for routing
and heights. A final coordinated, neat appearance is of utmost importance.
13027 23 31 00 – PAGE 5 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
B. Do not initially place, or remove if placed, duct shop labels. Duct shall be free of
adhesive. C. Provide support cables and fasteners in a manner which is unobtrusive.
1. Use stainless steel cables to support ductwork with single point connection where approved by SMACNA. Otherwise use dual cables.
Cables shall attach to full perimeter sheet metal bands. 2. Review support means and spacing with Architect and Engineer prior to fabrication and installation.
3. Duct support spacing shall be coordinated with structural spacing, and be of a consistent spacing in the room or area.
D. Repair or replace duct sections containing indentures as required by the Architect or Engineer.
E. Final duct installation shall be cleaned and free of grime, grease or dust suitable
for field painting. F. Furnish, locate and set suitable sleeves and framed openings where ducts pass
through floors, walls and other concrete or masonry materials. Provide trim rings at wall penetrations.
G. All branch ducts or collars for termination with grilles or diffusers shall be sized to match the outside dimension of the grille flange. Allow for this duct size when
ordering balancing dampers.
H. On galvanized steel ductwork, where galvanizing has been eradicated, it shall be sanded and painted with a 2 mil base coat of Carboline Co. Rust Bond Primer 36C, a second 2 mil coat of Carboline Polyclad #9.33-1 and a third coat same as second coat.
3.04 PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Ductwork delivered to the site and stored/staged prior to installation shall be
placed in a dry location, and set on skids, etc. Cover ductwork subject to dirt, mud, dust, weather or building leaks.
B. Schedule a field inspection with the Engineer, Construction Manager or Superintendent for all ducts delivered to the site having an interior liner for
observation of liner attachment and sealants.
C. During construction, provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
D. When fans are running, filters must be in place and maintained.
E. Ductwork which becomes dirty during the construction period shall be externally and internally cleaned prior to system startup and acceptance.
13027 23 31 00 – PAGE 6 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
3.05 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS
Contractor shall neatly caulk all joints to insure an absolutely tight system. Neatly tape off straight edge lines on duct perimeter prior to applying sealant. Remove tape and trim
excess caulking. Clean all exterior surfaces.
3.06 APPLICATION OF FIRE STOP SEALANTS A. Prepare and apply preparation sealing system in accordance with manufacturer's
printed instructions.
B. Employ installation techniques which will ensure that firestopping is deposited to fill and seal holes and openings.
1. Provide flame (F) rating minimum one-hour, but not less than fire resistance rating of the assembly in which it is installed, per ASTM E-814.
2. Ensure effective smoke seal. C. Tool exposed surfaces of applied sealant smooth.
END OF SECTION
13027 23 31 16 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 23 31 16 – NON-METAL DUCTS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish and install flexible duct only where shown on the drawings
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. General Provisions: Section 23 05 01
B. Air Duct Accessories: Section 23 33 00
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Specifications Section 23 05 01, General Provisions.
1.04 REFERENCE MANUALS
A. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, second edition, 1995.
B. ASHRAE Guide and Data Book, 2009 Fundamentals edition, Chapter on Air Duct Design.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT
A. Flexible duct shall be constructed of a resilient core of continuous inner air barrier, insulated with an R-6 resilient fiberglass insulation and a skrim reinforced,
vapor barrier jacket. B. The flexible duct shall qualify as a Class 1 air duct by UL 181 test standards as
required by NFPA-90A-B.
C. Flexible duct shall not exceed a flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50. D. Manufacturers
1. Owens Corning
2. Genflex 3. Thermaflex 4. Wiremold
5. Hart and Cooley 6. Flexmaster U.S.A.
7. Dundas-Jafine
13027 23 31 16 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install flexible duct as straight as possible, eliminating unnecessary bends but still
allowing adequate flexible movement. In no case shall offsets exceed a 45° radius and in no case shall a single run of flex duct exceed (2) 45 degree offsets. If an offset is required, exceeding this criteria, provide sheet metal elbows. B. Flexible duct shall be supported from the horizontal branch duct. Assure the
duct is supported without bends or kinks.
C. Flexible duct shall be connected with metal or plastic collar bands to secure the inner core to the duct and to the diffuser. Then extend the insulation over the banded core and seal the insulation to the duct and to the diffusers with
appropriate tape.
END OF SECTION
13027 23 33 00 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA SECTION 23 33 00 – AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide duct system accessories as shown on drawings and as specified herein.
B. Accessories shall be constructed of the same material as the duct system served. C. Accessories include balancing dampers.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 23 05 01
B. HVAC Ducts and Casings: Section 23 31 00
1.03 REFERENCE MANUALS A. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, second
edition, 1995.
B. ASHRAE Guide and Data Book, 2009 Fundamentals edition, Chapter on Air Duct Design.
C. SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual
1.04 SUBMITTALS Submit shop drawings on all accessories per Specifications Section 23 05 01, General
Provisions.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 BALANCING DAMPERS (RECTANGULAR)
A. Furnish and install in each branch takeoff to diffusers or grilles and where shown on drawings.
B. Dampers to be opposed blade.
C. Damper blade construction to be minimum 20-gauge die formed, galvanized steel. Shaft shall be steel with brass or nylon, bronze oilite bearings. Blades shall not exceed 6" wide and 48" long. Frames shall be minimum 20-gauge
galvanized, die formed, welded channel.
13027 23 33 00 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA D. Damper Operators: balancing dampers to have external, lock type damper operator and linkage as best suits construction and access conditions.
Operators to be provided with locking damper quadrants complete with locking nuts and graduated scale.
E. Operators to have standoff for thickness of insulation.
F. Manufacturers
1. Ruskin 2. Cesco-Advanced Air 3. Arrow
4. Louvers & Dampers, Inc. 5. AWV
6. Nailor Industries 7. Greenheck
2.02 BALANCING DAMPERS (ROUND) A. Furnish and install in each branch takeoff to diffusers or grilles and where shown on drawings.
B. Dampers to be opposed blade.
C. Damper blade construction to be minimum 20-gauge die formed, galvanized steel. Shaft shall be steel with brass or nylon, bronze oilite bearings. Blades shall not exceed 6" wide and 48" long. Frames shall be minimum 20 gauge
galvanized, die formed, welded channel.
D. Damper Operators: balancing dampers to have external, lock type damper operator and linkage as best suits construction and access conditions. Operators to be provided with locking damper quadrants complete with locking
nuts and graduated scale.
E. Operators to have standoff for thickness of insulation. F. Manufacturers
1. Ruskin
2. Arrow 3. Louvers & Dampers, Inc. 4. AWV
5. Nailor Industries 6. Greenheck
13027 23 33 00 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA 2.03 COUNTERBALANCED BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Furnish and install counterbalanced type automatic backdraft dampers where shown on the drawings. B. Dampers assembly shall be heavy duty construction
1. Frame shall be extruded aluminum with minimum wall thickness of .125". 2. Blades shall be extruded aluminum with minium wall thickness of .070".
Blades shall be equipped with vinyl edge seals. Blades shall be linked with aluminum tie bars.
C. Counterbalance shall be provided on each blade and shall be field adjustable. Damper shall be suitable for relieving at .02 inches w.g. and above.
D. Operators to have standoff for thickness of insulation.
E. Manufacturers
1. Ruskin Model #CBD6 2. Nailor Industries 3. Greenheck
4. Or approved equal. 2.04 DUCT ACCESS DOORS (A.D.)
A. Furnish and install access door at each fire damper. (Note: Not all access
doors are depicted in the drawings.) Coordinate with wall access door locations needed for shafts with the General Contractor. B. Construction: double wall 24 gauge galvanized steel or aluminum (same construction as duct) with 1" fiberglass insulation, 1-1/2 lb./cu.ft. density between
door and door liner. C. Polyurethane rubber or neoprene gasketing to be on inside of door frame and
between duct and door frame. Door metals to be of sufficient gauge for minimizing leakage at various duct pressures. Provide continuous hinges and
minimum of two handle type latches. Unhinged access panels are acceptable only where obstructions inhibit door swing.
D. Access doors shall be 24" x 24" unless duct size is smaller. Access doors for ducts smaller than 24' shall be 2" less than duct size in length and 24" in width.
E. Manufacturers
1. Ruskin Type #ADH-2 2. Duro-Dyne Type #1AD
3. Curb 4. Greenheck
5. Kees
13027 23 33 00 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA 2.05 TURNING VANES
A. Turning vanes (single vane) shall be utilized in low pressure duct with velocities
less than 1500 FPM, constructed with 1" trailing edge and spaced as called for in Figures 2-3 and 2-4 of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - 1st Edition. B. Turning vanes (double vane airfoil profile) shall be utilized in ducts with velocities
exceeding 1500 FPM, constructed with 1" trailing edge and spaced as called for in Figures 2-3 and 2-4 of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - 1st
Edition. C. Where shown on drawings, install vanes in short radius elbows as detailed in
Figures 2-5 and 2-6 of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - 1st Edition.
PART 3: EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
13027 23 33 13.16 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 23 33 13.16 – FIRE DAMPERS
PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Provide fire dampers where shown on the drawings. Type A shall be used for return air
and transfer air for ducts exceeding 12" in height. Type B and C shall be used for all supply air ducts and return/transfer ducts less than 12" in height. 1.02 ALLOWANCES
Provide four (4) extra fire dampers of various sizes beyond the quantity shown on the drawings. Installation shall be where instructed by the Engineer. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 23 05 01 B. HVAC Ducts and Casings: Section 23 31 00 1.04 REFERENCE MANUALS
SMACNA Fire Damper Guide, Latest Edition 1.05 SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings on fire dampers per Specifications Section 23 05 01, General Provisions.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All fire dampers shall not be less than Class II, 250°F tested and listed by UL 555. B. All fire dampers shall have 1-1/2 hour rating, unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
2.02 TYPE 'A' FIRE DAMPER
A. Curtain blade: constructed of blades arranged so they will be stacked at one end of damper totally outside of the air stream. Steel frame and blades shall be
inside duct or opening dimension. If duct height is 12" or less, blade stack shall be out of the airstream.
B. Dampers for horizontal airflow shall be gravity operated while dampers for vertical airflow shall be spring operated. Springs shall be stainless steel, constant
tension design, with combined tension of springs being equal to at least 2-1/2 times force required to close damper curtain.
C. Type 'A' dampers used in supply air or ducted return air systems shall be labelled for use in dynamic systems.
13027 23 33 13.16 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
D. Manufacturers
1. Ruskin 2. United Air
3. American Warming and Ventilating 4. Air Balance, Inc. 5. Prefco
6. Louvers and Dampers, Inc. 7. Nailor Industries
8. Greenheck 9. National Control Air
2.03 TYPE 'B' AND 'C' FIRE DAMPERS
A. Curtain blade: constructed of blades arranged so they will be stacked at one end of damper totally outside of the airstream. Nominal damper width shall be same as duct width but blade stack shall be out of airstream.
B. Dampers for horizontal airflow shall be gravity operated while dampers for vertical
airflow shall be spring operated. Springs shall be stainless steel, constant tension design, with combined tension of springs being equal to at least 2-1/2 times force required to close damper curtain.
C. Dampers shall be labeled for use in dynamic systems.
D. Manufacturers
1. Ruskin 2. United Air
3. American Warming and Ventilating 4. Air Balance 5. Prefco
6. Louvers and Dampers, Inc. 7. Nailor Industries
8. Greenheck 9. National Control Air
2.04 RADIATION DAMPER
A. Radiation dampers shall be UL Classified for use in restrained and unrestrained UL Listed ceiling assemblies with fire resistance ratings of 1 hour or less.
B. Radiation dampers shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with UL 555C Standard for Ceiling Dampers – Latest Edition.
C. Each radiation damper shall bear a UL fire resistance rating label. Round applications shall utilize Ward Model 55 as standard.
D. Radiation damper frame and blade construction shall be in galvanized steel, in
gauges required UL listing 555C. Fusible link shall be 165˚F. E. Radiation damper shall be installed with manufacturer supplied steel plenum box.
13027 23 33 13.16 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
F. Manufacturers:
1. Ruskin 2. Greenheck
3. Nailor Industries 4. Ward 5. Or approved equal.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide installation sleeve: Sleeve shall extend past wall or floor construction on each side. Sleeve shall not be fastened to wall or floor construction but shall be held in place by retaining angles. Allow for damper expansion of 1/8" for each
foot of length or width. Damper frame may be of such design so as to function as sleeve.
B. Ductwork shall be connected to the sleeve on each side of the wall with break away connection. Duct shall not be installed continuous through wall or floor.
C. Multiple assemblies of dampers for openings which are larger than assemblies
tested by UL shall have steel dividing opening into areas within tested sizes. Submit drawings giving sizes and location of these steel members for approval of Engineer.
D. Fusible link: UL listed and rated at 165°F.
3.02 TESTING
Demonstration: Contractor shall demonstrate to Owner's Representative that each fire damper is properly installed and will operate satisfactorily. With fan on, fusible link should be removed to see that damper will close evenly and tightly. Damper shall be
re-opened and fusible link replaced.
END OF SECTION
13027 23 33 13.16 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 23 33 53 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 23 33 53 – DUCT LINING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide interior duct lining where specified herein and as shown on drawings.
B. The following ductwork shall be internally lined:
1. Main supply ducts from FCU’s unit discharge: 1" thick, 1.5 PCF density 2. Other supply air ducts where symbolized on the drawings: 1" thick, 1.5
PCF density. 3. All main return ducts: 1" thick,1.5 PCF density
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 23 05 01
B. Duct Insulation: Section 23 07 13
C. HVAC Ducts and Casings: Section 23 31 00
1.03 REFERENCE MANUALS AND STANDARDS
A. NFPA 90A and 90B
B. ASTM C1071, Type 1
C. ASTM G21 and G22
D. SMACNA Application Standards for Duct Liners
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings of duct liner materials in accordance with Specifications Section
23 05 01, General Provisions.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 DUCT LINER
A. Furnish and install fiberglass flexible duct liner of density and thickness
scheduled in this section
B. Duct liner insulation shall be of glass fibers bonded with a dark thermosetting resin.
13027 23 33 53 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
C. The air stream surface shall be protected with an acrylic surface coating
formulated so it will not support the growth of fungus or bacteria, as determined by tests in accordance with ASTM C1071 and ASTM G21 and G22.
1. The coating shall be able to resist damage from in-shop handling during
fabrication and shipment to the job site. 2. The coating shall be cleanable with commonly available cleaning
equipment which follow procedures detailed in the North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA) Duct Cleaning Guide.
3. The coating shall be smooth to have minimum resistance to air flow.
D. The liner thermal performance shall have a minimum R-value of 4.0 per inch thickness at a conductance 0.25 btu/(hr ft2 °F). Temperature Limit: 250°F.
E. The surface burning characteristics shall be as follows:
Flame Spread: Not over 25
Smoke Developed: Not over 50
F. Sound Absorption Coefficients
Frequency (cycles per second) Thickness 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC
1" .09 .29 .67 .89 1.03 .99 .70 G. Manufacturer: Manville Linacoustic with Permacote
2.02 MECHANICAL FASTENERS
A. Duct liner fasteners shall consist of Type 2 welded pins with integral head or
Type 3 welded pins with press-on head.
B. Fasteners shall be of materials having a corrosion resistance capable of withstanding a 96-hour salt spray test per ASTM B-117.
C. Fasteners shall be resistant to the effects of temperatures 250°F when tested as
assembly in accordance with ASTM C-411.
D. Retaining head or washer shall be sufficient in size to hold the liner firmly in place without tearing or cutting the liner.
13027 23 33 53 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The net free area of the duct dimensions given on the drawings shall be
maintained. Increase duct dimensions to compensate for the liner thickness.
B. Duct liner shall be adhered to the sheet metal with full coverage of an adhesive conforming to the Standard for Adhesives for duct liner of the Adhesive and
Sealant Council, Inc.
3.02 LINER APPLICATIONS
A. All portions of ducts designed to receive liner shall be completely covered. Liner shall be cut to assure tight, overlapped corner joints. Top pieces shall be
supported by the side pieces.
B. Liner shall be additionally secured with mechanical fasteners.
C. Mechanical fasteners shall be spaced in accordance with liner manufacturer recommendations. Fasteners shall start at no less than 2" of liner edges.
D. Mechanical Fasteners exposed to view through return, exhaust, supply or
transfer grilles shall be painted flat black.
E. All exposed leading edges and transverse joints shall be neatly butted without a gap. Coat all shop and field cuts, liberally, with the approved adhesive or edge
seal.
3.03 MATERIAL HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Ducts with liner shall be kept clean and dry during transportation, site storage and staging, and during installation.
B. Protect liner from exposure to the elements or damage by abuse.
C. Protect installed open ducts to prevent moisture and dust from entering the
system.
3.04 LINER APPLICATION RESTRICTIONS
A. Do no install liner in ducts within six (6) feet of electric resistance duct coils.
B. Do not install liner in ducts or plenums within six (6) feet of an outside/or relief air
louver.
C. For the above sections of duct, externally insulate as specified in Section 23 07 13, Duct Insulation. For exposed duct in finished spaces, provide a section of
dual wall insulated duct with a solid aluminum liner.
END OF SECTION
13027 23 33 53 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE IS LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 23 34 00 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA SECTION 23 34 00 – HVAC FANS
PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install fans as scheduled on the drawings and specified herein.
B. The fan types used on this project are 1. Ceiling/wall exhaust fans
2. Centrifugal wall propeller fans 3. Sidewall exhaust fan – direct drive
4. Propeller Wall Exhaust Fan 1.02 DESIGN BASE
A. The construction drawings indicate a system based on the information available to
Engineer by a selected manufacturer of equipment. Electrical services, size, configuration and space allocations are consistent with that manufacturer's information.
B. This manufacturer and other listed or approved manufacturers are encouraged to
provide equipment on this project; however, it shall be the Contractor and/or Supplier's responsibility to assure the equipment is consistent with the design base. No extra compensation will be approved for revisions required by the manufacturer
for any different services, space, clearances, etc.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE Fans shall bear AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for both air and sound performance.
1.04 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 23 05 01
B. Assignment of Misc. Work: Section 23 05 02
C. Completion and Startup: Section 23 05 03 D. Common Motor Requirements: Section 23 05 13
E. Electrical: Division 26
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for each fan to be furnished on this project in accordance with Specifications Section 23 05 01, General Provisions.
B. Submit installation instructions, parts lists and operation/maintenance data for each fan size and type.
13027 23 34 00 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 CEILING/WALL EXHAUST FAN
A. Provide, where shown on the drawings, direct drive exhaust fan unit with galvanized steel housing of the size and capacity shown on the schedule. The housing shall
have double-strength mounting flanges with keyhole slots.
B. Fans shall have polymeric blower wheel. Provide quiet back-draft polymeric damper at the fan discharge.
C. Steel housing shall have adjustable mounting brackets.
D. All motors shall be lifetime lubricated, thermally protected, and rated at 120 volt, 1 phase, 60 Hertz, Unit shall be UL listed.
E. Unit certified sound level shall not exceed 3.5 zones.
F. Manufacturers: Broan 670 or approved equal.
2.02 CENTRIFUGAL CABINET DIRECT DRIVE FAN
A. Duct mounted supply, exhaust or return fans shall be of the centrifugal, direct drive type. The fan housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel and shall include pre-punched mounting brackets.
B. The housing interior shall be lined with 0.5 in acoustical insulation. The outlet duct
collar shall include an aluminum back-draft damper and shall be adaptable for horizontal or vertical discharge.
C. The access for wiring shall be external. The motor disconnect shall be internal and of the plug in type. The motor shall be mounted on vibration isolators.
D. The fan wheel(s) shall be of the forward curved centrifugal type, constructed of galvanized steel and dynamically balanced.
E. Manufacturers
1. Acme 2. Greenheck Model CSP
3. Penn Ventilator 4. Loren Cook
2.03 SIDEWALL EXHAUST FAN - DIRECT DRIVE
A. Provide where shown on the drawings, a completely assembled side wall fan unit. Unit size and capacity shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
B. Fan shall be propeller type and direct drive. Fan blades shall be aluminum.
C. Fan wall casing shall be galvanized steel with minimum 2"x2"x1/8" adjustable perimeter anchor aluminum angles.
13027 23 34 00 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA D. Unit shall be equipped with a motor operated discharge louver. Louver shall be
aluminum low leakage type (maximum leakage rate of 10 cfm per square foot of louver). Louver motor shall be same voltage as fan motor. Furnish controls to
automatically open damper on fan startup and close on fan shutdown. E. All fasteners shall be corrosion resistant.
F. Complete assembly shall be sealed weather-tight.
G. Furnish a NEMA-1 disconnect switch.
H. Manufacturers 1. Greenheck SE
2. Jenn Air 3. Penn Ventilator 4. Loren Cook
5. ACME 6. Twin City
2.04 PROPELLER WALL EXHAUST FAN - GARAGE
A. Provide where shown on the drawings, a completely assembled, belt driven, exhaust fan unit. Unit size and capacity shall be as scheduled on the drawings. B. Fan shall be airfoil propeller type and belt drive. Fan blades shall be cast aluminum.
C. Fan assembly shall be constructed of galvanized steel.
D. Furnish a plenum mounting collar, automatic back-draft damper and fan inlet guard. E. Furnish a UL approved NEMA 1 safety disconnect switch.
F. Motors shall be continuous heavy duty ball bearing type with grease fittings. Motors
shall be installed on adjustable base. G. Motors shall be premium efficiency in accordance with Section 23 05 13 Common
Motor Requirements.
H. All fasteners shall be corrosion free or protected. I. Manufacturers
1. Acme
2. Greenheck Model SBCE 3. Jenn Air 4. Loren Cook
5. Penn Ventilator
13027 23 34 00 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to drawings for location, size, capacity, mounting arrangement, and electrical
characteristics for fans.
B. All fans shall be installed, aligned, lubricated and started all in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions.
C. Maintain the cleanliness of the fans throughout the construction period, internally and externally. At completion, clean and restore the fans to new condition.
END OF SECTION
13027 23 37 00 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA SECTION 23 37 00 – AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide diffusers and grilles as specified herein and as shown on the drawings.
B. Each diffuser and grille type specified herein lists one or two manufacturers and associated model numbers of the required device and accessories. The
following manufacturers are also acceptable if the product is equal to that specified:
1. Carnes 2. E.H. Price
3. Metal-Aire 4. Krueger 5. Nailor Industries
C. All diffuser and grille selections shall be based on a maximum NC value of 20 in
any of the octave bands 2 thru 7 except where noted otherwise. 1. Criteria shall be based on a room absorption of 10 dB, re 10-12 watts. 2. Grilles shall be selected at the operating deflection noted in specification.
1.02 ALLOWANCES AND SPARE PRODUCTS
A. Provide 10 extra Type CG grilles of various sizes beyond the quantity shown on the drawings. Storage or installation shall be where instructed by the Engineer.
B. Provide 5 extra Type TG grilles of various neck sizes beyond the quantity shown
on the drawings. Storage or installation shall be where instructed by the Engineer. C. Provide 5 extra Type RG grilles of various neck sizes beyond the quantity shown
on the drawings. Storage or installation shall be where instructed by the Engineer.
1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. General Provisions: Section 23 05 01
B. HVAC Ducts and Casings: Section 23 31 00
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings on each type of grille and diffuser for approval per Specifications Section 23 05 01, General Provisions.
B. Include manufacturer=s sound power level ratings indicating compliance with acoustic criteria.
13027 23 37 00 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 CIRCULAR PLAQUE DIFFUSER - C
A. Capacity and size: as noted on the drawings
B. Construction: steel face panel mounted to heavy gauge seamless back pan.
C. Finish: baked enamel
D. Color: off white
E. Face Panel:
1. Smooth flat face, free of visible fasteners. Exposed edges hemmed.
2. Uniform 360 degree discharge pattern.
3. Adjustable from horizontal to vertical flow.
4. Panel shall be field removable.
F. Neck: round
G. Frame: surface mount for drywall ceilings.
H. Manufacturer:
1. Titus Model R.OMNI
2.02 ARCHITECTURAL CEILING DIFFUSER - D
A. Capacity and neck size: as noted on the drawings
B. Construction: steel face panel mounted to heavy gauge seamless backpan
C. Finish: baked enamel
D. Color: off white
E. Face Panel:
1. Smooth flat face free of visible fasteners, exposed edges hemmed.
2. 18"x18" face panel on 24"x24" diffusers
3. Panel shall be field removable.
F. Neck: round
G. Frame: Refer to Room Finish Schedule
1. Lay-in for suspended T-bar ceilings
2. Surface mount for drywall ceilings
H. Manufacturers: Titus Model OMNI
13027 23 37 00 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.03 SUPPLY GRILLE - F
A. Capacity and size: as noted on the drawings
B. Construction: steel
C. Finish: baked enamel
D. Color: off white
E. Louvers: double deflection, 3/4" spacing, front louvers parallel to long dimension,
individually adjustable.
F. Frame: steel with 1-1/4" border, foam gasket
G. Manufacturers:
1. Titus Model 300 RL
2. Anemostat Model S2H
2.04 RETURN GRILLE - G
A. Capacity and size: as noted on the drawings
B. Construction: steel
C. Finish: baked enamel
D. Color: off white
E. Louvers: one set fixed louvers parallel to long dimension; louvers (at 35 degrees)
3/4" spacing
F. Frame: steel with 1-1/4" border, foam gasket
G. Manufacturers:
1. Titus Model 350RL
2. Anemostat Model S3HD
2.05 EXHAUST GRILLE - H
A. Capacity and size: as noted on the drawings
B. Construction: aluminum
C. Finish: baked enamel
D. Color: off white
E. Frame: aluminum with 1-1/4" border, foam gasket
13027 23 37 00 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
F. Louvers: one set fixed louvers parallel to long dimension; louvers (at 35
degrees) 3/4" spacing.
G. Manufacturers
1. Titus Model 350FL
2. Anemostat Model X3HD
2.06 SUPPLY GRILLE - CG
A. Capacity and size: as noted on the drawings
B. Construction: steel
C. Finish: baked enamel
D. Color: off white
E. Louvers: double deflection, 3/4" spacing, front louvers parallel to long dimension,
individually adjustable.
F. Frame: steel with 1-1/4" border, foam gasket
G. Manufacturers:
1. Titus Model 300 RL
2. Anemostat Model S2H
2.07 RETURN GRILLE - RG
A. Capacity and size: as noted on the drawings
B. Construction: steel
C. Finish: baked enamel
D. Color: off white
E. Louvers: one set fixed louvers parallel to long dimension; louvers (at 35 degrees)
3/4" spacing
F. Frame: steel with 1-1/4" border, foam gasket
G. Manufacturers:
1. Titus Model 350RL
2. Anemostat Model S3HD
13027 23 37 00 – PAGE 5 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA 2.08 TRANSFER GRILLE - TG
A. Capacity and size: as noted on the drawings
B. Construction: steel
C. Finish: baked enamel
D. Color: off white
E. Louvers: one set fixed louvers parallel to long dimension; louver (at 35 degrees)
2" spacing.
F. Frame: steel with 1-1/4" border, foam gasket
G. Manufacturers:
1. Titus Model 355RL
2. Anemostat Model S35HD
2.09 LINEAR CEILING DIFFUSER - L
A. Capacity, length, width and number of slots: as noted on the drawings
B. Construction: aluminum
C. Finish: baked enamel
D. Color: off white
E. Frame: 1-1/8" wide full perimeter
F. Slots: full 180° adjustable pattern controller and flow rate control
G. Mounting: concealed (no face screws), diffuser to mount flush tight to ceiling
H. Accessories:
1. Insulated factory plenum, minimum 24 gauge galvanized steel, with 1/4"
thick, 2 lbs. density internal insulation (matt-coated). Casing shall
include a round or oval 1-1/8" inlet collar for duct connection.
2. Alignment strips or pins for continuous appearance
3. End borders
4. Mitered corners
5. Blank-offs (black finish)
I. Manufacturers
1. Titus Model ML
2. Anemostat Model SLAD
13027 23 37 00 – PAGE 6 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.10 HEAVY DUTY BAR RETURN GRILLE - HG
A. Capacity and size: as noted on the drawings.
B. Construction: heavy gauge steel
C. Finish: baked enamel
D. Color: off white
E. Frame: 1-1/4" wide, 16 gauge, perimeter border, foam gasket
F. Louvers:
1. Minimum 14 gauge face bars with vertical rear support bars at 6" on
center.
2. One set of fixed bars parallel to long dimension; 3.38° fixed deflection; 2"
spacing.
G. Where shown on drawings, furnish an opposed blade, galvanized steel balance
damper, operable from the face of the grille.
H. Manufacturers:
1. Titus Model 30-RL
2. Anemostat Model EHDS
PART 3: EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
13027 23 37 23 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 23 37 23 – HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide roof mounted intake ventilators as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
B. Provide prefabricated curbs as specified in Specifications Section 23 05 30,
Prefabricated Curbs and Supports.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 23 05 01
B. Assignment of Misc. Work: Section 23 05 02
C. Prefabricated Curbs and Supports: Section 23 05 30
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Specification Section 23 05 01, General Provisions.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 INTAKE AIR HOODS
A. General: Provide intake and relief air hoods as shown and scheduled on drawings.
B. Construction
1. Constructed of heavy gauge anodized aluminum sheets with interlocking
seams. 2. Support members shall be galvanized steel or aluminum.
3. Base construction shall be heavy gauge aluminum. 4. The underside of the hood and throat shall be insulated (1" thick).
5. Provide insect screens on outlets. 6. Provide a factory baked enamel finish to all exterior surfaces. Color to be
selected by Architect.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Greenheck "Fabra-Hood" 2. ACME
3. Cook 4. Penn Ventilation
5. Twin City Fans
13027 23 37 23 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Mount units level on prefabricated roof curb.
B. Provide counterflashing on curb. Roof flashing by General Contractor.
END OF SECTION
13027 23 40 00 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA SECTION 23 40 00 – HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide filters and filter gauges for air handling unit (s).
B. System filter types as follows: 1. 1" medium efficiency disposable filters (MERV8)
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 23 05 01 B. Ducts and Casings: Section 23 31 00
C. Packaged Heating and Cooling Units: Section 23 81 00
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MEDIUM EFFICIENCY DISPOSABLE PRE-FILTERS
A. Filter shall be as follows:
1. 1" pre-formed, collapsible and pleated of non-woven reinforced cotton fabric.
2. Media shall have anti-microbial coating. 3. Held rigid in airstream by retainer device. 4. Exhibit mean efficiency of MERV8 when tested in accordance with
ASHRAE Standard 52-68. 5. Have UL 900, Class II, approval.
B. Furnish two (2) complete sets for each unit.
C. Manufacturers
1. Farr 30/30 2. Flanders 3. American Air Filter
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. During construction period all systems shall be equipped with 2" thick MERV-8 disposable filters. Change filters throughout construction period as needed. The system shall never be operated during construction without filters installed. B. At completion of balancing and startup, replace all permanent filters with new
clean filters.
END OF SECTION
13027 23 40 00 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE IS LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 23 81 00 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 23 81 00 – PACKAGED HEATING AND COOLING UNITS PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install equipment and accessories to provide complete packaged heating and cooling units as shown on the drawings and herein specified.
B. Furnish and install temperature controls as specified herein.
C. Equipment includes: 1. Air cooled split system 2. Ductless split system
1.02 DESIGN BASE
A. The construction drawings indicate a system based on the information available to Engineer by a selected manufacturer of equipment. Electrical services, size,
configuration and space allocations are consistent with that manufacturer's information.
B. This manufacturer and other listed or approved manufacturers are encouraged to provide equipment on this project; however, it shall be the Contractor and/or
Supplier's responsibility to assure the equipment is consistent with the design base. No extra compensation will be approved for revisions required by the
manufacturer for any different services, space, clearances, etc. 1.03 COORDINATION
A. Provide coordination with the project Air Balance Contractor in the final balance of
the fans. B. Fan Speed Adjustment: external resistance (static pressure loss) for each fan
system has been estimated and noted on the drawings. Fan speed and fan to motor drive will be selected based on this estimated static pressure loss. The
static pressure loss is an estimate; actual loss of completed system may vary above or below estimate
1.04 DEFINITIONS AND MINIMUM PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
A. SEER (Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio): All equipment listed herein is required to have minimum SEER rating as specified and certified to ARI in accordance with ARI Standard 210.81.
1.05 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 23 05 01
B. Completion and Startup: Section 23 05 03
C. Identification for Piping and Equipment: Section 23 05 53 D. Common Motor Requirements: Section 23 05 13
13027 23 81 00 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
E. Prefabricated Curbs and Equipment Supports: Section 23 05 30
F. Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems: Section 26 05 33
G. Wiring Devices: Section 26 27 26
1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings on each unit specified herein in accordance with
Specifications Section 23 05 01, General Provisions.
B. Submit shop drawings for each thermostat type specified herein in accordance with Specification Section 23 0501, General Provisions.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 AIR COOLED, SPLIT SYSTEM
A. General: Furnish and install outdoor mounted, air cooled, split system air conditioning unit, suitable for ground or rooftop installation. Air conditioning unit
shall be completely factory assembled including hermetic compressor, refrigerant coil, condenser fan and motor, prewired and have a holding charge of refrigerant.
B. Quality Assurance:
1. Unit will be rated in accordance with the latest edition of AHRI Standard 240. 2. Unit will be certified for capacity and efficiency, and listed in the latest AHRI directory. 3. Unit construction will comply with latest edition of ANSI/ ASHRAE and
with NEC. 4. Unit will be constructed in accordance with UL standards and will
carry the UL label of approval. Unit will have C--UL approval. 5. Unit cabinet will be capable of withstanding Federal Test Method Standard No. 141 (Method 6061) 500--hr salt spray test.
6. Air--cooled condenser coils are pressure tested and the outdoor unit is leak tested.
7. Unit constructed in ISO9001 approved facility. C. Casings: panels shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel, cleaned, bonderized
and coated with powder coat paint
D. Air Cooled Split System unit with specified evaporator coil shall have minimum SEER of 13.0 at the scheduled conditions. Unit will be used in a refrigeration
circuit to match up to a packaged fan coil or coil unit.
E. Compressor: hermetically sealed, high efficiency compressor with special lubrication system, bearing surfaces and motor insulation. Internal over current,
over temperature and over pressure protection. Compressor shall be approved
for continuous operation down to 55°F in cooling mode. Compressor shall be mounted on rubber isolators.
13027 23 81 00 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
F. Refrigerant and Circuit: Complete factory operated charge of refrigerant in both
indoor and outdoor coils. Refrigeration circuit components will include liquid—line shutoff valve with sweat connections, vapor--line shutoff valve with sweat connections, system charge of Puron (R--410A) refrigerant, POE compressor oil,
accumulator, and filter dryer.
G. Condenser Coil: Aluminum fin surface mechanically bonded to copper tubing. Condenser coil shall be protected by a heavy duty grille.
H. Condenser Fan: direct drive propeller fan configurated for draw through vertical outdoor air flow. Condenser fan motors will be totally enclosed, 1—phase type
with class B insulation and permanently lubricated bearings. Shafts will be corrosion resistant. Fan blades will be statically and dynamically balanced. Condenser fan openings will be equipped with steel wire safety guards.
I. Unit Circuit Breaker: All single phase outdoor units shall contain an internal unit
circuit breaker. Provide complete internal wiring and unit mounted diagram. J. System Design Summary:
1. Intended for outdoor installation with free air inlet and outlet. Outdoor fan external static pressure available is less than .01" wc.
2. Minimum outdoor operating air temperature without low--ambient operation accessory is 55°F. 3. Maximum outdoor operating air temperature for cooling mode is 125°F.
4. For reliable operation, unit should be level in all horizontal planes. 5. System manufacturer is responsible for refrigerant pipes sizing, when
interconnecting refrigerant tube lengths greater than 80 ft and/or elevation differences between indoor and outdoor units greater than 20 ft. 6. If any refrigerant tubing is buried, provide a 6 in. vertical rise to the valve connections at the unit. Refrigerant tubing lengths up to 36 in. may be
buried without further consideration. Do not bury refrigerant lines longer than 36 in.
7. Use only copper wire for electric connection at unit. Aluminum and clad aluminum are not acceptable for the type of connector provided. 8. Do not apply capillary tube indoor coils to these units.
9. Factory--supplied filter drier must be installed.
K. Furnish and Install multi-position direct expansion multi-speed fan coil(s) equipped with cooling control kit in the location and manner and arrangements shown on the plan.
L. Unit enclosure shall be insulated with a 1 inch foil faced, high density, R4.2
insulation, and be constructed of prepainted galvanized steel. Large front service access panels shall provide easy access to all components. Unit shall be factory equipped with reusable type MERV8 filters.
M. Indoor fan shall be forward curved with double inlet, mounted on motor shaft,
dynamically and statically balanced. Fan-motor assembly shall be removable for service. Blower motor shall be induction type.
13027 23 81 00 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
N. Cooling coil shall be constructed with brazed copper tubing with aluminum lanced
fins. Coil shall have TXV ( thermal expansion valve); refrigerant line fittings which permit braze connections. Condensate pans shall be equipped with primary and auxiliary drain connections with brass inserts, sloping, with minimal standing
water retention. Refrigerant to be used will be R-410a.
O. Blower controls include control board with time delay relay, a 5 amp replaceable automotive-type circuit protection fuse, and motor speed tap selection terminal (SPT).
P. Electric heater shall be field installed wired for single supply circuit and 1-phase
operation on fixed speed fan coil units. Standard heater control wiring shall be single stage with optional multiple staging capability. All heaters shall be equipped with thermal overload device (circuit breaker), current overload for
heater above 10 kw.
Q. Cooling control system includes 40-VA control circuit (24 v) transformer, with replaceable 5 amp blade-type auto fuse. Low voltage connections shall be point-to-point “wire” connections.
R. Supplemental Heater Staging: Indoor blower coils shall include built-in adjustable
set points for individual outdoor temperature staging of the supplemental heater stages.
S. Warranty: One (1) year entire unit. Four (4) additional years for compressor and controls.
T. Manufacturers: 1. Bryant/Carrier 2. Trane 3. Goodman
2.02 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM
A. System Description: The system shall consist of a horizontal discharge, single phase outdoor unit, a matched capacity indoor section and shall be equipped with
a wall mounted controller. B. Outdoor Unit
1. The outdoor unit shall be equipped with an electronic control board that interfaces with the indoor unit to perform all necessary operation
functions. 2. The outdoor unit shall be able to operate with a maximum height difference of 100 feet between indoor and outdoor units.
3. The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped, and wired. Each unit must be test run at the factory.
4. Outdoor unit sound level shall not exceed 51 DB. 5. Cabinet a. The casing shall be constructed from galvanized steel plate,
finished with an electrostatically applied, thermally fused acrylic or polyester powder coating for corrosion protection.
b. Mounting feet shall be provided and shall be welded to the base of the cabinet and be of sufficient size to afford reliable equipment mount and stability.
13027 23 81 00 – PAGE 5 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
c. Easy access shall be afforded to all serviceable parts by means
of removable panel sections. d. Cabinet mounting and construction shall be sufficient to withstand 155 MPH wind speed conditions.
6. Fan a. The outdoor unit shall be furnished with AC fan motor(s).
b. The fan blade(s) shall be of aerodynamic design for quiet operation, and the fan motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated.
c. The fan shall be mounted in front of the coil, pulling air across it from the rear and dispelling it through the front. The fan shall be
provided with a raised guard to prevent external contact with moving parts.
7. Condenser Coil a. The condenser coil shall be of copper tubing with flat aluminum
fins to reduce debris build up and allow maximum airflow. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. b. Refrigerant flow from the condenser shall be controlled by means
of an electronic linear expansion valve (LEV) metering device. The LEV shall be control by a microprocessor controlled step
motor. c. All refrigerant lines shall be of annealed, refrigeration grade copper tubing, ARC Type, meeting ASTM B280 requirements,
individually insulated with flexible, closed-cell, CFC-free elastomeric material with thermal conductivity equal to or better
han 0.27 BTU-inch/hour per Sq Ft / °F, a water vapor
transmission equal to or better than 0.08 Perm-inch and fire ratings of Flame-Spread Index of less than 25 and a
Smoke-development Index of less than 50. 8. Compressor
a. The compressor shall be a Scroll compressor with Variable Speed Inverter Drive Technology.
b. The compressor shall be driven by inverter circuit to control compressor speed. The compressor speed shall dynamically vary to match the room load for significantly increasing the
efficiency of the system which shall result in significant energy savings.
c. To prevent liquid from accumulating in the compressor during the off cycle, a minimal amount of current shall be automatically, intermittently applied to the compressor motor windings to
maintain sufficient heat to vaporize any refrigerant. No crankcase heater is to be used.
d. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator and high pressure safety switch. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.
9. Electrical a. The electrical power of the unit shall be as scheduled on
drawings. b. Power for the indoor unit shall be supplied from the outdoor unit. c. The outdoor unit shall be controlled by the microprocessor located in the indoor unit. The control signal between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit shall be pulse signal 24 volts DC.
13027 23 81 00 – PAGE 6 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
d. The unit shall have Pulse Amplitude Modulation circuit to utilize
98% of input power supply. C. Indoor Unit
1. General: the indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and tested.
Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring and internal piping, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit, in conjunction with the wired, wall mounted controller shall have a self-diagnostic function,
3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be purged with dry nitrogen
before shipment from the factory. 2. Unit Cabinet: The cabinet shall be formed from high strength molded plastic with smooth finish, flat front panel design with access for filter.
Cabinet color shall be white B Munsell 1.0Y 9.2/0.2. The unit shall be wall mounted by means of a factory supplied, pre-drilled, mounting plate.
3. The indoor unit fan shall be high performance, double inlet, forward curve, direct drive fan with a single motor. The fans shall be statically and
dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. The indoor fan shall consist of three (3) speeds: Low, Mid, and Hi and Auto. The fan shall have a selectable Auto fan setting that will
adjust the fan speed based on the difference between controller set-point and space temperature. Indoor unit sound level shall not exceed 49 DB
(A) at high speed. 4. Vane: There shall be a motorized horizontal vane to automatically direct air flow in a horizontal and downward direction for uniform air distribution.
The horizontal vane shall significantly decrease downward air resistance for lower sound levels, and shall close the outlet port when operation is
stopped. There shall also be a set of vertical vanes to provide horizontal swing airflow movement. 5. Return air shall be filtered by means of an easily removable washable
filter. 6. The evaporator coil shall be of nonferrous construction with pre-coated
aluminum fins on copper tubing. All tube joints shall be brazed with PhosCopper or silver alloy. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil.
7. Electrical: The electrical power of the unit shall be as scheduled on drawing. The power to the indoor unit shall be supplied from the outdoor
unit. 8. System Control: The indoor unit shall be connected to a wall mounted wired controller to perform input functions necessary to operate the
system. The wired controller shall have a large multi-language DOT liquid crystal display (LCD). There shall be a built-in weekly timer with up to
eight pattern settings per day. The controller shall consist of an On/Off button, Increase/Decrease Set Temperature buttons, a Heat/Cool/Auto/Dry mode selector, a Timer Menu button, a Timer On/Off
button, Set Time buttons, a Fan Speed selector, a Ventilation button, a Test Run button, and a Check Mode button. The controller shall have a
built-in temperature sensor. Temperature shall be displayed in either
Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C). Temperature changes shall be by
increments of 1°F (1°C) with a range of 67°F to 87°F (19°C to 30°C).
13027 23 81 00 – PAGE 7 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
D. Manufacturers:
1. Mitsubishi 2. Panasonic 3. Daikin
2.03 THERMOSTATS
A. Thermostat: Provide an electronic night setback type thermostat with and light fan auto-on switch and automatic changeover cooling/two stage heating. Night
setback control to contain all components necessary to provide a completely automatic means of providing heating mode setback and cooling mode setup.
Automatic temperature setback/setup shall be adjustable in both time and duration.
B. All control wiring shall be provided by Mechanical Contractor.
C. Manufacturer: Honeywell or the approved equipment manufacturer's unit thermostat.
PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Location, size, capacity, mounting arrangement and electrical characteristics for
equipment shall be as shown and scheduled on the drawings. B. Clean and lubricate all equipment.
C. Motor starter for all motors shall be furnished by unit manufacturer.
D. Unit shall be mounted level.
E. Control wiring shall be provided as follows:
1. Conduit between air cooled units and respective fan coil units shall be provided by Electrical Contractor. 2. Control wiring between air cooled units and respective fan coil units shall be provided by Mechanical Contractor. 3. Conduit to all remote thermostats and ancillary controls shall be provided
by Electrical Contractor. Final connections by Mechanical Contractor. 4. Notify Electrical Contractor of wire sizes and quantities.
END OF SECTION
13027 23 81 00 – PAGE 8 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE IS LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 23 82 40 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 23 82 40 – ELECTRIC TERMINAL HEATING UNITS
PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish and install material, labor and accessories required for the following pieces of
equipment as shown on the drawings and specified herein. A. Propeller unit heaters B. Cabinet unit heaters C. Ceiling cove radiant heater D. Electric baseboard 1.02 DESIGN BASE
A. The construction drawings indicate a system based on the information available to Engineer by a selected manufacturer of equipment. Electrical services, size, configuration and space allocations are consistent with that manufacturer's information.
B. This manufacturer and other listed or approved manufacturers are encouraged to
provide equipment on this project; however, it shall be the Contractor and/or Supplier's responsibility to assure the equipment is consistent with the design base. No extra compensation will be approved for revisions required by the
manufacturer for any different services, space, clearances, etc. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 23 05 01
B. Completion and Startup: Section 23 05 03 1.04 SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings on each piece of equipment specified herein per Specification Section 23 05 01, General Provisions.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS A. Unit heater capacity, motor size, rpm and mounting type shall be as shown and
scheduled on the drawings. Units shall be UL labeled.
B. Casings shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel fitted with threaded hanger rod connections, and painted with finished enamel at factory, in a standard color.
C. Propeller fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and vibration free. Fan blades shall be of heavy gauge construction.
13027 23 82 40 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
D. Fan motors shall be mounted in rubber to prevent vibration transfer. Motors
located within the airstream shall be totally enclosed. Open motors may only be used where protected from the airstream.
E. Horizontal throw unit heaters shall have adjustable discharge louvers.
F. Coils: replaceable steel finned metal sheath electric heating elements. Elements to be enclosed, non-glowing type. Unit to be UL labeled. Voltage shall be as
scheduled on the drawings. G. Control: unit shall be factory wired with built-in power disconnect switch, control
circuit transformer, contactors, automatic reset thermal cut-out and integral thermostat. All control knobs and adjustable devices to be concealed. Heater
wiring diagram shall be permanently attached to unit. H. Manufacturers
1. Trane 2. Qmark
3. Markel 2.02 CABINET UNIT HEATERS
A. Capacity, size and cabinet arrangement shall be as hereinafter specified and as
shown and scheduled on the drawings. B. Wall hung unit cabinets shall be constructed of minimum 16 gauge furniture steel
with exposed corners rounded. Cabinet fronts shall be removable and be firmly secured with easy opening fasteners.
C. Cabinet types shall be as noted on the drawings or as described below. 1. Surface mounted wall hung units shall be suspended approximately 6" to
8" above the floor and have top outlet grille and open bottom inlet. 2. Horizontal recessed ceiling mounted units shall have front and rear face
mounted grilles within a hinged face panel allowing access to all internal components. The unit shall be mounted tight to finished ceiling. 3. Horizontal ceiling, surface or suspended mounted units shall have
integral bottom, front and rear face grilles as shown on the drawings.
D. Cabinets shall have baked enamel finish. Custom color to be selected by and coordinated with Architect.
E. Inlet and outlet grilles shall be stamped as integral part of cabinet except where otherwise noted.
F. Fans shall be forward curved, squirrel cage type, statically and dynamically balanced. Drive may be either V-belt or direct drive, three speed motors.
13027 23 82 40 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
G. The fan motors shall be two-speed with speed selector switch to be inside a door
on the cabinet front. The speed selector switch shall also be used to control the number of heating elements energized (ie: low speed one element on; high speed
two elements on, etc.). Provide a transformer for the motor and control devices, and overload protection for each phase and speed of the motor. In addition, provide a thermal override switch for the motor to cause it to continue running
after the heating elements shut off until the cabinet temperature reaches 80°F. All control devices shall be located within the cabinet enclosure.
H. The electric heating element shall be of the extended surface sheathed resistance type. Each element shall be suitable for the electrical service shown
on the drawing. Where the heating capacity required more than one element, they shall be connected in a balanced three phase, three wire system. Each
element shall be protected by a high temperature cutout, the sensing device shall extend the full length of the heating element.
I. The units, including unit mounted disconnect switch and test button, shall be completely pre-wired by the unit manufacturer. Provide integral thermostat for
unit control. J. Filter: Easily accessible and replaceable one inch thick glass fiber throwaway filter
located to filter the full air stream before the coil and fan. Vertical cabinet units may allow for filter removal without removing the front panel from the unit. Filter
efficiency shall be minimum MERV-8. K. Manufacturers:
1. Trane 2. Qmark
3. York 2.03 CEILING COVE RADIANT HEATER
A. Furnish and install where indicated Cove heaters. Heaters shall be cULus listed.
The heater shall be designed to provide radiant and convection heating in the area to be heated.
B. Construction: 1. Front Panel: extruded aluminum, coated with a “flat finish” to produce
maximum emissivity. Color selection by Architect. 2. Back Shield Reflector: shall be formed of minimum 18 gauge reflective galvanized steel and shall cover entire back portion of the radiant heat
emitting front panel. Back shield reflector shall also contain a wire raceway and a ventilated electrical junction box such to provide electrical
hook up on either end. Ventilation openings are to be integral to back shield reflector. 3. Electrical: internal wiring shall be 12 gauge, 125 degree Fahrenheit
rated UL 3173 XLPE. 4. Heating Element: shall be aluminum sheathed and shall consist of 80/20
nickel-chrome resistance wire and carry a ten (10) year factory warranty. 5. Installation: mounting brackets and back shield reflector shall be single piece construction permitting efficient installation.
6. Thermostat: line voltage single pole.
C. Manufacturer: Radiant Systems, Inc. or approved equal
13027 23 82 40 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.04 ELECTRIC BASEBOARD HEATERS
A. General: Linear thermal cut-out shall be factory installed to automatically shut off
heater in event of overheating and reactivate heater when temperatures return to normal. Heaters shall have cULus approval for mounting on any floor surface including carpeting. Furnish and install where indicated on plans, electric
baseboard heaters, suitable for continuous operation. Heaters shall be cULus listed. Color selection by Architect.
B. Enclosure: the heaters shall be fabricated of minimum .024 inch steel with minimum .035 inch steel control boxes. Junction box enclosure to have provisions
for incoming and outgoing cable with cable clamp for restraining without additional hardware. Ground wire pigtail provided in each junction box for
grounding. C. Front Cover: the front cover shall be fabricated of minimum 0.26 inch
pre-painted steel.
D. Heating Element: the heating element wire shall consist of 80% nickel, 20% chromium and shall be encased in steel sheath to assure long and trouble free life. Aluminum fins shall be so designed as to block sheath radiation to front and
back of heater body and pressure bonded to the steel sheath.
E. Installation: heaters shall be designed to permit use of supply conductors with 60˚C insulation.
F. Manufacturers: Q-Mark Series 2500 or approved equal.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 A. Electric heaters shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions
and wired in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC). B. Coordinate location with trade constructing wall to insure proper location and
mounting.
3.02 STARTUP At initial and subsequent startups, the duct and heater shall be cleaned of all trash and
dirt or dust. Assure design airflow is obtained across the heater.
END OF SECTION
13027 26 05 01 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 26 05 01 – GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. The requirements of the General Conditions, General Requirements, Special Conditions, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Documents and other information bound herewith form a part of and shall govern all work performed under these specifications.
B. The accompanying electrical drawings are issued as part of this project manual.
Any specifications requirements shown on the drawings are equally affective as if included herein. Any omissions of specification are not to be a basis for failure
on the part of the Contractor, from installing electrical components required by the systems to operate in the intended manner.
C. The drawings depict the systems’ components and distribution method. Every
attempt is made to complete the distribution, however discrepancies may develop in the process. The contractor, within reason, is required to prepare his
bid and construction to develop complete and operable systems. (This includes obvious omitted conduit and wire to equipment and fixture connections). In the
event of discrepancies in sizes from drawing to drawing, the contractor shall include the cost for the larger size.
D. Should any work be called for on the drawings, specifications or in the codes, in
such a manner that the Contractor cannot, in his judgment, comply with the requirements, then the Contractor shall bring the matter to the attention of the
Engineer before proceeding with the work.
E. The Contractor shall receive, unload, store, protect and install all electrical equipment whether supplied by the Contractor or by the other trades.
Equipment furnished by others and received prior to the start of work by the Contractor will be unloaded and stored by others. During the progress of the
work, the Contractor shall load and transport such material and equipment to the job site as required. The Contractor shall keep all stored materials clean and
protected from the weather.
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for complete assembly and wiring of all equipment which is purchased disassembled or disassembled for shipping
purposes.
G. Work includes the installation of equipment, conduit and wire and components for complete and operable systems.
H. This project includes the following systems:
1. Branch wiring for apartments
2. Meter centers and services to apartments 3. Fire alarm system
4. Site lighting 5. House meters and panels
13027 26 05 01 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
1.02 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS USED IN THE DIVISION 26 SPECIFICATIONS AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS
A. The word "Owner" shall mean the party mentioned in the prime contract
agreement, or any representative of his party duly authorized to act in his behalf in the execution of the work.
B. The word "Contractor" shall mean the person, firm or corporation entering into a
contract to construct and complete the work as specified herein.
C. The word "Engineer" shall mean Circle Design Group, Inc. and their representatives assigned to this project.
D. The word "Architect" shall mean Weaver Sherman Design and their
representative acting as the Owner's appointed agent.
E. The word "furnish" or “supply” shall mean to purchase and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar subsequent
requirements.
F. The word "install" shall mean operations at the project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to
dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar requirements.
G. The word "provide" shall mean to furnish and install complete and ready for intended use.
1.03 CODES, FEES AND MISCELLANEOUS COSTS
A. All materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable codes,
specifications, local ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations.
B. In cases of difference between building codes, specifications, state laws, local
ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations and the Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. The Contractor shall promptly
notify the Engineer in writing of any such differences. C. Non-Compliance: Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply
with requirements of applicable building codes, state laws, local ordinances,
industry standards and utility company regulations, he shall bear all costs arising for correction of non-complying items.
D. Applicable Codes and Standards shall include all state laws, local ordinances, utility company regulations and applicable requirements of following nationally accepted codes and standards. These requirements are to be considered
minimum and are to be exceeded when so indicated on the drawings or herein specified.
1. Governing Agencies a. Fire Prevention and Building Safety Commission
b. Indiana Department of Health
13027 26 05 01 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2. Applicable Codes a. Indiana Building Code (IBC), 2014, consisting of:
(1) International Building Code, 2012 (2) Indiana Amendments
b. Indiana Electrical Code (IEC), 2009, consisting of: (1) NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, 2008
(2) Indiana Amendments c. Indiana Safety Code for Health Care Facilities, 1991, consisting
of: (1) NFPA 99 Standard for Health Care Facilities 1992
(2) Indiana Amendments d. Indiana Mechanical Code (IMC) 2014 consisting of:
(1) International Mechanical Code 2012 (2) Indiana Amendments
e. Indiana Plumbing Code (IPC), 2012 Edition consisting of (1) International Plumbing Code, Second Printing
(2) Indiana Amendments f. Indiana Swimming Pool Code (ISPC 20) 2011
g. Indiana Energy Conservation Code (IECC) 2010, consisting of: (1) American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air
Conditioning Engineers, Inc. Standard 90.1, 2007 Edition
(2) Indiana Amendments h. Indiana Elevator Safety Code 2011 Edition 675 IAC21
(ANSI ASME A17.1, 2007 Edition) i. Indiana Fire Code (IFC), 2014, consisting of:
(1) International Fire Code, 2012 (2) Indiana Amendments
3. Standards
a. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials b. ANSI: American National Standards Institute c. AMCA: Air Moving and Conditioning Association d. ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers
e. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc., including but not limited to:
ASHRAE 90.1 - 2007 f. FM: Factory Mutual
g. EIA: Electronic Industry Testing Standards h. NEC: National Electric Code
i. NECA: National Electrical Contractors Association j. NEIS: National Electrical Installation Standards
k. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association l. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
m. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Act n. SMACNA Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Assn.
o. UL: Underwriters Laboratories p. ADAAG: Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits, payment of all fees, necessary drawings and arranging and paying for all inspections, tests, etc.
which may be required by any governing authority or utility company in connection with the furnishing or installation of any of his work.
13027 26 05 01 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
1.04 WORK AND WORKMANSHIP
A. All materials and equipment shall be of the highest quality in every respect. All materials and equipment shall be new and of the latest design and free of
defects.
B. Workmanship shall be by skilled workmen of highest standard in strict accordance with all applicable manufacturers' printed specification (which, by reference, are made completely a part of these specifications as though herein repeated), performed under supervision of competent foremen at all times.
C. The Owner has full power to condemn or reject any work, materials or equipment
not in accordance with these specifications and construction drawings or are not in compliance with the manufacturers' specifications or drawings which were approved by the Owner or Engineer.
D. Work or equipment that is rejected shall be removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner, at the Contractor's expense. Work or equipment that
is rejected shall be so stated in writing by the Owner or Engineer. E. Such decisions that the Owner or Engineer may make with respect to questions
concerning the quality, fitness of materials, equipment and workmanship shall be
binding upon the parties thereto.
F. Special attention shall be given to accessibility of working parts and controlling parts. Adjustable parts shall be within easy reach. Removable parts shall have space for removal.
1.05 DEVIATIONS FROM DRAWINGS
A. Electrical drawings show the intended arrangement and routing of all conduit, equipment and appurtenances. They shall be followed as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will permit.
B. The Contractor shall investigate structural and finish conditions affecting his work and shall coordinate his work accordingly. Provide any such fittings, offsets and
accessories which may be required by such conditions. C. Adjustments as a result of coordination or for reasons to improve performance,
etc. may be made upon receiving the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor
shall document that the adjustment has been coordinated with all parties concerned.
1.06 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT
All work shall comply with the current requirements of the U.S. Department of Labor
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, entitled Occupational Safety and Health Standards; National Consensus Standards and Established Federal Standards.
1.07 COORDINATION BETWEEN CONTRACTORS
A. The Contractor and his Subcontractors shall study all drawings and specifications
for this project so that complete coordination between trades will be effected. Special attention shall be given to points where conduits cross ducts, piping or telephone cables, where lights fit into ceilings and where conduits pass through
walls and structural elements.
13027 26 05 01 – PAGE 5 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and his Subcontractors to leave
necessary room for other trades. No extra compensation will be allowed to cover the cost of removing conduits, or equipment found encroaching on space
required by others.
C. The Contractor shall review the electrical requirements of the final equipment selections to ensure such items receive proper electrical services or connections.
D. The Contractor shall provide complete information and cooperation to the other
Contractors and trades pertaining to his work to accomplish coordination of the complete project.
E. The Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor in providing the necessary sleeved openings, excavations, etc. Cutting and patching shall be held to a minimum.
F. The Contractor and his Subcontractor shall be required to attend the periodic
progress meetings to accomplish coordination with the Owner, Architect and Engineer. 1.08 INSPECTION
At the appropriate intervals of the electrical installation, the Contractor shall inform the
local and state authorities to arrange inspections of this work. Provide Certificates of Inspection when completed. 1.09 REPORTS AND FINAL SUBMISSIONS
A. The Contractor shall submit, for attachment to the Substantial Completion
Certificate, a letter certifying that the electrical system wiring is in accordance with the latest adopted edition of The National Electrical Code.
B. Submit all other test reports, as hereinafter specified.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCT AND MATERIAL APPROVAL
A. When Manufacturer’s model numbers are listed they are for reference only and are not to be considered a basis of design. The model numbers listed are the best
information made available to the designer by the manufacturer and not intended to supplant or be inclusive of the criteria defined in the specifications and drawings. The Contractor/Manufacturer shall review the complete construction documents to assure the products proposed are appropriate and meet the system
design criteria. B. The performance requirements listed in the specifications, or shown on the
drawings are the basis of design and will be the benchmark used for submittal
review and approval as well as determining if work is accepted or rejected.
C. A specification followed by one or more manufacturers and "or approved equal" is open to equal products or materials. However, the Contractor shall supply one of the listed manufacturers at no additional cost if Engineer determines substituted
product unsatisfactory.
13027 26 05 01 – PAGE 6 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
D. If changes in conduit, wiring, equipment layout or electrical service are brought about by the use of equipment which is not compatible with the layout shown on
the drawings, the Contractor shall include the cost of the necessary changes in his bid.
2.02 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY SCHEDULE
A. Submit at Engineer’s request a schedule listing equipment and materials for complete installation, quantity ordered, date of placing order and the promised delivery dates.
B. Any and all probable delivery delays shall be identified at the pre-construction
meeting. 2.03 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings, fabrication drawings, and specific product literature for all products specified and shown on the drawings.
B. Approval of submittals does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for ordering proper quantities and miscellaneous appurtenances required for operation and/or installation of the respective material or equipment.
C. The following general information is required with each submittal as applicable:
1. Contractor's stamp, signature and data shall be affixed to the submittal with indication of his review and approval. 2. The full manufacturer's model number of each item
3. Identification of each item's performance, physical size and construction data.
4. Identification of finishes. Furnish two (2) color chips for items requiring color/finish selections. 5. Indicate any modifications made to manufacturer's standard design which
were required by these specifications.
6. Rough-in, foundation and support point dimensions. 7. Complete wiring diagrams and connection identifications, specific to this
project. D. In addition submit any detailed or specific information as stated in the respective
specification sections.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Handle equipment and components carefully to prevent damaging, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged equipment or components; replace with new.
B. Store equipment and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, theft,
dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage at all times.
END OF SECTION
13027 26 05 02 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 26 05 02 – ASSIGNMENTS OF MISCELLANEOUS WORK PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 WALL OPENINGS
A. Wall openings for electrical work not noted on the Architectural or Structural drawings shall be arranged for and provided by the Electrical Contractor. B. Final sizes and locations of electrical penetrations in walls are the responsibility
of the Electrical Contractor.
C. Provide approved fire stops for fire rated wall and floor openings. 1.02 ROOF AND FLOOR OPENINGS
A. Roof and floor openings for electrical work not noted on the Architectural or Structural drawings shall be arranged for and provided by Electrical Contractor.
Miscellaneous framing required and cutting of openings, shall be furnished and installed by the contractors constructing the roof or floor structure. Electrical Contractor is responsible for notifying those Contractors of exact locations and sizes prior to construction of the framing. Openings not coordinated and provided
shall be arranged and paid for by the Electrical Contractor.
B. Final sizes and locations of electrical penetrations through the roof and floor structures are the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor requiring the opening.
C. Counterflashing shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor. Roof flashing
shall be provided by the roofing contractor.
1.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and patching of finished areas for electrical work shall be provided by the General Contractor. Electrical Subcontractors shall coordinate responsibility for
cutting and patching with Electrical Contractor prior to bidding.
B. Cutting and patching of finished areas shall be provided by the Contractor requiring same, however, the work shall be performed by the trade responsible
for this type of work.
C. Patched surfaces shall be finished to match existing unless the surface is scheduled for that type of work.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
NOT USED.
13027 26 05 02 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PLATFORMS AND SUPPORT STANDS
A. Platforms and supporting stands shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor for
their respective equipment. B. Each piece of equipment or apparatus suspended from ceiling or mounted above floor level shall be provided with suitable structural support, platform or carrier
constructed in accordance with best recognized practice in a neat and workmanlike manner.
C. Contractors shall exercise extreme care that structural members of building are
not overloaded by such equipment. In all cases, details of such hangers, platforms and supports together with total weights of mounted equipment shall be
approved by Structural Engineer.
D. Support raceways on accepted types of wall brackets, specialty steel clips or hangers, ceiling trapeze hangers or malleable iron straps. Plumber's perforated
straps are not permitted. Acceptable manufacturers' bracket or hangers are "Kindorf", "Elcan", "Blinkley", "Multi-Frame", "Power-Strut" or "Unistrut". Do not
suspend raceways or equipment from steam, water or other piping or ductwork, and/or pre-stated system supports, except as otherwise permitted. Provide
independent and secure support methods.
E. Provide all structural supports for the proper attachment of electrical equipment supplied and also for equipment such as motor controllers, supplied under other
sections or by Owner for mounting connection and installation under this section.
3.02 ATTACHING TO BUILDING CONSTRUCTION A. Equipment and conduit supports shall be attached to structural members
(beams, joists, etc.) rather than to floor or roof slabs.
B. Support equipment suspended from structure by adjustable threaded steel rods
of adequate diameter and strength anchored to the floor arch of the structural steel. Support auxiliary steel, if required, from the building steel. Secure no hangers to furred ceilings or ductwork.
C. Where equipment is suspended from existing concrete or masonry construction, use expansion shields to attach supports to construction. Expansion shield bolt
diameter shall be the same size as support rod diameter, hereinafter specified.
D. Raceways or light fixtures shall not be suspended from ceiling suspension system. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for providing adequate
support for raceways or fixtures. E. Mount wall-mounted equipment directly to wall by means of steel bolts. Maintain at least 1/4 inch air space between equipment and supporting wall. Mount
groups or arrays of equipment on adequately sized steel channels, such as those manufactured by Kindorf and Unistrut.
13027 26 05 02 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
F. Secure equipment and steel to solid masonry by means of screw and bolt
anchors and expansion bolts. On structural steel use clamps, approved by the Engineer, which do not depend primarily on set-screw pressure for security.
G. Where supports are attached to structural members coated with fireproofing, the
Contractor shall clean the fireproofing, attach the support and patch the fireproofing with like material.
3.03 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT
A. In the event that equipment furnished by other Contractors or Subcontractors
requires a larger starter or disconnect than that which is indicated on the documents, the Contractor supplying the larger equipment shall reimburse the Electrical contractor supplying the larger starter, disconnect for the difference in labor and material cost.
END OF SECTION
13027 26 05 02 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 26 05 19 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 26 05 19 – LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 26 05 01
B. Raceways and Boxes: Section 26 05 33
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 WIRE AND CABLE (UP TO 600 VOLTS)
A. UL Standards: UL 44 and UL 83.
B. Insulation: color coded thermoplastic type rated 600 volts, 75 degree C except where otherwise noted.
C. Conductors: soft drawn copper.
D. Conductors #10 and Smaller
1. For final connections to motors and all locations where vibration or
movement is present use Class B, stranded conductors. 2. For all other locations use solid conductors. Stranded conductors may
be used on #12 and #10 wire, provided terminations under screw terminals are made using insulated spade connectors such as "Sta-Con"
or other approved equivalent connectors.
E. Conductors #8 and larger: double braid, Class B concentric stranded per ASTM B8.
F. Minimum Wire Size: General #12; Over 100' #10; Over 200' #8; Control #14;
Signal #18 or as detailed in appropriate section of the specifications and/or as shown on the drawings.
G. Aluminum Wire: contractor may use cable with compressed aluminum
conductors in lieu of copper conductors provided that:
1. All lugs or terminals used are approved for use with aluminum conductors and are of the compression type.
2. All terminations are treated with an anti-oxidizing compound similar to Burndy Penetrox or Penn Union CUAL Acid.
3. Sizes of conductors and conduits are increased to provide equivalent amperage and conduit fill indicated by copper conductors specified.
H. Types and Uses (unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings). All
conduit sizing is based on Type THWN and THHN. (Conduits may need to be increased in size if other wiring is selected).
1. Feeders and service entrance conductors: THWN or THW
2. Power circuits above 40 amps: THWN or THW (#8 or larger) 3. Branch lighting, receptacles and small power circuits: THWN (#10 and
#12)
13027 26 05 19 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
4. Branch circuits in wiring channels of continuous rows of fluorescent lighting fixtures: THHN or THWN
5. Direct burial feeders and branch circuits: UF 6. Control Wiring: MTW (#18 and #16)
I. Wire Tags: Main and feeder cables shall be tagged in all pull boxes, wireways
and wiring gutters of panels. Tags shall identify wire or cable number and/or equipment served as shown on the drawings. Tags shall be of flame resisting
adhesive material, T & B Type WSL or approved equal.
2.02 CABLE LUGS AND TAPS
A. Large Cables (No. 8 and larger)
1. Use compression type connectors, taps and splices specifically designed for the particular connection; insulated splice "Bakelite" covers designed
to fit around splice. Mechanical lugs approved for use with copper cables only.
2. Manufacturers: Burndy Engineering Co., Inc. Thomas & Betts, or approved equal.
B. Branch Circuit Wires (No. 10 and smaller): Use any of the following type of
terminals and connecting devices.
1. Hand applied: coiled tapered, spring wound devices with a conducting corrosion-resistant coating over the spring steel and a plastic covered
and skirt providing full insulation for splice and wire ends. Screw connector on by hand. Manufacturers: Ideal Industries "Wing Nut";
Thomas & Betts "Piggy"; 3M Company "Scotchlok"; or approved equal. 2. Tool applied: steel cap with conducting and corrosion-resistant metallic
plating, open at both ends, fitted around the twisted ends of the wire and compressed or crimped by means of a special die designed for the
purpose. Specially fitted plastic or rubber insulating cover wrap over each connector. Manufacturer: Thomas & Betts "Staken"; Ideal
Industries "No. 410 Crimp Connector" and "Wrap-Cap"; Buchanan; Burndy; or approved equal.
2.03 ELECTRICAL INSULATING TAPE
A. Tape shall be specially designed for use as an insulating tape.
B. Manufacturers: Scotch #23 (rubber), Scotch #33 (plastic) or equal by
Johns-Manville; Minnesota Mining.
2.04 MANUFACTURERS
Southwire, Rome Carroll, American, Okonite, Encore, Pirelli or approved equal.
13027 26 05 19 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Run all wire in approved conduit, or utilize Type NM-B or SE cable as shown on the drawings or directed, and as permitted by State and Local Codes.
B. Run all wires of same circuit in same conduit. Maximum number of current
carrying conductors in conduit shall be six.
C. No wire to be pulled until conduit installation is complete.
D. Pull no thermoplastic insulated wire if temperature is lower than 33°F.
E. Use approved pull-in compound (similar to Wire-Lube or Y-Er-Ease) to facilitate pulling of wire. Grease or oil not permitted.
F. Splice and connect wires only in readily accessible boxes.
G. Care shall be exercised when installing wire so as not to injure the conductor
insulation. Lubricating compounds, recommended by the cable manufacturer, may be used when pulling wire or cable.
H. Bending radius and maximum pull tension of any insulated wire or cable shall not
exceed the limits recommended by the Manufacturer.
I. Splices shall not be permitted except for lighting and as shown on the drawings. After splicing, insulation tape equal to that on the spliced wire shall be applied to
each splice but not less than two (2) layers of rubber tape covered by two (2) layers of plastic tape.
3.02 WIRE AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION
A. Color code wire #10, #12 and #14 AWG as follows:
208V/120V
1. Phase A Black 2. Phase B Red
3. Phase C Blue 4. Neutral White or Gray
5. Ground Green
B. Identify control wires at terminations with numbers shown on the Control Drawings.
C. Train and lace wiring inside equipment and panelboards with plastic tie wraps for
a neat appearance.
D. Make all spare wires in cabinets or panelboards of adequate length for connections. Terminate with insulating tape and tag.
E. Factory color code all cables.
13027 26 05 19 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
F. Circuit/panel identification
1. Provide identification of all panel and motor feeder cables and control wires in pull boxes and at terminations.
2. Use flameproof cloth, vinyl plastic or aluminum foil markers for labels wrapped around wire.
3. Mark tags on power cables with panel and circuit name in black on a yellow background.
4. Mark tags on control wires with terminal numbers and circuit name in black on a yellow background.
5. Use pre-printed markers with protective coatings wherever possible. Use only black India ink or permanent write-on markers.
6. Manufacturer: Brady Slip on Markers
G. Install thermocouple and DC signal wiring conduits separate from power, lighting control wiring and separate from each other. Install such wiring continuous
without splices from sensing element to instrument.
3.03 WIRE CONNECTIONS AND DEVICES
A. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors, so that joint will carry full capacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise.
B. Use lugs or connectors of sufficient size to enclose all strands of conductors.
3.04 PULL CABLES
Insert nylon pulling cable with carbon dioxide, compressed air or vacuum.
END OF SECTION
13027 26 05 26 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 26 05 26 – GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 26 05 01 B. Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Section 26 05 19
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Entire installation to be grounded and bonded in accordance with requirements of
Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC).
B. Equipment grounding shall be provided for, but not limited to, the following items:
1. Panelboard tubs, switchboard frames, transformers and electrical structures.
2. All motor frames that are not otherwise effectively insulated from ground. 3. Enclosure for motor controllers and safety switches.
C. Provide code size grounding conductor in all conduits and raceways.
D. An equipment bonding jumper shall be used to connect the grounding terminal of
a grounding type receptacle to a grounded box.
E. All grounding type receptacles are to have grounding slot connected to green ground conductor.
2.02 AC SYSTEM GROUND
A. Ground system shall consists of a 3/4" diameter, 8'-0" sectional, Copperweld
Blackburn, Penn Union or Weaver rods driven to a depth required to obtain ground resistance stated below. B. In addition to the triangle pattern ground rod system, ground to the street side of
the water meter using OZ-Gedney Type 'BJ' Jumper, to foundation rebar, and to building steel as required by the NEC. After the ground system has been
installed, but before it is fully covered, it shall be tested and shall be modified as required to obtain the ground resistance specified.
13027 26 05 26 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. All grounding system connections shall be made using a thermoweld process similar to "Cadweld" and Thermoweld or a high pressure (non-reversible)
compression type system similar to Burdy "Hyground". B. Test resistance to ground of ground system or grounding network at point where equipment, raceways and conductors are to be connected. Value of this
resistance to ground shall not exceed 5 ohms and shall be measured from ground being tested to the system ground rod driven into the earth.
C. Ground system tests shall be performed by qualified testing concern normally
employed in this field using nationally acceptable test instruments. All test reports shall be certified and shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.
D. Bond conduits at panels per NEC.
E. No equipment rated at more than 150 volts to ground shall be grounded in a
manner which will permit the building steel to provide the only return path for ground fault currents.
F. Grounding wire run below grade shall be buried 18" deep (minimum).
G. All contact surfaces shall be thoroughly clean and bright, before connection are
made, to insure making good electrical contact.
H. Each feeder conduit shall have all joints made with conductive, waterproof joint compound as Sherwin Williams "Zink Clad", T & B "Kopr/Shield" or approved
equal. 3.02 GROUNDING SYSTEMS TESTS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect ground system for compliance with plans and specifications.
B. Electrical Tests 1. Perform 3-point fall-of-potential test per IEEE Standard No. 81, Section
9.04 on the main grounding electrode of system. 2. Perform the 2-point method test per IEEE No. 81, Section 9.03 to
determine the ground resistance between the main grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, system neutral and/or derived
neutral points. 3. Alternate Method to 2 above: Perform ground continuity test between
main ground system and equipment frame, system neutral and/or derived neutral point. This test shall be made by passing a minimum of ten amperes DC current between ground reference system and the ground point to be tested. Voltage drop shall be measured and
resistance calculated by voltage drop method.
C. Test Values: The main ground electrode system resistance to ground should be no greater than five ohms.
END OF SECTION
13027 26 24 16 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 26 05 01 B. Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Section 26 05 19
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish and install material, labor and accessories required for the following pieces of equipment as shown on the drawings and specified herein. Panelboards
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings for distribution equipment in accordance with Specifications Section 26 05 01, General Provisions. PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 PANELBOARDS (LOAD CENTER TYPE) A. Provide panels consisting of an assembly of branch circuit switching and
protective devices mounted inside a dead front enclosure. Provide the number,
size and arrangement of these branch circuit devices as shown on the drawings.
B. Panelboard Interior 1. Rigid removable assembly of copper bus bars and interchangeable
branch circuit devices.
2. Bus bars to permit branch circuit devices of all sizes and number of poles to be interchangeable and installed in any spare space of sufficient size,
without disturbing adjacent units, removing main bus or branch circuit connectors and without machining, drilling and tapping. 3. Arrange bus in sequence or distributed phasing so that multi-pole circuit
breakers can replace any group of single pole circuit breakers of the
same size.
C. Enclosure 1. Code gauge 20" wide (minimum) steel box galvanized after fabrication
with turned up peripheral front edge, bolted joints and multiple knockouts
on top and bottom. 2. Provide isolated ground bus on inside of tub. 3. Minimum gutter sizes as follows:
Top and Bottom Panel Sides No Main Lugs Main Lugs
20 poles or less 4" or 5" 6"
More than 20 poles 6" or 6" 8" Feed thru cables 8" (one side only)
4. Flush mounted in finished areas and where indicated. Surface mount elsewhere.
13027 26 24 16 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
D. Front
1. Heavy code gauge steel reinforced with welded corners on rear as
required to maintain panel face flat. 2. Provide lock in stainless steel or brushed chrome finished in door over
branch circuit devices (or approved equal). All panels keyed alike. Supply four (4) keys to Owner. 3. Bold front closed with trim clamps.
4. Factory finished in medium gray baked enamel or two coats of air drying
lacquer over a rust inhibitor.
E. Terminals 1. Bolted type, suitable for copper conductors.
2. Locate main lugs properly at top or bottom depending where main feeder
enters.
F. Electrical Ratings: 120/240 volts, single phase, three wire, full neutral, Type NQ (as manufactured by Square D) or equal unless otherwise noted.
G. Manufacturers: General Electrical, Square D, Siemens, Cutler Hammer
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PANELBOARD INSTALLATION
A. Support panel cabinets independently to building structure with no weight bearing on conduits.
B. Securely anchor surface mounted panelboards to masonry walls with heavy duty machine bolt anchors.
C. Install recessed panelboards to allow cover to be drawn tight against wall to provide neat appearance.
D. Install panelboards so top breaker is no higher than 6'-0" above the floor.
E. Protect panelboards and cabinets during construction to prevent damage and
entry of dirt, paint, etc.
F. Adjacent panel cabinets shall be mounted in horizontal alignment at top. G. Wiring inside the equipment, panels and boxes shall be installed in a neat and
workmanlike manner.
3.02 BALANCING ELECTRICAL LOAD
Care shall be exercised in connecting various electrical loads to panelboards in order to arrive at reasonable balance between loads on each phase at each panelboard. It will be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to make tests and adjust loads at each
panelboard to result in a reasonably balanced load condition, satisfactory to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
13027 26 27 26 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 26 27 26 – WIRING DEVICES PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 26 05 01
B. Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Section 26 05 19
1.02 SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings or data sheets on all devices and plates used in accordance with Specification Section 26 05 01, General Provisions.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 SWITCHES
A. Specification grade switches shall be single pole, two pole, three way, four way, momentary, lighted or pilot lighted as required to control lights or other device
and shall be toggle or key operated, heavy duty, specification grade, 20 amp, 120/277 volt, quiet type and shall meet the requirements of Federal
Specifications WS-896-d and NEMA-WD-1. Assembly shall be by screw to mounting bridge. Screw into plastic base or riveting is not acceptable.
Manufacturers: (with unlighted handle) Hubbell #CS1221; Bryant #4901;
Cooper #2221; Pass & Seymour #20AC1; G.E. #5931; Leviton 1221-2
B. All switches shall have binding post terminals or pre-wired pigtails.
2.02 RECEPTACLES
A. All receptacles shall be grounding type and shall be Duplex 120 volt, 120/208 volt, single phase, 208/240 volt or 120/208 volt and three phases as scheduled
below or as indicated on the drawings.
B. Specification grade duplex receptacles shall be 15 or 20 ampere, 125 volts, with impact resistant face, wrap around steel mounted strap, and shall meet the
requirements of Federal Specification WC-596-e, NEMA WD-1 and UL-498. 1. 15 ampere may be used on general circuits containing 2 or more
receptacles. 2. Use 20 ampere on all dedicated circuits with only 1 receptacle.
C. Ground Fault (GFCI) Receptacles
1. Receptacles shall be duplex style with impact resistant face with built-in ground interrupter set to trip out at a 5 milliamp maximum ground fault.
Receptacles shall be rated 15 or 20 amperes, standard or feed-through as required.
2. Manufacturers: Hubbell #GF-5252I; Hubbell #GF-5352I; General Electric #TGTR115; General Electric #TGTR115F; Bryant #GFR Series;
Pass & Seymour #2091, Leviton 8899; Cooper XGF15; Cooper XGF20
13027 26 27 26 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
D. Weatherproof Duplex Receptacles (wet or damp label locations)
1. Weatherproof duplex receptacles shall be 20 ampere, GFCI type with an appropriate weatherproof, UV stabilized polycarbonate or stainless steel
gasketed coverplate with hinged lid that will allow cords to be installed while cover is completely closed and/or locked.
2. Manufacturer: Taymac #20310 Vertical Mount GFCI
E. All receptacles shall have binding post terminals.
F. Schedule of Receptacles, Plugs and Connectors
1. 125 volt, 20 amp, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding
NEMA CONFIGURATION 5-20R MANUFACTURER RECEPT.
a. Cooper Wiring Devices 5362
b. Bryant 5362 c. General Electric 5362
d. Hubbell HBL5362 e. Pass & Seymour 5362A
f. Leviton 5362a
2. Color of Wiring Devices a. All device numbers listed herein are brown.
b. All wiring devices in finished areas shall be selected by Architect and that correspond to catalog numbers inbefore
specified. c. All wiring devices in exposed boxes shall be selected by
Architect and that correspond to catalog numbers hereinbefore specified.
3. Device Plates
a. Provide proper plates on all switches, receptacles, special devices and outlets.
b. Plates in finished areas shall be smooth type, impact resistant, flexible material similar to nylon. Phenolic not approved. Color
shall be same as the device unless noted otherwise. c. All general use plates shall be of same manufacturer as devices.
d. Provide blank plates on all unused boxes. PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
A. Install switches and receptacles of adequate rating and capacity for loads served.
B. Install single (multi-gang) wall plates for outlet boxes with more than one device.
C. Receptacle Orientation: Vertically mounted receptacles shall be installed with
ground pin slot up; horizontally with neutral blade slot up.
13027 26 27 26 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
3.02 120 VOLT RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS
A. Perform operational testing.
B. Test receptacles with Woodhead #1750 or Hubbell #5200 Tester for proper connection of ground wire, correct polarity and faults in wire.
END OF SECTION
13027 26 27 26 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 26 28 00 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 26 28 00 – LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 26 05 01 B. Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Section 26 05 19
C. Panelboards: Section 26 24 16
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish and install material, labor and accessories required for the following pieces of
equipment as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
A. Circuit Breakers
B. Fuses (Low Voltage)
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings for distribution equipment in accordance with Specifications Section 26 05 01, General Provisions.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Contractor shall provide the following unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings. See "Panel Schedules" for minimum panelboard I.C. ratings. All breakers in these panels shall meet the minimum panelboard ratings. Series
integrated equipment rating is not acceptable.
Type of Service Frame Size I.C. Rating (Amperes) (Amperes)
1. 120/208 volt, single 15-60 10,000
phase lighting & power 2. 120/208 volt, three 15-60 10,000
phase power 3. 120/208 volt, three 70-200 22,000
phase power 4. 120/208 volt, three 225-400 42,000
phase power 5. 120/208 volt, three 450-1200 50,000 phase power
B. Provide circuit breakers where indicated of proper sizes for loads served.
C. Do not install two poles in single module.
D. Install multiple pole breakers with single trip mechanism. Do not install external mechanical ties between single pole breakers.
E. Manufacturers: General Electric; Siemens; Square "D"; Cutler-Hammer
13027 26 28 00 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.02 FUSES
A. 600 AMPS and Below
1. Protecting branch circuit panelboards and miscellaneous non-inductive loads: fuses to be current limiting type, single element with no time delay, 200,000 amp interrupting capacity. UL Class RK1. Buss Limitron KTN, KTS; Ferraz-Shawmut Amptrap A2K, A6K, Reliance
NCL-R, SCL-R or Littelfuse KLN-R, KLS-R. 2. Motor circuits and transformers: dual element type 200,000 amp
interrupting capacity. UL Class RK5. Buss Fusetron FRN-R, FRS-R, Ferraz-Shawmut Tri-Onic TR, TRS; Reliance ECN-R, ECS-R; or Littelfuse FLN-R, FLS-R.
PART 3: EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
13027 26 51 00 - PAGE1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 26 51 00 – INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary,
apply to this Section. B. See drawing E001 for luminaire schedule.
C. Luminaires/Ceiling Systems - See related sections for ceiling systems. Contractor to
coordinate luminaire trims, accessories and components to insure lighting and ceiling systems compatibility. See section 1.4 SUBMITTALS for Contractor submittal information/confirmation.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Scope: The extent of interior lighting required is indicated on the drawings and schedules and by the requirements of this Section and all related Electrical Specification Sections.
B. Furnish and install material, labor, and accessories required for the following pieces of
equipment as shown on the drawings and specified herein. C. Types of luminaires specified in this Section are for indoor use and include the following:
1. Fluorescent (FL)
2. Compact Fluorescent (CFL) Luminaire 3. Incandescent
4. LED 5. Exit Signs
6. Emergency Lighting Units D. Related Sections: Refer to other Electrical Specification sections for the following:
1. Section 26 51 00 - Luminaire Schedule
2. Section 26 56 00 – Exterior Luminaire Schedule 1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. No substitutions will be accepted after bids are received: The lighting equipment specified
herein has been carefully chosen for its ability to meet the luminous performance requirements of this project.
B. Luminaire Substitutions/Substitution Packages: CONTRACTOR may elect to submit to CDG Lighting a luminaire substitution package for review. All submittals must be in CDG
possession not later than ten (10) business days before the bid opening. All luminaire substitutions must meet the following requirements or will be rejected outright by CDG Lighting.
13027 26 51 00 - PAGE2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
C. Substitution submittals requirements: A luminaire substitution (substitution package) shall
consist of the following information or will be rejected outright by CDG Lighting: 1. Original luminaire cut sheet noting exact options / features of the proposed product
in detail/dimensional accuracy.
2. Color image of luminaire, in the configuration of the proposed product. 3. Dimensioned drawing of luminaire to an identified scale per sheet print size.
5. Electric data of the proposed luminaire with specified lamp, ballast, transformer,
driver or power supply. 6. REVIT Files – Provide face-based REVIT content files for each luminaire type being
substituted.
7. IES format photometric files for the proposed luminaire with specified lamp. 8. Photometric reports must list the actual candela values for the luminaires’ distribution in at least three planes. Copies of candela curves, footcandle and lumen tables and iso-footcandle contours must also include IES format electronic
photometric files identified by CDG Luminaire type.
9. Calculations - Substitutions for luminaire types impacting “calculation / light level sensitive” project rooms / areas must be submitted with a complete point by point calculation grid of the area utilizing the substituted luminaire and adjacent
luminaires contributing to the light levels. The point by point submittal must include a statistical chart showing all fixed and variable calculation factors including, but not
limited to: initial / maintained lamp lumens, all LLFs (Light Loss Factors), lamp/luminaire mounting heights, calculation plane height(s), surface reflectance’s, complete Luminaire model numbers and calculation point spacing. Calculations will
be rejected outright by CDG without this information. CDG reserves the right to obtain an electronic copy of the calculation files and the substitute luminaire IES
files. CDG may run a comparison calculation model using AGI. 10. ASHRAE - The project is required to conform to the lighting requirements of
ASHRAE / IESNA 90.1 / 2007. D. All substitution submittals shall be provided to CDG Lighting in two formats:
1. Hard/paper copy: (1) hard / paper copies shall be provided to CDG Lighting in a
green 3-ring binder. DVD/CD of all content in binder shall be included in each binder.
2. Electronically posted files share be delivered thru Owner / Architect / Contractor established communication channels. No files shall be directly delivered to CDG
Lighting by vendors or their agents.
13027 26 51 00 - PAGE3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
H. Lighting Designer Fee Compensation
1. CONTRACTOR will be responsible for all costs (architecture time, CDG Lighting time, engineering time, manufacturer’s costs, distributor costs, etc.) incurred to
replace installed lighting equipment not approved by CDG Lighting.
2. CONTRACTOR shall pay professional fees at current standard hourly rates and reimburse expenses directly to all design professionals for time spent reviewing substitutions proposed by the Contractor after the bid has been awarded. If
payment by the Contractor is not made within 60 days of invoice date, the Owner shall deduct the amount due from subsequent payments to the Contractor in
order to reimburse designers. 3. Additional fees will be required for all submittals / substitution reviews exceeding (3)
shop drawing submittals per luminaire.
1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of the related section. B. Coordination: All luminaire drawings shall be coordinated with the drawings and details of
the Architectural, Structural, Electrical, Mechanical, and other related trades to assure a perfect and efficient installation.
C. No Variations: No variations from the general arrangement and details indicated on the drawings shall be made on the shop drawings unless required to suit the actual conditions
on the premises, and then only with the written acceptance by the architect. All variations must be clearly marked on the drawings submitted for approval.
D. Shop Drawings: Submit legible, dimensioned drawings of specified lighting assemblies including:
1. Luminaire Shop Drawings - Luminaire shop drawings shall clearly indicate:
a. Specified luminaire accessories, finishes, components on each sheet. If only the catalog number is provided without graphically identifying the exact
luminaire accessories, finishes, components on each sheet, the luminaire type will be REJECTED AS NOTED.
b. Modified or custom luminaires require a factory produced shop drawing. Standard luminaire cut sheet annotated/noted as “modified” will not be
permitted (even for lamping modification) the luminaire type will be REJECTED AS NOTED.
c. No hand written notes are permitted on lighting shop drawing submittals or the luminaire type will be REJECTED AS NOTED.
d. Catalog cuts lacking sufficient detail to indicate compliance with contract
documents will be REJECTED AS NOTED.
13027 26 51 00 - PAGE4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
e. Luminaires / ceiling systems - See other specification sections for ceiling
systems. 1) Contractor responsible to coordinate luminaire and ceiling systems
compatibility of hardware, trims and materials.
2) Ceiling / Luminaire Trim Contractor coordination must be noted as
verified on each shop drawing by Contractor for luminaire in final approved/purchased ceiling type, which may be a ceiling system different than originally specified.
3) One luminaire type may be installed in multiple ceiling types requiring the following submittals.
a) A separate cut sheet must be provided for each luminaire and unique ceiling system noting coordination.
b) A spreadsheet/matrix of luminaire types and ceiling types
coordinating above details.
4) Contractor to provide Lighting Manufacturers with both CAD and
face based REVIT files of the ceiling systems for luminaire compatibility/integration/coordination.
2. Lamp shop drawings - “Lamp Schedule” matrix shall be submitted noting luminaire types and the lamp type designation / lamp manufacturer provided in each luminaire
type. One (typical) lamp cut sheet for each unique lamp type shall be submitted for review / approval.
3. Ballast shop drawings – “Ballast Schedule” matrix shall be submitted noting luminaire types and the ballast type designation / ballast manufacturer provided in
each luminaire type. One (typical) ballast cut sheet for each unique lamp type shall be submitted for review / approval.
4. Booklet format - Shop drawings shall be submitted in booklet form organized with a separate sheet for each luminaire type, ballast type, lamp type, and Contractor’s
luminaires/Ceiling Systems compatibility confirmation assembled in order of luminaire “type” designation. 5. Submittal format - Submittals shall be provided to CDG in two formats:
1. Hard/paper copy (3 ring binders). (1) hard/paper copies shall be provided to CDG Lighting. DVD/CD of all content in binder shall be included in each
binder. 2. Electronically posted files shall be delivered thru
Owner/Architect/Contractor established communication channels. No files shall be directly delivered to the CDG or EE Team by vendors or their
agents. E. Ballast Location Submittal Drawings: Provide shop drawings clearly noting the location of
multiple lamp ballasts in all continuous runs of fluorescent luminaires for CDG Representative Review. The fewest available multiple lamp ballasts shall be used in each
fluorescent luminaire continuous run. These submittal drawings are required at time of Luminaire Shop Drawing submittal review to CDG.
13027 26 51 00 - PAGE5 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
F. Luminaire ordering schedules and shop drawing schedules: All lighting equipment shall be ordered in a timely manner. The Contractor shall provide a spreadsheet to CDG Lighting
with the following detailed information organized by luminaire type: 1. Originally quoted delivery dates (6-8 weeks, etc) from time of Bidding.
2. Shop drawings delivery dates to CDG Lighting.
3. Dates when equipment orders are placed/finalized per approved shop drawings.
4. Final product delivery schedules.
5. Long lead items - At time of original quote/bid, Contractor is required to identify any long lead lighting items and identify in the master project construction schedule for trade coordination.
G. Battery and charger data shall be submitted for emergency lighting units.
H. Electrical ratings and photometric data with certified results of independent laboratory tests for luminaires and specified lamps. I. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results specified in Part 3 of this section.
J. Maintenance manual: Refer to Section 26 05 01 for general requirements. At the
completion of the project, the luminaire manufacturer shall furnish to the owner a recommended lighting maintenance manual. Each maintenance manual shall include:
1. Tools Required.
2. Types of cleaners to be used. 3. Replacement parts identification lists.
4. Final as built shop drawings.
K. Shop drawings and samples requested shall be submitted for approval before fabrication. Any material produced prior to the approval of shop drawings or samples, and not in
conformance with the Contract Documents, shall be disapproved with the Contractor bearing full responsibility and cost.
L. No variation from the general arrangement and details indicated on the drawings shall be made on the shop drawings unless required to suit the actual conditions on the
premises, and then only with the written acceptance of CDG. All variations must be clearly marked as such on the drawings submitted for approval.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Standards: Materials, equipment, and appurtenances as well as workmanship provided under this section shall conform to the highest commercial standard as specified and as
indicated on drawings. B. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that
are listed and labeled by UL where available.
13027 26 51 00 - PAGE6 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide Luminaires, emergency lighting units, and accessory
components specified in this section that are listed and labeled for their indicated use and installation conditions on Project.
1. Special Listing and Labeling: Provide Luminaires for use in damp and wet locations that are specifically listed and labeled for such use.
2. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. The Contractor is responsible for confirming compatibility and interface of other materials with the luminaire and ceiling system and shall provide proper luminaire extender rings,
plaster frames, flange kits, etc. for ceiling system in which it will be installed. Report discrepancies to the Architect, and defer ordering until clarified.
B. Coordinate with the ceiling contractor in locating recessed and surface mounted luminaires. C. Coordinate with divisions 20, 22, and 23 to avoid conflicts between luminaires, supports,
fittings, and mechanical equipment.
D. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires and suspension systems with other construction that penetrates the ceiling or is supported by them including HVAC equipment, fire suppression systems, and partition assemblies.
1.7 WARRANTY:
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty for Batteries: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to replace rechargeable system batteries that fail in materials or workmanship
within the specified warranty period. The Special Warranty Period on rechargeable system batteries shall be not less than 10 years after date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty
shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for last 9 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in the Luminaire Schedule on the drawings or follow the substitution requirements for CDG
Lighting consideration.
13027 26 51 00 - PAGE7 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.2 LUMINAIRES AND LUMINAIRE COMPONENTS, GENERAL:
A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners, and edges. B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, except as indicated. Form and support to prevent warping
and sagging.
C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating conditions, and arranged to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and
when secured in operating position. Face plates or frames of recessed luminaires that serve as ceiling trim and swing to allow access to the interior of the luminaire shall be
gasketed. D. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectance as follows:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
4. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or water white, annealed crystal glass:
1. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
2. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inch (3 mm) minimum; except where greater
thickness is indicated. E. Fluorescent Luminaires: Conform to UL 1598.
F. Provide lampholders for the proper performance of lamps in luminaire, UL listed, of a type designed and acceptable for the purpose and bearing the manufacturers’ name or
trademark, type, number, and rating on each item. G. Housings shall be constructed so all electrical components are easily accessible and
replaceable without removing them from their mountings.
H. Light Leaks between ceiling trims of recessed lighting equipment and the ceilings will not be tolerated. If Luminaire is used in partials transparent ceiling, light leaks above the ceiling line will not be tolerated.
I. Adjustable angled Luminaires that have beam angle adjustment shall have reliable angle
locking devices. 2.3 SUPPORTS:
A. Luminaire Support Components: Comply with Electrical Specification section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods." All Luminaire Support Components shall be individually supported from the structure above and shall not be supported directly from a suspended ceiling system. Contractor shall coordinate exact mounting hardware necessary for
installation based on the specified ceiling systems and shall verify on shop drawing submittals.
13027 26 51 00 - PAGE8 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
B. Support lighting track every 2 feet from above the structure.
C. Suspend or support independently of the ceiling construction all recessed luminaires which are not the lay-in grid type and all surface type luminaires in or on the ceiling from the structural members above.
D. Suspended pendant mounted luminaires on structural channel supported from structural
members above. E. Aircraft Cable: Supplied by the luminaire manufacturer. Fully adjustable aircraft cable shall
be provided in lengths appropriate for mounting heights noted on the Construction Drawings.
F. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (12-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fitting and ceiling canopy. Finish same as Luminaire.
G. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (12-mm) steel tubes with single canopy arranged to
mount a single Luminaire. Finish same as Luminaire. H. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. I. Hook and Chain Hanger: Integrated assembly matched to Luminaire and line voltage and
equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and chain hanger kit.
J. Where pendants and rods exceed 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2.4 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS (T5, T5HO, & T8): A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Lutron
2. Advance 3. GE
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Ballast shall be Program Start. 2. Ballast shall contain auto restart circuitry in order to restart lamps without restarting power.
3. Ballast shall operate from 50/60Hz input source of 120V thru 277V with sustained variations of +/- 10%.
4. Ballast shall be high frequency type and operate at a frequency above 42kHz to avoid interference with infrared devices and eliminate visible flicker. 5. Minimum Power Factor: 98 percent or greater for primary lamp.
6. Ballast Factor: Minimum 1.0 for primary lamp. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
8. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of Ballast Current: Less than 10 percent. 9. Ballast shall have Class A sound rating. 10. Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of 0°F. 11. Ballast shall provide Lamp EOL(end of life) Protection circuit. 12. Ballast shall tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions.
13. Parallel lamp circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.
13027 26 51 00 - PAGE9 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
C. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Ballast shall be UL listed, Class P certified. 2. Comply with ANSI C62.41 Category A for transient protection.
3. Comply with ANSI C82.11 4. Comply with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and regulations,
Title 47 CFR part 18 non consumer Class A for EMI/RFI (conducted and adiated). 5. Comply with UL Type CC rating. 6. Comply with NEMA 410 for in-rush current limits.
2.5 COMPACT FLUORESCENT BALLASTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Advance Centium Series. 2. Osram Sylvania Quicktronic Series.
3. GE Ultrastart Series. B. Performance Requirements:
1. Continuous dimming from 100% to 5% relative light output for T4 compact and T5
twin tube lamps. 2. Ballast shall be Programmed Start. 3. Ballast shall contain auto restart circuitry in order to restart lamps without
restarting power. 4. Ballast shall operate from 50/60Hz input source of 120V thru 277V with sustained
variations of +/- 10%. 5. Ballast shall be high frequency type and operate at a frequency above 42kHz to avoid interference with infrared devices and eliminate visible flicker.
6. Minimum Power Factor: 98 percent or greater for primary lamp. 7. Ballast Factor: Minimum 1.0 for primary lamp.
8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 9. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of Ballast Current: Less than 10 percent. 10. Ballast shall have Class A sound rating. 11. Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of 0°F. 12. Ballast shall provide Lamp EOL(end of life) Protection circuit.
13. Ballast shall tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions.
C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Ballast shall be UL listed, Class P certified.
2. Comply with ANSI C62.41 Category A for transient protection. 3. Comply with ANSI C82.11
4. Comply with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and regulations, Title 47 CFR part 18 non consumer Class A for EMI/RFI (conducted and radiated).
5. Comply with UL Type CC rating. 6. Comply with NEMA 410 for in-rush current limits.
13027 26 51 00 - PAGE10 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.6 LED DRIVERS
A. Complete System: The contractor shall furnish the completed LED-based lighting system. A `Complete System’ shall refer to an LED Luminaire and any power conditioning and/or
interface equipment functioning together as a working unit.
B. Thermal Management: The LED Luminaire manufacturer shall provide appropriate thermal management technology to ensure that temperatures do not exceed the limits established by the LED chip manufacturer. LED driver performance and compatibility with other light
Luminaire components to be the tested and verified by the light Luminaire manufacturer.
C. LED Luminaires: LED Luminaires shall provide a continuous light output. Luminaire output and dimensions shall be in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications. LED Luminaire lumen output will be in accordance with the specifications and shall not
depreciate more than 20% after 10,000 hours of use. Rated lumen output for LED Luminaires to operate in ambient temperature of -20 degrees Celsius and +50 degrees
Celsius White LEDs to have a minimum life of 50,000 hours and color LEDs to a minimum of 1000,000 hours. Color changing Luminaires shall be capable of 8-bit control of differently colored LEDs to produce the specified range of colors. All LED Luminaire types shall be provided with complete photometric data including lumen output, lumen depreciation, life, and distribution.
D. Performance Assessment: The performance of LED Luminaires shall be evaluated and
reported according to IESDNA standards LM-79 ‘Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products’ and LM-80 ‘Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources’. The results of such evaluation shall be reported by the LED Luminaire
manufacturer.
E. Performance Requirements: 1. Driver shall operate from 60 Hz input source of 120V thru 277V with sustained
variations of +/- 10% with no damage to the driver. 2. Driver output shall be regulated to +/- 5% across published load range.
3. Power Factor: Greater than 90%. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 20% 5. Sound Rating: Class A.
6. Minimum operating temperature: -40 deg F. 7. Ballast shall tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions.
8. Dimmable drivers shall be controlled by Class 2 low voltage 0-10V DC controller. B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Driver shall be UL listed, Class 2 Outdoor.
2. Comply with ANSI C62.41 Category A for transient protection. 3. Comply with ANSI C82.11 4. Comply with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and regulations,
Title 47 CFR part 18 non consumer Class A for EMI/RFI (conducted and radiated).
13027 26 51 00 - PAGE11 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.7 EXIT SIGNS:
A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Mount on standard 4 inch outlet boxes, unless otherwise noted.
C. Internally Lighted Signs 1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
2.10 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS:
A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.
1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage
drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal
voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal
power and demonstrates unit operability. 5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle
charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 6. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or Luminaires. 7. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval (per local code/minutes) when power is restored after an outage.
8. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is
annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED. 2.12 LAMPS:
A. All lamps in a source group must be provided/installed from the same manufacturer. A different manufacturer may be provided for each source group. Approved manufacturers
are:
1. General Electric 2. North American Philips 3. Osram/Sylvania
B. Source groups are defined as incandescent, low voltage MR-16 incandescent, fluorescent,
metal halide and high pressure sodium. Linear T5, “biax”, and compact fluorescent lamps shall all be provided by the same lamp manufacturer.
C. LED “lamps” and drivers are not all required to be provided by the same LED lamp supplier. It is understood each lighting manufacture will source LEDs from different sub-
vendors/suppliers. D. Comply with ANSI C78 series that is applicable to each type of lamp.
13027 26 51 00 - PAGE12 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
E. Non-compact Fluorescent Lamp Life: Rated average is 20,000 hours at 3 hours per start when used on rapid start circuits.
F. Fluorescent lamps shall have a minimum of 82 CRI (Color Rendering Index) and a Color Temperature (degrees Kelvin) as specified in LAMP SCHEDULE.
G. Fluorescent lamps to have `twist and lock’ rotary socket.
H. Lamp Seasoning – All fluorescent and metal halide lamps shall be seasoned/burned-in according to the lamp manufacturer’s requirements. Fluorescent lamps with dimming
ballasts shall be seasoned/burned-in according to the more stringent requirements of both the ballast manufacturer and the lamp manufacturer.
I. LED Lamps: Luminaire manufacturer shall be required to provide adequate heat sinking and thermal management. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide products by one of the following: Lumileds, Osram Sylvania, Cree, Nichia, or as noted in the Luminaire schedule.
1. White Light LEDS – Color temperature as specified. Minimum rated lamp life 50,000 hours. 2. Colored LEDS - RGB LED systems to be controlled as noted. Minimum rated
lamp life 70,000 hours.
2.14 FINISHES: A. Manufacturer's standard, except as otherwise indicated, applied over corrosion-resistant
treatment or primer, free of streaks, runs, holidays, stains, blisters, and similar defects.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Set units plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, and secure according to manufacturer's written instructions and/or approved Shop Drawings.
1. Support Luminaires according to requirements of Electrical Specification section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” and local seismic code requirements.
B. Mounting: Mounting heights specified or indicated are to bottom of Luminaire for suspended and ceiling-mounted Luminaires and to center of Luminaire for wall-mounted Luminaires
unless otherwise noted.
1. Where mounting heights are not noted on the Construction Drawings, obtain the exact mounting height for lighting Luminaires from CDG in writing, prior to electrical “rough-in” installation. 2. Coordinate rough-in with the type, style, and pattern of the ceiling wall material
being installed.
3. All light Luminaires installed without CDG approved mounting height shall be relocated at the Contractor’s expense.
13027 26 51 00 - PAGE13 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
C. All recessed downlights (LED, compact fluorescent, etc.) must be installed so that the
bottom of the throat is even with the finished ceiling plane. 1. The overlapping flange shall be fit flush to the ceiling plane/throat.
2. No light leak shall be visible.
3. All miscellaneous hardware and ceiling modifications necessary to accomplish the above shall be provided.
4. Do not install luminaires or parts such as finishing plates and trims for recessed
luminaires until all plastering and painting that may marr luminaire finish has been completed.
D. Recessed and Semi-recessed Luminaires Supported to Structure: Luminaires must not be supported from the suspended ceiling support system if the Luminaire weight is more than
the specified ceiling manufacturer’s weight limits or in excess of 50 pounds or in violation of governing building codes, earthquake codes and ordinances. E. Grid-Type Fluorescent Luminaires must be supported by a minimum of 2 rods or wires from the structure to the light Luminaire and secured to the luminaire within 6 inches of the
luminaire corners or as per governing building codes, earthquake codes and ordinances.
F. Coordinate with other trades so luminaires are properly aligned with diffusers, grilles, speakers, etc. If necessary relocate luminaires as directed so there will be no conflict with the other trades’ equipment.
G. Install earthquake clips for all lay-in grid type fluorescent luminaires, securely fastened to
ceiling grid members, a minimum of one clip at or near each luminaire corner. 1. “Bend-out” style earthquake clips integral to the upper housing are only acceptable
if permitted in writing by local building codes. This shall be done in addition to the light Luminaires being supported to structure with by a minimum of 2 rods or wires.
H. Luminaires of Sizes Less than Ceiling Grid: Center in acoustical panel or as noted on architectural ceiling plan and detail drawings.
1. Do not support Luminaires by ceiling acoustical panels or the ceiling suspension
system. 2. Support Luminaires by a minimum of 2 rods or wires from the structure to at least
two 3/4-inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning the ceiling suspension system supports.
3. The two channels shall be securely attached to the ceiling suspension system supports at all (4) four channel to grid intersection points with tie-down wire.
13027 26 51 00 - PAGE14 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
I. Pendant Mounted Luminaires: All pendant mounted luminaires shall be supported from the structure above at each suspension point and shall not be supported directly from a
suspended ceiling system or drywall ceiling system. 1. Contractor shall coordinate exact mounting hardware necessary for installation
based on the specified ceiling systems and selected luminaire manufacturer.
2. Shop drawings shall be submitted for all pendant mounted luminaire lengths clearly noting exact suspension points to the ceiling and proposed suspension components.
3. Shop drawings shall clearly indicated location of luminaire power supply and/or
ballast(s). 3.2 CONNECTIONS:
A. Ground lighting units. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding
connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replaced damaged luminaires and components.
1. Give advance notice of dates and times for field tests.
B. Provide instruments to make and record test results.
C. Tests: Verify normal operation of each luminaire after luminaires have been installed and circuits have been energized with normal power source. Interrupt electrical energy to demonstrate proper operation of emergency lighting installation. Include the following
information in tests of emergency lighting equipment:
1. Duration of supply. 2. Low battery voltage shutdown.
3. Normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.
4. Low supply voltage transfer.
D. Replace or repair malfunctioning luminaires and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until all units operate properly.
E. Report results of tests.
F. Replace luminaires that show evidence of corrosion during Project warranty period.
3.4 LAMPING & LAMP REPLACEMENT A. Install proper number, type, and size lamp in luminaire as indicated on drawings.
B. Relamp all luminaires in service during construction with new lamps prior to turning over
the premises to the owner or give equivalent of new lamping to the Owner.
13027 26 51 00 - PAGE15 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
3.5 ATTIC STOCK LAMPS
A. General: Provide attic stock of lamps at time of substantial completion to meet the following:
1. Provide attic stock lamps amounting to 15 percent (but not less than 6 lamps of
each lamp type and wattage specified. 2. LED Replaceable Lamp Modules - Provide attic stock lamps amounting to 10
percent (but not less than 6 lamp modules and 6 drivers of each lamp type and wattage specified).
3. LED Non-Replaceable Lamp Modules - For luminaires where LED modules/boards are not field-replaceable by the Owner, provide attic stock consisting of entire LED
Luminaire (and drivers) in quantities of 10 percent (but not less than 2 of each Luminaire).
3.6 CLEAN LUMINAIRES A. Clean: During construction, installation, clean luminaires of dirt and debris to insure proper performance and operational temperatures.
B. At time of Substantial Completion, all luminaires must be clean of dirt and debris.
C. Protection: Protect installed luminaires from damage during the construction period.
1.7 ADJUST LUMINAIRES
A. Adjust: Aim, adjust, focus, and lock, all adjustable lighting units under the supervision of the Lighting Consultant. The Lighting Consultant shall indicate the number of crews required. All aiming and adjusting shall be carried out after the entire installation is
complete. Furnish all ladders, scaffolds, etc. required at the direction of the lighting consultant. As aiming and adjusting is completed, locking mechanisms such as
setscrews, bolts, and nuts shall be tightened securely. B. Targeting shall take place after sunset at a time designated by CDG.
C. All labor and material costs made necessary by this requirement shall be included as part
of the base bid.
END OF SECTION 26 51 00
13027 26 51 00 - PAGE16 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 SECTION 26 56 00 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 26 56 00 – EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary, apply to this Section.
A. See drawing sheet E001 LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE for all luminaires specified by Circle
Design Group Lighting.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Scope: The extent of exterior lighting required is indicated on the drawings and sched-ules and by the requirements of this Section, and all related Electrical Specification Sec-
tions.
B. Furnish and install material, labor, and accessories required for the following pieces of equipment as shown on the drawings as specified herein.
C. Types of luminaires specified in this Section are for outdoor use and include the follow-
ing:
1. LED
D. Related Sections: Refer to other Electrical Specification sections for the following:
1. See drawing set for luminaire schedule. 2. Section 26 05 33 RACEWAYS & BOXES
3. Section 26 05 19 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. No substitutions will be accepted after bids are received. The lighting equipment specified
herein has been carefully chosen for its ability to meet the luminous performance requirements of this project.
B. Luminaire Substitutions / Substitution Packages: Contractor may elect to submit to CDG
Lighting a luminaire substitution package for review. All submittals must be in CDG Lighting possession not later than ten (10) days prior to bid date. All luminaire substitutions
must meet or exceed the following Substitution Submittal Requirements or will be rejected outright by CDG Lighting.
C. Substitution Submittal Requirements: A luminaire substitution (substitution package) shall
consist of the following information or will be rejected outright by CDG Lighting:
1. Original luminaire cut sheet noting exact options/features of the proposed product in detail / dimensional accuracy.
2. Color image of luminaire, in the configuration of the proposed product.
3. Dimensioned drawing of luminaire to an identified scale per sheet print size.
4. Electric data of the proposed luminaire with specified lamp, ballast, transformer,
driver or power supply.
13027 SECTION 26 56 00 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
5. IES format photometric files for the proposed luminaire with specified lamp.
6. Photometric reports must list the actual candela values for the luminaires’
distribution in at least three planes. Copies of candela curves, footcandle and lumen tables and iso-footcandle contours must also include IES format electronic
photometric files identified by CDG Lighting for each proposed luminaire type.
7. Calculations - Substitutions for luminaire types impacting “calculation / light level sensitive” project rooms/areas must be submitted with a complete point by point
calculation grid of the area utilizing the substituted luminaire and adjacent luminaires contributing to the light levels. The point by point submittal must include
a statistical chart showing all fixed and variable calculation factors including, but not limited to: initial / maintained lamp lumens, all LLFs (Light Loss Factors),
lamp/luminaire mounting heights, calculation plane height(s), surface reflectances, complete luminaire model numbers and calculation point spacing. Calculations will
be rejected outright by CDG Lighting without this information. CDG Lighting reserves the right to obtain an electronic copy of the calculation files and the
substitute luminaire IES files. CDG Lighting may run a comparison calculation model using AGi.
8. ASHRAE - The project is required to conform to the lighting requirements of
ASHRAE / IESNA 90.1 / 2007.
G. All substitution submittals shall be provided to CDG Lighting in two formats:
1. Hard / paper copy: (1) one complete sets of hard/paper copy shall be provided to CDG Lighting in a green 3-ring binder. Included DVD/CD of all content in binder.
2. Electronically posted files will be delivered thru Owner / Architect / Contractor
established communication channels. No files shall be directly delivered to the CDG Lighting by vendors or their agents.
H. CDG Lighting Fee Compensation
1. CONTRACTOR will be responsible for all costs (architecture time, CDG Lighting
time, engineering time, manufacturer’s costs, distributor costs, etc.) incurred to replace installed lighting equipment not approved by CDG Lighting.
2. CONTRACTOR shall pay professional fees at current standard hourly rates and
reimburse expenses directly to all design professionals for time spent reviewing substitutions proposed by the Contractor after the bid has been awarded. If
payment by the Contractor is not made within 60 days of invoice date, the Owner shall deduct the amount due from subsequent payments to the Contractor in
order to reimburse designers.
3. Additional fees will be required for all submittals / substitution reviews exceeding (3) shop drawing submittals per luminaire.
13027 SECTION 26 56 00 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of the related section.
B. Coordination: All luminaire drawings shall be coordinated with the drawings and details of the Architectural, Structural, Electrical, Mechanical, and other related trades to assure a
perfect and efficient installation.
C. No Variations: No variations from the general arrangement and details indicated on the drawings shall be made on the shop drawings unless required to suit the actual conditions
on the premises, and then only with the written acceptance by the architect. All variations must be clearly marked on the drawings submitted for approval.
D. Product Data describing luminaires, lamps, ballasts, and emergency lighting units.
1. Luminaire Shop Drawings: Submit legible, dimensioned drawings of specified lighting
assemblies including:
a. Specified luminaire accessories, finishes, components on each sheet. If only the catalog number is provided without graphically identifying the
exact Luminaire accessories, finishes, components on each sheet, the luminaire type will be REJECTED AS NOTED.
b. Modified or custom luminaires require a factory produced shop drawing.
Standard Luminaire cut sheet annotated/noted as “modified” will not be permitted (even for lamping modification) the luminaire type will be
REJECTED AS NOTED.
c. No hand written notes are permitted on lighting shop drawing submittals or the luminaire type will be REJECTED AS NOTED.
d. Catalog cuts lacking sufficient detail to indicate compliance with contract
documents with be REJECTED AS NOTED.
e. Lamps / ballasts:
a) Lamp shop drawings: “Lamp Schedule” matrix shall be submitted noting luminaire types and the lamp type designation / lamp
manufacturer provided in each luminaire type. One (typical) lamp cut sheet for each unique lamp type shall be submitted for review /
approval.
b) Ballast shop drawings: “Ballast Schedule” matrix shall be
submitted noting luminaire types and the ballast type designation/ballast manufacturer provided in each luminaire type.
One (typical) ballast cut sheet for each unique ballast type shall be submitted for review/approval.
c) Booklet format: Shop drawings shall be submitted in booklet form organized with a separate sheet for each grouping of luminaire,
ballast matrix and typical cut sheets, lamp matrix and typical cut sheets, and Contractor’s Luminaires / Ceiling Systems
compatibility confirmation assembled in alpha-numeric order of luminaire “type” designation.
13027 SECTION 26 56 00 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
d) Submittal format: Submittals shall be provided to CDG Lighting in two formats:
a. (1) one complete set of hard/paper copy shall be provided to CDG Lighting in green 3-ring binder. DVD/CD of all
content in binder shall be included in each binder.
b. Electronically posted files will be delivered thru Owner /
Architect / Contractor established communication channels. No files shall be directly delivered to CDG
Lighting by vendors or their agents
2. Luminaire Ordering Schedules and Shop Drawing Schedules: All lighting equipment shall be ordered in a timely manner. The Contractor shall provide a spreadsheet to CDG
Lighting with the following detailed information organized by luminaire type:
1. Originally quoted delivery dates (6-8 weeks, etc) from time of Bidding.
2. Shop drawings delivery dates to CDG Lighting.
3. Dates when equipment orders are placed / finalized per approved shop drawings.
4. Final product delivery schedules.
5. Long Lead Items - At time of original quote/bid, Contractor is required to identify any long lead lighting items and identify in the master project construction schedule
for trade coordination.
E. Battery and charger data shall be submitted for emergency lighting units.
F. Electrical Ratings and Photometric Data with certified results of independent laboratory tests for luminaires and specified lamps.
G. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results specified in Part 3 of this section
H. Maintenance Manual: Refer to Section 26 05 01 for general requirements. At the completion of the project, the luminaire manufacturer shall furnish to the owner a
recommended maintenance manual. Each maintenance manual shall include:
1. Tools Required.
2. Types of cleaners to be used.
a) Replacement parts identification lists.
b) Final as built shop drawings.
I. No variation from the general arrangement and details indicated on the drawings shall be made on the shop drawings unless required to suit the actual conditions on the prem-
ises, and then only with the written acceptance of CDG Lighting. All variations must be clearly marked as such on the drawings submitted for approval.
13027 SECTION 26 56 00 – PAGE 5 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Standards: Materials, equipment, and appurtenances as well as workmanship provided under this section shall conform to the highest commercial standard as specified and as
indicated on drawings.
B. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are listed and labeled by UL where available.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide luminaires, emergency lighting units, and accessory components specified in this section that are listed and labeled for their indicated use and
installation conditions on Project.
D. Special Listing and Labeling: Provide luminaires for use in damp and wet locations that are specifically listed and labeled for such use.
E. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
F. Coordinate luminaires, mounting hardware, and trim with adjacent materials and other
items, including work of other trades, required for installation. Confirm compatibility of luminaires with the final, as-ordered mounting materials/surfaces prior to ordering all
luminaires. See SUBMITTAL section for required documentation.
G. Codes and Standards: Provide luminaires and appurtenances conforming to the following:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
2. Conform to applicable sections of American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. B 429, "Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural
Pipe and Tube."
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. FA 1 Outdoor Floodlighting Equipment b. OD 3 Physical and Electrical Interchangeability of Photo Control De-
vices
4. Conform to applicable sections of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70, "National Electrical Code."
5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a. 57 Electric Lighting Luminaire
6. IES Compliance: Comply with IES RP-8, 19, 20, and PB-15 pertaining to exteri-
or, parking, and roadway lighting practices and Luminaires.
1.6 WARRANTY:
A. General Warranty: The warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
13027 SECTION 26 56 00 – PAGE 6 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance of requirements, provide the products specified in the Luminaire Schedule.
2.2 LUMINAIRES
A. General: Provide luminaires of the sizes, types and ratings indicated, complete with
housings, lenses, louvers, refractors, lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, ballasts, starters, ignitors, mounting brackets or hardware with adjusting means and wiring.
B. Housings: Provide luminaires with rigidly formed, weather and light tight enclosures that
will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide housings free from burrs, sharp edges or corners. Provide filter/breather to minimize dirt buildup.
C. Hinged Lens Doors: Provide captive hinged doors, operating freely, to allow lamp instal-
lation and removal without the use of tools. Equip door mechanism to preclude acci-dental falling of the door when opening or closing or when secured in the closed position.
Provide for door removal for cleaning or replacing lens.
D. Exposed Hardware: Provide stainless steel hinges, latches, fasteners, and exposed hardware to prevent corrosion of hardware or the staining of adjacent surfaces. Provide
captive hardware on all exposed fasteners.
E. Interior Reflecting Surfaces: Use interior formed and supported light reflecting surfaces having reflectances of not less than 85 percent for white surfaces, 83 percent for specular
surfaces, and 75 percent for specular diffuse surfaces.
F. Lenses and Refractors:
1. Plastic: Plastic for clear lenses and diffusers shall be formed of colorless 100% virgin acrylic. The quality of the raw material shall meet or exceed IES, SPI, and
NEMA specifications and shall not exceed a yellowness factor of 3 after 2,000 hours of exposure in the Fade-meter or as tested by an independent laboratory.
Acrylic plastic lenses and diffusers shall be properly cast, molded, or extruded, as specified and shall remain free of any dimensional instability, discoloration, embrit-
tlement, or loss of light transmittance for at least 10 years.
2. Glass: Glass used for exterior glass lenses shall use tempered Borosilicate glass unless otherwise noted.
3. Mechanical: All lenses, louvers, or other light diffusing elements shall be remova-
ble , but positively held so that hinging or other normal motion does not cause them to drop out.
4. Cleaning: Lenses shall be turned over to the owner clean and free of dust.
13027 SECTION 26 56 00 – PAGE 7 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
G. Metal Finishes: Provide finishes of the color and type Indicated and having the following
properties:
1. Protection of metal from corrosion - 5-year warranty against perforation or ero-sion of the finish from weathering.
2. Color retention - 5-year warranty against fading, staining, or chalking from weathering, including solar radiation.
3. Uniformity - Provide finish of uniform thickness and color, free from streaks,
stains or orange peel texture.
4. Lamp Sockets: Provide lamp sockets complying with applicable UL and ANSI requirements.
2.3 LED LIGHTING SYSTEMS
A. Complete System: The contractor shall furnish the completed LED-based lighting system. A `Complete System’ shall refer to an LED Luminaire and any power conditioning and/or
interface equipment functioning together as a working unit.
B. Thermal Management: The LED Luminaire manufacturer shall provide appropriate thermal management technology to ensure that temperatures do not exceed the limits established
by the LED chip manufacturer.
C. LED Luminaires: LED Luminaires shall provide a continuous light output. Luminaire out-put and dimensions shall be in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications.
LED Luminaire lumen output will be in accordance with the specifications and shall not de-preciate more than 20% after 10,000 hours of use. Rated lumen output for LED Lumi-
naires to operate in ambient temperature of -20 degrees Celsius and +50 degrees Celsius White LEDs to have a minimum life of 50,000 hours and color LEDs to a minimum of
70,000 hours. All LED Luminaire types shall be provided with complete photometric data including lumen output, lumen depreciation, life, and distribution.
D. Performance Assessment: The performance of LED Luminaires shall be evaluated ac-
cording to IESDNA standards LM-79 ‘Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products’ and LM-80 ‘Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light
Sources’. The results of such evaluation shall be reported by the LED Luminaire manufac-turer.
E. Performance Requirements:
1. Driver shall operate from 60 Hz input source of 120V thru 277V with sustained
variations of +/- 10% with no damage to the driver. 2. Driver output shall be regulated to +/- 5% across published load range.
3. Power Factor: Greater than 90%. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 20%
5. Sound Rating: Class A. 6. Minimum operating temperature: -40 deg F.
7. Ballast shall tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions. 8. Dimmable drivers shall be controlled by Class 2 low voltage 0-10V DC controller.
13027 SECTION 26 56 00 – PAGE 8 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
F. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Driver shall be UL listed, Class 2 Outdoor..
2. Comply with ANSI C62.41 Category A for transient protection. 3. Comply with ANSI C82.11
4. Comply with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and regulations, Title 47 CFR part 18 non consumer Class A for EMI/RFI (conducted and
Radiated).
2.4 FINISHES:
A. Manufacturer's standard, except as otherwise indicated, applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer, free of streaks, runs, holidays, stains, blisters, and similar defects.
2.5 LUMINAIRE MOUNTING
A. General: Provide corrosion resistant metal luminaire mounting compatible with the lumi-
naires that will not cause galvanic action at contact points. Provide mounting that will correctly position the luminaire to provide the required light distribution.
2.6 LIGHTING CONTROLS
A. General: See section Electrical Specification Lighting Control Devices for additional in-
formation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install exterior luminaires at locations and heights as indicated on the drawings,
in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NFPA 70, ANSI C2 and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting
installation fulfills requirements.
B. Support: Fasten luminaires securely to indicated structural supports; and check to ensure that the required degree of freedom is provided to allow alignment or aiming of
the Luminaires for indicated light distribution. Provide excavation and poured reinforced concrete pads as noted on the drawings and provide anchor hook-bolts, nuts and
washers in conformance with the details and manufacturer's requirements.
C. Condition: Clean exterior luminaires of dirt and debris upon completion of installation. Do not damage finishes or lens or refractor surfaces.
D. Grounding: Provide equipment grounding connections using branch circuit equipment
and connected sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective ground.
13027 SECTION 26 56 00 – PAGE 9 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
3.2 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING CONTROLS
A. General: Install lighting controls as indicated on the drawings and specifications and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Controls: Connect lights to controls furnished under specification section.
2. Adjustment: Provide two visits to the project within the 12 months of project
Substantial Completion date to adjust or reset lighting controls.
a. Visit One shall occur 3 month after Substantial Completion.
b. Visit Two shall occur 11 months after Substantial Completion.
c. At a minimum, both visits require the following individuals to accompany the Contractor.
d. The local lighting controls sales representative and lighting controls
factory trained service technician will be required at both visits.
3.3 TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS
A. General: Upon completion of installation and after energizing branch supply circuitry, apply electrical energy to luminaires to demonstrate compliance with requirements.
1. Check footcandle levels and uniformity of illumination.
2. Check for excessive ballast noise.
3. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.
3.4 LAMP REPLACEMENT
A. General: At time of substantial completion, replace lamps in luminaires which are observed
to be not functioning properly after Contractor's use and during construction.
3.5 ATTIC STOCK LAMPS
A. General: Provide attic stock of lamps at time of substantial completion to meet the following:
1. Provide attic stock lamps amounting to 15 percent (but not less than 6 lamps) of
each lamp type and wattage specified.
2. LED Replaceable Lamp Modules - Provide attic stock lamps amounting to 5% percent (but not less than 2 lamp modules and 2 drivers) of each lamp type and
wattage specified.
3. LED Non-Replaceable Lamp Modules - For uminaires where LED mod-ules/boards are not field-replaceable by the Owner, provide attic stock consisting
of entire LED Luminaire (and drivers) in quantities of 5 percent (but not less than 2 of each Luminaire).
13027 SECTION 26 56 00 – PAGE 10 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
3.6 CLEAN LUMINAIRES
A. Clean: During construction, installation, clean lighting Luminaires of dirt and debris to insure proper performance and operational temperatures. At time of Substantial Completion, all
luminaires must be clean of dirt and debris.
B. Protection: Protect installed Luminaires from damage during the construction period.
END OF SECTION 265600
13027 26 82 40 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 26 82 40 – ELECTRIC WALL HEATERS PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 26 05 01
B. Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Section 26 05 19
1.02 SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings for each wall heater in accordance with Specification Section 26 05 01, General Provisions.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 WALL HEATERS
A. The heaters shall be recessed mounted, of the deluxe cabinet type with size, type capacity and arrangement as shown on the drawings.
B. Cabinet heater color shall be manufacturers standard white. Wall hung units
shall have air inlet in "front top" and air outlets in "front bottom".
C. The electric heating element shall be of the extended surface sheathed resistance type. Each element shall be suitable for the electrical service shown
on the drawing. Each element shall be protected by a high temperature cutout, the sensing device shall extend the full length of the heating element.
D. The units, including disconnect switch, shall be completely pre-wired by the unit
manufacturer. Provide integral thermostat for unit control.
E. Manufacturers: "Qmark" Type CWH 3000 series; or approved equal
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Electric wall heater shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
wired in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC). Coordinate location with trade constructing wall to insure proper location and mounting.
END OF SECTION
13027 26 82 40 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 28 31 00 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 28 31 00 – ADDRESSABLE FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Provisions: Section 26 05 01
B. Raceways and Boxes: Section 26 05 33 C. Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Section 26 05 19
1.02 WARRANTY For warranty information see Section 26 05 01, General Provisions. 1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work described by this section includes the furnishing of all materials, equipment, labor, service and the performing of all operations necessary for the installation of the addressable fire detection system, complete and in operating condition as indicated on the drawings and/or described herein.
B. Preparatory work required to accommodate installation (i.e.: conduit, junction and
pull boxes, outlet boxes, all conduit fittings and accessories, excluding pulling cable furnished by others) shall be furnished and installed under contract for electrical work.
C. The balance of the system installation shall be provided by an Electronics Equipment
Contractor. The entire responsibility of the system, its operation, function and complete maintenance shall be that of the Electronics Equipment Contractor.
1.04 SUBMITTALS Submit shop drawings on all fire alarm system components as well as complete field wiring diagrams and floor plans in accordance with Specification Section 26 05 01, General Provisions.
1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. System shall consist of a microprocessor based fire alarm control panel, addressable alarm initiating devices (manual stations, automatic smoke detectors,
duct smoke detectors and thermodetectors), alarm signaling devices, annunciators, programmable output relays in control panel and a digital alarm communicating
transmitter for calling the local Fire and Police Departments. B. System shall be closed circuit, electronically operated, with short and open wiring
faults, causing audible and visual trouble indication at the control panel. The initiating devices shall be wired in a loop configuration to allow each device or master device
to be assigned an individual address. C. Actuation devices shall be displayed at the control panel according to the following
identification system: Any detection device shall carry its own address which shall be displayed on a digital display by number. The zone/loop and the group (i.e. area,
device type, etc. as programmed) to which it belongs shall be displayed by an LED.
13027 28 31 00 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
D. An adequate number of control relays shall be provided to interface to temperature control equipment, elevator equipment, air handling equipment or other controls to
provide auxiliary operations. lt shall be possible to operate these relays from different sections of the system as follows: Outputs and/or relays shall be available that are
sector specific (i.e. zone/loop) such as FIRE, TROUBLE, SUPERVISORY. E. The fire alarm system shall be provided with remote annunciator panels. Data shall
be multi-plexed from the control panel to each annunciator to reduce wiring requirements.
F. The control panel shall be capable of supporting up to 2000 addressable initiating devices within a single cabinet.
G. Acceptable Manufacturers: Simplex 4100; Pyrotronics "MXL"; Notifier NFS2-3030;
1.06 SCOPE AND RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishings, equipment, materials, and performance of all operations associated with the
installation of an addressable microprocessored fire alarm system as shown on the drawings and as herein specified.
B. The complete installation shall conform to the applicable sections of NFPA 72A, 72B, 72C, 72D Local Code Requirements and National Electrical Code with particular
attention to Article 760. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Each and all items of the fire alarm system shall be listed as a product of a SINGLE
fire alarm system manufacturer under the appropriate category by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc., (UL), and shall bear the UL label. All control equipment shall be listed under UL category UOJZ as a single control unit. Partial listing shall NOT be
acceptable.
B. All control equipment must have transient protection to comply with UL896 requirements.
C. In addition to the UL-UOJZ requirements mentioned above, the system controls shall be UL listed for Power Limited Applications and all circuits must be marked in
accordance with NEC article 760-23. 1.08 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. Upon activation of an any alarm initiating device, the following shall occur:
1. Audio/visual alarm shall occur throughout the building. 2. The alarm shall be annunciated by device type and 40 character custom
label on the building fire alarm control panel and remote annunciator. 3. The alarm shall be annunciated at the remote annunciator.
4. The local Fire and Police Departments shall be called via the digital alarm communicating transmitter. 5. The air handling equipment serving the area in alarm shall shut down.
13027 28 31 00 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
6. Contact closures will interface to the temperature control system for the following alarms:
a. Fire Alarm b. Fire Alarm System Trouble
c. Sprinkler Flow Alarm 7. Email shall be sent to selected personnel via the Internet Interface Module.
B. Upon activation of sprinkler supervisory switch, or a system trouble, the following
shall occur: 1. The fire alarm control panel shall show system trouble.
2. The fire alarm remote annunciator shall show system trouble. 3. A contact closure shall interface to the temperature control system.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 ADDRESSABLE BASES OR DETECTORS
A. If required, addressable devices shall be provided for interfacing with base-compatible ionization and thermal-type detectors.
B. The addressable detector base shall contain an addressable element which is
monitored by a serial polling operation. Device address shall be set in the detector base.
C. The device's addressable element shall be encapsulated to insure protection against environmental contaminants.
D. The addressable device shall incorporate an integral pulsing alarm LED for quick recognition of the alarming device. The base shall have the capability of supporting a
remote pulsing LED. 2.02 PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTORS
A. The addressable photoelectric detector shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. The detector shall be a plug-in, twist/lock unit which shall be capable of removal from its base. B. The detector shall operate on the light scattering principal and include a solid state indicator lamp. The sensor shall compensate against sensitivity changes due to
changes in environmental temperature, humidity and barometric pressure. The sensing chamber shall be open to the outside elements through a protective cover
which will permit product of combustion to enter, while preventing foreign matter from entering and causing unwanted alarms.
C. All electronic circuits must be solid state devices and hermetically sealed to prevent dust, dirt or humidity from interfering with their operation.
D. All circuitry must be protected against electrical transients (RFI) and electromagnetic interference (EMI).
E. No detector shall be damaged for reversed polarity or faulty zone wiring.
13027 28 31 00 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.03 PHOTOELECTRIC DUCT MOUNTED DETECTOR
A. The addressable photoelectric duct smoke detector shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. The detector shall be a plug-in, twist/lock unit which shall be
capable of removal from its base. B. The detector shall operate on the light scattering principal and solid state indicator
lamp. The duct smoke detector shall compensate against sensitivity changes due to changes in environmental temperature, humidity and barometric pressure. The
sensing chamber shall be open to the outside elements through a protective cover which will permit product of combustion to enter, while preventing foreign matter from entering and causing unwanted alarms.
C. All electronic circuits must be solid state devices and hermetically sealed to prevent
dust, dirt or humidity from interfering with their operation. D. All circuitry must be protected against electrical transients (RFI) and electromagnetic
interference (EMI).
E. No detector shall be damaged for reversed polarity or faulty zone wiring . F. Detector shall be mounted in air duct sampling assembly with ½" EMT sampling
tubes installed across existing fan system ductwork where indicated. Field verify sizes of existing ductwork prior to ordering the sampling tubes.
G. Provide an individually addressed relay at each addressable duct detector for shut down of its respective fan system. The relay shall be capable of being programmed
to operate independently of the alarm state of the duct smoke detector.
2.04 THERMAL DETECTORS A. The addressable thermal detectors shall be of the rate compensated fixed
temperature type (135CF) and shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
B. The addressable thermal detectors shall be individually annunciated on the control panel. The addressable thermal detectors shall contain an integral alarm lamp.
2.05 ADDRESSABLE AUXILIARY INTERFACE
A. The addressable auxiliary interface device shall provide for monitoring and interfacing normally open, latching alarm contacts or normally closed latching trouble contacts to the addressable system, via a separate Class B circuit.
B. The auxiliary interface device shall contain an addressable element which is
monitored by a serial polling operation. C. The auxiliary interface device's addressable element shall be encapsulated to insure
protection against environmental contaminants.
D. The addressable auxiliary interface device shall be capable of occupying the same initiating circuit along with other addressable devices.
13027 28 31 00 – PAGE 5 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.06 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL INTERFACE
A. The control interface shall contain an addressable element which is monitored by a serial polling operation.
B. The control interface's addressable element shall be encapsulated to insure protection against environmental contaminants.
C. The addressable control interface shall be capable of occupying the same initiating
circuit along with other addressable devices. 2.07 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
A. General
1. The term "control panel" is used as a general definition, encompassing the following types of devices and operating modes: a. Fire alarm initiating circuits
b. Fire alarm indicating circuits c. Status monitoring circuits
d. Auxiliary control circuits e. Interface logic for all of the above 2. The control unit shall basically consist of the following elements:
a. Display and operating terminal(s) b. Plug-in control modules
c. Main and standby power supplies d. Connection terminals 3. The control units shall be of modular design by means of plug-in cards
allowing later expansion and exact tailoring of detection zones and control outputs to the building's (object's) requirements.
4. The control units shall be microprocessor based and controlled by a program contained in non-volatile memory (ROM or EPROM). Field programmable information may be stored in RAM.
5. The control panel shall be located where indicated on the plans.
B. Basic Performance Data (Input Facilities) 1. All detection and signaling circuits shall be monitored against open/short circuits and ground faults. Should a malfunction occur in any circuit, a
trouble condition shall be indicated while all other circuits continue operating normally.
2. Detection and signaling circuits shall be Class B, two wire. 3. Maximum number of addressable devices per zone/loop shall not exceed 80% of total loop capacity.
C. Addressable Detector Line Circuits
1. The control unit shall be capable of processing and evaluating incoming signals from addressable devices such as automatic detectors, manual pull stations and contact device points.
2. The operating power for the addressable detection devices shall be supplied through the addressable line/circuit.
3. Each line/circuit shall function independently in order to maintain full autonomous operation. 4. The base electronics shall be fixed and all assignments of zones shall be field programmable via system keypad. 5. Should a detection device respond with either an alarm or trouble condition,
it shall be possible to determine the exact device address (location) at the control unit.
6. Control logic data shall be field programmable.
13027 28 31 00 – PAGE 6 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
D. Alarm Test Mode
1. It shall be possible to switch each floor of the fire alarm system selectively to a detector only test mode.
2. The control unit shall automatically issue a reset command to the detector after ten seconds. 3. The above described method shall allow a single person to perform detector
testing without having to travel to another location for detector reset action. 4. When a zone is in the test mode, all remote signaling and control outputs of
the zones to be tested shall automatically be inhibited. The test alarm shall only trigger the internal silent alarm indicator of the control unit and provide a print out of each alarm. If, however, two zones in the test mode alarm
simultaneously or if a manual station is activated, a normal alarm sequence shall be started.
5. The fire alarm control panel shall be U.L. listed to test addressable devices relative to function, sensitivity and calibration.
E. Basic Operation of Control Unit
1. Clear distinction shall be provided between unacknowledged and acknowledged alarm status. 2. Terminal(s) shall be equipped with an alarm acknowledge button, which
shall silence the audible alarm. 3. Subsequent alarms shall actuate the audible alarm devices.
4. Terminal(s) shall be equipped with an alarm reset button which sets the control unit into normal (quiescent) condition. 5. A locked enclosure shall be provided.
6. Actuation of a control unit trouble circuit shall provide both visual and audible annunciation. Silencing the trouble audible shall not extinguish the
visual indicators. 7. Subsequent trouble conditions shall reactivate the audible/ visual trouble indicators.
8. All trouble LEDs shall be non-resettable except by an actual clearing of the trouble condition at which time trouble indicators shall clear automatically
with no requirement for reset of the control unit. 9. There shall be a clear distinction between the audible alarm and trouble signals:
a. Alarm: continuous sounding b. Trouble: intermittent sounding
10. The control unit shall provide multiple access levels to prohibit unauthorized operator access. F. Evacuation: The building audible signals shall sound continuously throughout the entire facility.
G. Fire Information: The system shall automatically transmit fire alarm and trouble
status to the Local Fire Department via digital alarm communicating transmitter. H. Indicating Circuits
1. The control unit shall be capable of monitoring and activating 24 VDC
Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC). 2. Indicating circuits shall be Class B, two wire, allowing T-tapping 3. Each NAC shall support up to 189 addressable notification appliances.
13027 28 31 00 – PAGE 7 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
I. Printer: Remote printer shall be provided at the FACP or where indicated on the
plans. The printer shall provide system event logging using highlighted, English printout for alarming zones. (120 character, RS232 bidirectional interface, The
Printer shall be 24 pin dot matrix and UL listed for fire alarm use with submitted FACP.
J. Power Supply Unit
1. The FACP primary and secondary power suppies shall provide power to the FACP, remote annunciator, and devices connected to the FACP. 2. The control unit shall derive its primary operating power from a 120 VAC, 20
Amp single phase, 60 Hz supply. Secondary power supply shall include:
a. A 24v battery standby power source capable of operating the entire system for a period of twenty four hours in the supervisory mode and then be capable of operating the alarm
devices for a minimum of five minutes. b. Batteries shall be sealed type using lead acid or gel-gel.
3. The power supply unit shall contain suitable overvoltage protection to prevent any malfunction or damage which might occur from line power
surges (lightning). 4. Upon loss of main power, the power supply unit shall automatically revert to
battery power and the system shall remain fully operational. K. Internet Interface Module: Provide in the FACP a internet interface module for
alternate access to the system information using a standard web browser. A built in email feature shall notify the user of individually selected status changes (alarm,
trouble,supervisory, or Truealarm sensor service and statuse reports) either automatically or as scheduled. Compatible pagers, cell phones, or personal assistants shall receive direct email messages or messages forwarded from a user
account. Multiple user accounts and passwords shall be provided similar to the host FACP.
2.08 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
A. The annunciator shall indicate the device address and 40 character custom label of the device initiating the alarm. The custom label shall include the floor location and
type of initiating device, i.e. first floor, main entrance, manual pull station. B. The annunciator shall communicate to the FACP via a serial connection using a
twisted pair cable. (4 conductors)
C. The annunciator shall completely interface with the fire alarm system and be UL listed as a part of the fire alarm system.
D. The annunciator shall be connected to the fire alarm standby power system or shall be provided with a separate standby power system.
E. The annunciator shall have an LCD display and key enabled switches (Acknowledge, Silence, Reset). Five programmable switches shall be provided and programmed for
auxiliary functions, i.e. Drill Switch, Elevator Bypass, Door Holder Bypass, City Disconnect.
13027 28 31 00 – PAGE 8 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.09 ADDRESSABLE NAC CONTROLLER
A. The NAC addressable controller shall include an 8 Amp power supply with charger for internal batteries.
B. The NAC panel shall include an addressable controller for communication and control of up to 189 addressable audible and visual appliances.
C. The NAC panel shall provide 3 Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) with supervised wiring
connections to each appliance that will support “T-tapped” wiring for class B circuits. 2.10 REMOTE STATION-DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATING TRANSMITTER
A. The programmable digital communicator transmitter shall transmit fire alarm activity
to a central supervising location. B. The communicator shall be UL 864 listed as conforming to the requirements of
NFPA 72 for Central Station connections and shall be UL listed as compatible with the connected fire alarm control panel.
C. 24 VDC operating voltage and battery backup shall be provided by the fire alarm control panel.
D. The communicator transmitter shall have the capability of supervising two telephone
lines and of seizing a telephone line and sending an alarm signal on one or both lines without the need of any additional equipment. If telephone service is interrupted on either line for more than 90 seconds, the communicator transmitter
shall be capable of reporting the loss of either telephone line without regard to which line failed. If both lines fail, a local panel mounted trouble alert shall sound.
E. The communicator shall be capable of being programmed to send a test signal to the central supervising location once every 24 hours at any user selected time.
F. Signals to the central supervising location shall indicate which of the communicator
transmitter initiating device circuits are in alarm and which are in trouble. Restoration to normal status shall also be transmitted with specific description messages.
2.11 COMBINATION AUDIO/VISUAL SIGNALING DEVICES
A. The horn/strobe shall be capable of providing a minimum audio output of 94 dB at a distance of 10 feet. Each individual horn/strobe shall be supervised and controlled by
the addressable NAC controller.
B. Strobe (Visual Portion): 1. The lamp shall be a xenon strobe type or equivalent.
2. The color shall be clear or nominal white and "fire" shall be imprinted on lens in red letter.
3. The maximum pulse duration shall be two-tenths of one second (0.2 sec) with a maximum duty cycle of 40 percent. (The pulse duration is defined as the time interval between initial and final points of 10 percent of maximum
signal.)
13027 28 31 00 – PAGE 9 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
4. The intensity shall be selectable at the FACP between 15, 30, 75 and 110 candela.
5. The flash rate shall synchronized and be a minimum of 1 Hz and a maximum of 3 Hz.
6. The appliance shall be placed 80 inches above the highest floor level within the space of 6 inches below the ceiling whichever is lower. 7. In general, no place in any room or space required to have a visual signal
appliance shall be more than 50 feet from the signal (in the horizontal plane). In large rooms and spaces exceeding 100 feet across, without
obstructions 6 feet above the finish floor, such as auditoriums, devices may be placed around the perimeter, spaced a maximum 100 feet apart. 8. No place in common corridors or hallways in which visual alarm signaling
appliances are required shall be more than 50 feet from the signal.
C. Each individual horn/strobe or strobe only shall be capable of being tested individually without alarming the other appliances on the NAC.
D. The candela rating of each notification appliance shall be selectable at the FACP.
E. Notification appliance testing and candela reports shall be provided at the FACP and printed and the system printer.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. All of the actual wiring is not shown as this may vary between acceptable suppliers. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain this information from the
acceptable suppliers and include cost of same in his bid. B. No wiring other than that directly associated with fire alarm detection, alarm or
auxiliary fire protection functions shall be permitted in fire alarm conduits. Wiring splices are to be avoided wherever possible, but if needed they must be made only
in junction boxes and shall be crimp connected. Transposing or changing color coding of wires not permitted. Wire nut-type connections are not acceptable. All conductors in conduit containing more than one wire shall be labeled on each end
with "E-Z markers" or equivalent. Conductors in cabinets shall be carefully formed and harnessed so that each drops off directly opposite to its terminal. Cabinet
terminals shall be numbered and coded. All controls, function switches, etc. shall be clearly labeled on all equipment panels. All wiring shall be checked and tested to insure that there are no grounds, opens or shorts.
C. Contractor shall show evidence of having successfully completed at least three
similar projects. Installation shall be performed by or under the supervision of factory authorized distributor. D. Preparatory work required to accommodate installation (i.e. conduit, junction and pull boxes, outlet boxes, brackets and all conduit fittings and accessories, including
power outlets as required) shall be furnished and installed under this contract.
E. It shall be the responsibility of Division 26 contractor to wire and connect the waterflow, the valve supervisory switches as required by the Fire Marshal and by the existing condition.
13027 28 31 00 – PAGE 10 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
3.02 TEST AND REPORTS
A. A person or company who has written authorization from the manufacturer to act as
an agent for the manufacturer shall make these tests. He need not necessarily be a person from the factory; he can be a dealer who has a letter from the manufacturer stating that he is qualified and has the proper instruments to make such tests.
Perform all tests in the presence of the Owner or a person whom the Owner has elected to represent him. m e Contractor shall perform all electrical and mechanical
tests required by the equipment manufacturer's form. B. This must be performed with the detector at its operational location and under
normal operational environmental conditions in the area. Bench settings are not acceptable. All test and report costs shall be in the Contract price. A checkout report
shall be prepared by the installation technician and submitted in triplicate, one copy of which will be registered with the equipment manufacturer. The report shall include, but not be limited to:
1. A complete list of equipment installed and wired.
2. Indication that all equipment is properly installed and functions and conforms with these specifications. 3. Test area and duct mounted smoke detectors with smoke or Freon or test
instrument. All detectors to be measured in place with the HVAC system operating.
4. Test the system in five random zones by causing shorts, grounds and open circuits to ascertain the proper function of the supervisory system and trouble light(s).
5. Serial numbers, locations by zone and model number for each installed detector.
6. Voltage (sensitivity) settings for each ionization and photoelectric smoke detector. 7. Technicians name, certificate number and date.
8. All installed devices to be tested per function.
C. At the time of the test provide the Owner or his representative with an oral explanation of the operation of the system. After completion of all the tests and
adjustments listed above, the Contractor shall submit the following information to the Owner with a copy to the Engineer.
1. 'Record' conduit layout diagrams including wire color code and/or tag number. 2. Complete 'record' wiring diagrams. 3. Detailed catalog data on all installed system components. 4. Copy of the Test Report.
5. A cover letter, for the above mentioned tests, certifying the entire fire alarm system parts, application and installation meets or exceeds the
recommendations of the manufacturer.
13027 28 31 00 – PAGE 11 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
3.03 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE AVAILABILITY
A. The manufacturer shall guarantee hardware availability, including mechanical
components, over a period of ten (10) years. B. The manufacturer shall guarantee software (program packages) availability,
including updated versions (compatible), over a period of ten (10) years.
C. All equipment required to update field programmability or equipment shall be supplied under the specification.
END OF SECTION
13027 28 31 00 – PAGE 12 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
THIS PAGE IS LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
13027 33 71 73 – PAGE 1 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
SECTION 33 71 73 – COMMERCIAL MULTI-METERING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
Furnish and install the Commercial Multi-Metering equipment as herein specified and shown on the associated electrical drawings.
1.02 REFERENCES
The equipment referenced herein are designed and manufactured according to the following
appropriate specifications. A. ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC).
B. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.
C. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches
D. NEMA PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards, File E8681
E. NEMA PB 2 - Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Deadfront
Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
F. NEMA PB 2.2 - Application Guide for Ground Fault Protective Devices for Equipment.
G. UL 50 - Cabinets and Boxes.
H. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead Front Switches.
I. UL 489 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
J. UL 891- Dead-Front Switchboards.
K. UL977 - Fused Power Circuit Devices.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings shall indicate front and side enclosure elevations with overall dimensions shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; one-line diagrams; equipment
schedule; and switchboard instrument details.
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Furnish products listed by Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated and in accordance with standards listed in Article 1.02.
B. The manufacturing facility shall be registered by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to the
International Organization for Standardization ISO 9002 Series Standards for quality.
13027 33 71 73 – PAGE 2 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products in conformance with manufacturer's
recommended practices as outlined in applicable installation and maintenance manuals.
B. Each switchboard section shall be delivered in individual shipping splits for ease of handling. They shall be individually wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping
skids.
C. Inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period.
D. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory protection and/or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect structure from dirt, water, construction
debris, and traffic. Where applicable, provide adequate heating within enclosures to prevent condensation.
E. Handle in accordance with NEMA PB 2.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Lift
only by lifting means provided for this express purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Conform to NEMA PB 2 service conditions during and after installation of switchboards.
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
Square D Company, General Electric, Siemens, Cutler Hammer
2.02 STRUCTURE
The Commercial Multi-Metering shall be totally enclosed, dead front, free-standing, front and rear aligned. Accessibility shall be from the front. The equipment shall be NEMA Type 1 or NEMA
Type 3R non-walk-in rainproof. The framework shall be steel, secured together to support all cover plates, bussing, and component devices during shipment and installation. All covers shall
have utility sealing provisions where required by the utility.
2.03 FINISH
A. All painted parts shall be pre-treated and provided with a corrosion-resistant, UL recognized acrylic baked paint finish. The paint color shall be ANSI 49 medium light gray
per ANSI standard 255.1-1967.
B. Type 3R enclosures shall be treated with the same process, except all exterior parts shall be of galvannealed steel. All exterior hardware on Type 3R enclosures shall be zinc-
plated steel.
13027 33 71 73 – PAGE 3 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
2.04 SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING
A. The entire multi-metering equipment shall be suitable for operation at the specified
available fault current. The equipment shall be labeled to indicate the maximum available fault current rating, taking into account the structure, bussing, main disconnects, and
tenant main disconnects.
B. 30,000 A peak let-through current is the maximum allowable current any device may let through when used in series with self-contained meter sockets. Multi-metering tenant
main disconnects shall be fully rated.
2.05 BUSSING The multi-metering equipment through bus shall be tin-plated aluminum. The bussing shall be of sufficient cross-sectional area to meet UL Standard 891 for temperature rise. The through bus
shall extend the full length of the equipment and be 100% rated throughout the line-up. Tapered bus is not acceptable. There shall be provisions for future splicing of additional sections from either end. The neutral bus shall also be 100% rated. The ground bus shall be sized per UL
Standard 891, and of the same material as the through bus. Bus connections shall be bolted with
grade 5 bolts and conical spring washers.
2.06 UTILITY COMPARTMENTS The utility metering compartments shall be arranged in hot sequence. The metering
compartments shall be barriered and covers shall have sealing provisions. The metering compartments shall meet local utility standards.
2.07 MAIN DISCONNECT DEVICES The main disconnect shall be circuit breaker. Equipment ground fault shall be provided when
required per the National Electrical Code (NEC). 2.08 METER SOCKETS
Ringless meter sockets shall be rated 125A, 200A or 400A continuous duty and shall be 7-jaw construction. The meter socket shall plug on to a vertical bus assembly on the line side and be
cabled from the load side of the meter socket to the line side of the tenant main disconnect. 2.09 BRANCH DEVICES
Circuit Breakers - Circuit breakers shall be common trip for simultaneous opening of all poles. Breakers shall have an over-center, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanism with quick-make,
quick-break action and positive handle indication. Circuit breakers shall be UL Listed in accordance with UL Standard 489 and shall be rated for the maximum voltage specified and with continuous current ratings as noted on the plans. The circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic.
13027 33 71 73 – PAGE 4 THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
CARMEL, INDIANA
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine area to receive switchboard to provide adequate clearance for switchboard
installation.
B. Check that concrete pads are level and free of irregularities.
C. Start work only after unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
Install switchboard in accordance with manufacturer's written guidelines, the NEC, and local codes. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding.
B. Measure, using a Megger, the insulation resistance of each bus section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for one minute each, at minimum test voltage of 1000 volts dc;
minimum acceptable value for insulation resistance is 1 megohm. NOTE: Refer to manufacturer's literature for specific testing procedures.
C. Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints using calibrated torque wrench per
manufacturer's recommended torque values.
D. Physically test key interlock systems to check for proper functionality. E. Test ground fault systems by operating push-to-test button. 3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust all operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement per manufacturer’s specifications.
B. Tighten bolted bus connections in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.05 CLEANING
Touchup scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish using touch up paint provided by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION